Home

WinCC/Options for Process Control - Service, Support

1. Message Message Class Message text Created for Meaning No 1009000 OS process LBMRT Error Lifebeat monitoring control system runtime messages 1009999 OS process LBMRT Tag 2 s does Lifebeat monitoring 2 s Name of the tag of a control system not exist runtime monitored device messages 1010101 OS process CAS Starts archive service Central Archive Server control system messages 1010102 OS process CAS Archive service is running Central Archive Server control system messages 1010103 OS process CAS Archive servicer cannot Central Archive Server 3 s Error text control system be started error 3 s messages 1010104 OS process CAS Stops archive service Central Archive Server control system messages 1010105 OS process CAS Archive service could not Central Archive Server 3 s Error text control system be stopped error 3 s messages 1010106 OS process CAS Medium backup Central Archive Server 2 s Database segment control system 2 s completed messages successfully 1010107 OS process CAS Backup process failed Central Archive Server 3 s Error text control system error 3 s messages 1010108 OS process CAS Created backup media Central Archive Server 2 s Database segment control system 2 s messages 1010109 OS process CAS Closed backup medium Central Archive Server 2 s Database segment control system 2 s messages 1010110
2. Incoming messages of message class Alarm with priority 10 never activate the signal tag AlarmHighTag In both cases the first condition sets the AlarmTag signal tag and triggers the associated signal See also inking Signal Tags to Messages Page 119 122 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 4 Linking Signal Tags to Messages 3 4 4 Setting Additional Filter Criteria for Messages In addition to the message class and the message priority you can determine additional message properties as filters for the triggering of the signal The following message properties are available Source user text field 1 of the message Area user text field 2 of the message Event user text field 3 of the message Inthe Source column enter text in the lines which determines the message as a filter The text must agree exactly during the filter evaluation Capital and small letters are not taken into account You can also use wildcards stands for any one character and stands for several characters or none If the line is empty every text is taken into account Inthe Area column you determine the message area as a filter criteria You can only select areas that were created in the Picture Tree Manager and that are available locally or from the imported packages Inthe Event column enter text in the line which determines the event des
3. Message Message Class Message text Created for Meaning No 1012025 OS process LAN Sync Cannot acquire Time synchronization control system time from the connected messages WinCC server 1012026 OS process Time jump switched to Time synchronization control system permanent slave mode messages 1012027 OS process Time jump Time Time synchronization control system synchronization permanently messages deactivated 1012028 OS process Time reception service not Time synchronization control system started messages 1012029 OS process Time reception service running Time synchronization control system messages 1012030 OS process Time synchronization is Time synchronization control system deactivated messages 1012245 PLC process RedundancyControl Loss of Redundancy control system serial connection messages 1012247 PLC process OS server Master 1 s Redundancy 1 s Computer name control system OS server standby 2 s 2 s Computer name messages redundancy error 1012249 PLC process RedundancyControl Redundancy control system Connection of network card messages MAC address lost 1012264 PLC process communication breakdown Maintenance 8 s Name of device to control system 8 s which connection was lost messages 1012266 PLC process current project deactivated Maintenance 8 s Name of enabled control system 8 s WinCC project messages 1012267 PLC process AS OS connection Maintenance
4. wi GES 10 33 11 536 11 LTOPTOT fe Containert D Container i Container3 3 Containers kju ka yw OD Si Containers B Containers 2 Elements in Graphic Pictures Graphic pictures consist of static and dynamic elements Static picture elements do not change in representation Dynamic picture elements display process tags or statuses and their change during the process This includes the following picture elements WinCC Options for Process Control 350 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 12 Process Controlling Graphic Pictures Numeric values Bar graph 3D bar graph Output and input texts Status displays Status and analog displays Dynamic picture elements Depending on the configuration both the static and the dynamic elements may allow user interactions Process values Digital Value Bar graph Meaning Numeric values from the process are displayed in the form of numeric output A unit can be displayed next to the numeric value Numeric input is used for setting setpoint values or other parameters Numeric values may be distinguished according to their display format e Integer whole numbers with 2 to 9 places e Fixed point numbers fixed position of the decimal point preceded by between 2 and 9 digits and followed by 0 to 5 digits e Floating point numbers variable position of the decimal point depending on the value preceded by 2 to 8 digits and
5. Unassigned containers and pictures G i ij Container NewPdl0 Pdl NewPdl10 Ready UF U YW Each area has information about its contents in the title bar You can change the size of the individual operating areas with the mouse How to activate the status bar The status bar provides you with the following information e Displays an appropriate help text for a selected function e Displays the key status e g the Num Lock key e Click on the size box to change the window size of the application 1 Select the View gt Status Bar menu command 2 Select the check box The status bar is displayed Clear the check box to hide the toolbar Page WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager 6 4 Working with the Picture Tree Manager 6 4 Working with the Picture Tree Manager 6 4 1 Working with the Picture Tree Manager Overview Start the Picture Tree Manager by double clicking in WinCC Explorer The editor has only one window for editing the hierarchy You can access all of the editing options in this window The most effective way for you to work is with drag amp drop operations The following functionality is available e Youcan create and change the hierarchy with the aid of the clipboard and the Cut Copy and Paste functions e You can access editing functions by using the Menu Bar the pop up menu or with a drag amp drop op
6. lt Shift Picture up gt Moves up one hierarchy level for example from Container 9 to Container 7 lt Shift Picture down gt Moves down one hierarchy level 302 When you right click an icon in the Picture Tree Navigator the name of the picture containing the message source is displayed Each icon can refer to a different message source WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 7 User Interface See also Page Page Page 303 9 7 3 Working Area Ubersicht Individual pictures of the various areas of a plant are displayed in the working area The process is displayed controlled and operated in the working area You have the following options for displaying a picture in the working area e You select the picture in the overview area e You use the navigation buttons of the picture hierarchy e You use picture selection dialog boxes e You use configured picture changes Function Function Function Function Function Function See also Page Page Page 303 9 7 4 Button Area bersicht Displayed in the button area are buttons that trigger operator activity Two button sets are defined in runtime WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 303 Process control runtime 9 7 User Interface Button set 1 D gt vaol ga e te gt hes jars Button set 2 4
7. Log the actions of the Project Editor Type of logging Text log hd Display the log file after the configuration is completed Only show in the event of an error v Behavior if there is already a log file Overwrite v Project documentation for the current configuration Print View Printer Setup Current configuration Export Import OK Cancel Apply Activities when Processed by Project Editor In the Activities when processed by project editor group you specify which of the following settings are to be transferred during processing by the OS Project Editor e Only the settings that allow changing data in runtime Load Online Changes e All settings e Only the settings of the message configuration WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 89 OS Project Editor 2 10 General tab Select the Only configurations capable of online download of changes radio button if you want to reconfigure all settings except for the alarm system and startup list All OS Project Editor control fields whose settings are not sent to the project are disabled This option is the default when the editor is not used for the first time When configuration is complete the full runtime system and alarm system are transferred to the project over again When the OS Project Editor is started for the first time this is the only available setting in
8. Set up the values in the following input boxes either by entering the values straight into the input box or else by using the slider or the spin box e Window Width and Window Height Define the window s dimensions at these parameters e Top and Left Define the position of the first window at these parameters relative to the coordinate origin of the working area e Horizontally displaced and Vertically displaced Define the position of the next window relative to the previous windows at these parameters WinCC Options for Process Control 80 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 8 The Runtime window tab The Graphic positioning allows you to position the windows with ease To do so click Detail Note The settings are limited by layout specific considerations If nothing is specified in the configuration file up to 16 windows are possible Grids have from 1 to 4 fields available in both dimensions The following settings are suggested by the OS Project Editor e The windows have a size of 150 x 120 pixels e The position is 20 pixels from the top and 20 pixels from the left e The next window is displaced horizontally and vertically by 10 pixels See also raphic positioning of a runtime window Page Runtime window tab Page 2 8 3 Group display Introduction Group displays provide a compressed display of picture modules and use windows that adapt to the size of pictu
9. Layout Configuration Number of configured areas 9 Number of configured servers 1 Preview Number of areas Horizontal E ee Vertical E 2 ____ 6 Number of servers Horizontal Vertical m OK Cancel The Number of Configured Areas output box indicates the number of plant sections currently configured in the Picture Tree Manager The Number of Configured Servers output box shows the number of servers available in the packages The Suggestion button function derives the number of area and server buttons from the configured hierarchy if the layout so permits The suggestion will be applied in the input fields of the Number of Areas and Number of Servers groups In the Number of areas group you specify the number of buttons horizontally and vertically directly in the input box with the slider or spin box You will find the limits for input are shown alongside the slider For the sake of clearly labeling the area buttons it is useful to arrange more areas vertically than horizontally You will see the difference in the area preview if for instance you create four horizontal and three vertical area buttons or three horizontal and four vertical area buttons If the layout supports Server View and server buttons which were generated in the overview window the Number of Servers group is enabled Use this field to define the buttons in the horizontal and v
10. A new measuring point in the Component List Editor can always be created if no AS OS engineering has been performed in the ES In this case you can configure the necessary data in the Component List Editor and create a new measuring point 1 Select the Edit gt Create New Measuring Point menu command 2 Click the toolbar button or double click in a blank line of the Component List Editor The following dialog box opens Create measuring point Ea Measuring point Niveau Ae Type Niveau controller Area Ares3 x Entry point an PTNO PDL OK Cancel 3 Configure the data in the four input boxes You can select the text from the options provided or enter a text using the keyboard Field Measuring point Definition Action Click fa to open the tag selection dialog box Select a configured WinCC tag Click OK The selection is saved Type Select the measuring point type you want to assign to the specified measuring point from the drop down list box Only the types configured as structure tags are offered for selection Area Select the hierarchy area you want to assign to the specified measuring point from the drop down list box The areas configured in the Picture Tree Manager are offered for selection Entry point picture Click Ey to open the entry point picture selection dialog box Select the picture Click Open OK Use this button to save your settings and close t
11. If you wish to configure more than one monitor for the destination device in runtime in the OS Project Editor you need to arrange the monitors in ascending numerical order in the display properties of the Control Panel of the operating system e Two monitors arranged horizontally 11 2 e Two monitors arranged vertically 1 2 e Four monitors arranged horizontally e Four monitors arranged in a cube 71 2 KEN Invisible parts of application windows Due to the properties of the operating system application windows must be a certain size in order for all parts ofthe window to be visible This for example affects windows that are divided or that contain additional output fields in the status bar Depending on the configured display WinCC Options for Process Control 106 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 13 Split Screen Manager resolution and the number of screens size of the desktop a window might have to exceed the width of a monitor in order for all window parts to be displayed The runtime interface is not affected by this Using other graphics cards Other graphics cards may deviate from the performance characteristics of the Matrox cards This relates for example to the display of notes and objects such as dialog boxes and application windows Take into consideration the special characteristics of the cards of the various manufacturers The following peculiarities are known e An ob
12. In the Areas tab you configure the arrangement of the area buttons and server buttons for the overview window Here you also specify the user s access to areas for which he has no authorization The area buttons result from the plant sections that you have configured in the Picture Tree Manager and consist of the following e A button to open the area e A group display to show the group value of this area e A button to open the Picture Tree Navigator The server buttons are used to visualize a server in the overview window and consist of the following WinCC Options for Process Control 70 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 7 The Areas Tab e A button for selecting the server e A group display to show the group value of this server T Layout x Message configuration ElMessage display fm Area E Runtime window Basic data General r Atrangement of the areas in the overview ei gt Preview Visible areas Areas not required gt gt X lt Empty Button gt E Zone Zone lt lt HBP Server arrangement in the area overview lt local computer gt up down up dawn r For areas with missing authorization Picture selection not possible Picture selection possible with area button Picture selection possible with area button and group display OK Cancel Apply Visible Areas The Visible areas list sho
13. Li Liaison_ Ajouter Supprimer Imprimer Configuration de l installation a Affichage Configuration imprimante Position des quipements dans la configuration de l installation r Cycle de surveillance gt Priorit fo C automatique personnalis e C 5s 10s C 1 min Procedure Perform the following steps to open the Lifebeat Monitoring dialog box 1 Double click Lifebeat Monitoring in WinCC Explorer The Lifebeat Monitoring dialog box opens Create or edit the configuration in this dialog box In this dialog box you configure the complete Lifebeat Monitoring WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 199 Lifebeat Monitoring 5 8 Dialog box of the Lifebeat Monitoring Structure of the dialog box The dialog box is divided into the following areas e Device list The name of the Lifebeat object is derived from the device name All of the connections to the lifebeat objects that are to be monitored are entered in the device list As standard the device list contains five lines You can change the number of input lines by clicking Add and Delete Ina WinCC client project the number of lines in the device list corresponds to the number of loaded server packages The device name and device type are pre defined at the WinCC client You cannot add any new input lines or delete any input lines e Buttons The buttons are used to insert delete prin
14. The entry DCF77 demodulated is shown in this input box by default You cannot edit this input box Time reference In this dialog box you specify the desired time reference The following time references can be set UTC local time or CET CEST Check CET CEST time zone Suppress Synchronization When this check box is enabled the setting of the CET CEST time zone is checked in the Control Panel The result is saved in the event protocol If a different time zone is set in the control panel the check is not made If this check box is enabled the system time is not synchronized Balance Deviations Smoothly If this check box is enabled the system time is smoothly balanced to the current time if the deviation is below the maximum permissible value tolerance The internal timing is slowed down or accelerated accordingly by 1 ms per second or 60 ms per minute First update after In this input box you specify how many correctly decoded time message frames minutes must occur before the system time is updated for the first time Update Interval In this input box you specify how many time message frames minutes must occur following the initial update before a renewed comparison to the system time or where appropriate a correction of the system time is made Permitted In this input box you specify the maximum permissible time difference in ms that Deviation can occur before the system
15. Background color OFF Came In Background color ON Came In Background Color Off Came In Acknowledged Background color ON Came In Acknowledged Background color OFF Went Out Unacknowledged Background color ON Went Out Unacknowledged Background color OFF Font Color Tolerance Bit 27 Tolerance High Bit 26 Tolerance Low Came In Font color ON Came In Font color OFF Came In Acknowledged Font color ON Came In Acknowledged Font color OFF Went Out Unacknowledged Font color ON Went Out Unacknowledged Fontcolor OFF Came In Font color ON Came In Font color OFF Came In Acknowledged Font color ON Came In Acknowledged Font color OFF Went Out Unacknowledged Font color ON Went Out Unacknowledged Font color OFF 42 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Overview of process control system options 1 9 Migration of Extended Status and Analog Displays Prior to WinCC V6 2 Object Property Message Type New Object Properties Background color Bit 29 Warning High Came In Background color ON Warning Bit 28 Warning Low Came In Background Color Off Came In Acknowledged Background color ON Came In Acknowledged Background color OFF Went Out Unacknowledged Background color ON Went Out Unacknowledged Background color OFF Came In Background color ON Came In Background Color Off Came In Acknowledged Background color ON Came In
16. Display Alarm Source via Group Display Content of the picture stack Plant configuration picture Reporting job WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Index Distributed systems Overview Documentation Content Download Changes Drag and drop Dynamic integration Modify Dynamic picture elements Dynamic Wizards E Edit Measuring point Editing Container name Picture Visualization of message blocks Editor Audio alarm 25 Component List Editor OS Project Editor 26 Picture Tree Manager Editors 23 Install Lifebeat Monitoring 25 Time Synchronization 27 Effects Alarm Logging Group display Hierarchy On the text library Time reception service User Administrator Empty Button Arrange 75 Enable Messages Entry point picture Modify Exit Picture Tree Manager Runtime Exponential number Export Object templates Export file File format 265 Extended analog display 35 Extended Analog Display WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Group display 67 81 211 225 240 247 Extended status display Extended Status Display F Faulty server Configuring in the PCS 7 environment File format Export file 265 Filter Filtering area specific 63 Find Measuring point Floating point Floating point number Format Function of the Analog Display 39 Full screen Functionality G Garbage Collection
17. Generating Component list Graphic Pictures Operating Graphic positioning Graphics Designer Group acknowledgement 310 326 X 3 Hierarchy Group Display Group display hierarchy 63 270 Group message 342 Group value 29 35 Grouping Trend groups online Guide H Hardcopy Hardware for time synchronization Smart card Hide Area 75 Status bar Toolbar 375 Index Hide messages Hierarchy Change Change by means of drag and drop Change using the menu bar Change using the shortcut menu Container Create Create using the menu bar Create using the shortcut menu Creating by means of drag and drop Delete Delete by means of drag and drop Delete using the menu bar Delete using the shortcut menu Effects Managing Modify Node Print Restraints Root node Save Setup Hierarchy window Highest priority messages Icons Meaning Import Picture objects Incoming alarm list Industrial Ethernet Bus 164 168 Information Picture Tree Manager Input Text Insert Container 230 Container after container Container before container Container into container New container Node Picture 218 231 Picture in container 218 Install Editors 23 Integer Interface setting 376 J Journal list L Language Changeover Language change 208 Layout 54 Layout configuration 54 Lifebeat Lifebeat Monitoring 25 Load Trend groups Local Area N
18. Horn 3 12 Signal module 3 12 6 PCI Bus Signal Module The signal module is a PCI bus card for PCs It is used for controlling up to three external signaling devices and possesses three binary inputs Insert the signal module into the motherboard of the operator station PC Check whether a PCI slot is available WinCC Options for Process Control 150 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 12 Signal module Zusammenschalten mehrerer Bedienkanale mit au enliegenden Quittierungstasten sands See also 1 Bedienkanal Kleinsch tz K1 Relaiskontakt des H rmelders RE Reset Eingang RA Reset Ausgang Br cke X6 Pin 3 4 gesteckt i internes und externes R cksetzen Br cke X6 Pin 3 4 offen internes R cksetzen Ext Quittierungstaster Au erhalb liegender Verteiler Note You can only use a PCI card as a signal module if it has a product status gt 4 see self adhesive label e g ES4 Structure of the Switches and Jumpers with the PCI Bus Page 152 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 151 Horn 3 12 Signal module 3 12 7 Structure of the Switches and Jumpers with the PCI Bus Overview The following simplified representation of the signal module with 32 Bit PCI bus interface shows the physical arrangement and the pin numbering of the switches and jumpers Their use is explained below 246 810 BELLS X6 1 3974 PCI
19. Logging the activities of the project editor 90 You can make the settings for the log file in the Log the actions of the Project Editor group The log file contains the most important project settings you have made in the OS Project Editor for example the files you have copied or the messages you have created The log can also included entries about errors that occur To create a log select one of the following options from the Type of logging drop down list box e No log e Text log e HTML log WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 10 General tab The log file that is created is placed in one of the following directories e Text log lt Project gt SSM Projecteditor txt e HTML log lt Project gt SSM Projecteditor In the Display the log file after the configuration is completed drop down list box select one of the following options e Not displayed e Always displayed e Only show in the event of an error The log is opened in Notepad if it is registered or in a registered browser In the Behavior if there is already a log file drop down list box you can specify whether the new log should overwrite the previous entries in the existing log file or whether it should be appended to the current entries When the OS Project Editor is run often the Append setting can result in very large files For this reason we recommend the Overwrite setting T
20. Process window layout Server assignment WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Trend group display 83 Monitor configuration Modify 56 Monitoring 285 313 Motor Move Node Multi VGA 105 N Naming conflicts New measuring point create Node Insert Move O Object templates Creating Export Object Type 255 Online Help Call Use Online tag Online trends Open loop control Operating Graphic Pictures Operating elements Operation Operation list Operator displays Operator input message Operator input messages Operator process control Operator prompt of a Option Chip card OS online delta download OS project editor Configuration file OS Project Editor 26 48 Configuration file Outgoing alarm list Output format Output text 377 Index Overview Distributed systems Overview Area Overview window 70 Adapting Configuring Owner P PCS 7 Web Client Performance range Picture 234 Basic picture Composition Cut Delete 221 242 Edit Information Insert 218 231 Load all Operation Paste picture into container Save all Selecting directly Selection by name Selection via measurement point Picture by measurement point Picture change 1103 Picture change memory Picture configuration Configuring in the PCS 7 environment Picture element Picture hierarchy 103 303 Pictur
21. S7SINECL2_Verb Connected S5R3964P_Verb Connected Device type Device name S5CP14131 Status Disrupted WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 313 Process control runtime 9 8 System operator input If a number of automation systems AS are connected to an OS they are shown is series The servers in the system configuration are represented as follows on a client e Disturbed A device monitored by the server has failed e Failed The server itself has failed e Established The connection to the server has been established 4 WinCC f Server 1 Server 2 Server 3 Disrupted Failure Loaded Procedure 1 Click this button This displays the current process picture 2 Click this button to exit the process picture 9 8 12 How to select the plant section Overview The pictures of the individual plant sections are displayed in the work area You can select the pictures in the overview area WinCC Options for Process Control 314 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 8 System operator input Button Display There are three color display modes for the area buttons e No color gray The button is not active No pictures can be selected This is the case if the user currently logged on does not possess the Authorization for Area e Black lettering on gray background The buttons are active You can se
22. Server WinCC Client Configuration file 259 Create Configuring Loop in Alarm Overview window Synchronization via Local Area Network Synchronization via system bus BCE Synchronization via system bus Industrial Ethernet bus 168 Trend groups Configuring in the PCS 7 environment Behavior with a Faulty Server Example configuration Message configuration Picture configuration User authorization Confirm Delete hierarchy For replacing pictures Container Copy Cut Delete 222 Insert Insert after container Insert before container Insert into container Insert new Renaming Container name Content Documentation OS Project Editor documentation 47 Content of the picture stack Display 374 Copy Container CP1613 168 CP1623 168 Create Configuration file Hierarchy New measuring point Create using the menu bar Hierarchy Create using the shortcut menu Hierarchy Creating Object templates Creating by means of drag and drop Hierarchy CSIG cfg Cursor 309 Cut Container Picture D Date 299 Date format Defining the area name Alarm Logging Delete Container 222 Hierarchy Picture 221 Delete by means of drag and drop Hierarchy Delete using the menu bar Hierarchy Delete using the shortcut menu Hierarchy Deleting the Hierarchy Delta Save Dialog box Properties of WinCC Online Trend Control Digital Value Disable Alarms Disable user filters
23. The standard toolbar is now selected 3 Clear the check box to hide the toolbar See also Menu bar Page 210 6 3 3 Data window Structure The data window of Picture Tree Manager is divided into the following areas e The left upper hierarchy window displays the hierarchy of the systems subsystems functions and pictures as a tree The first container the highest in the hierarchy has the name of the WinCC project and can neither be moved nor deleted A container can be empty or with the exception of the root container can contain a picture The upper right preview window displays the contents of the picture highlighted in the hierarchy window when it is activated All pictures available in the WinCC project which have not yet been assigned in the hierarchy as well as the icon of an empty container are displayed at the bottom of the selection window System pictures that begin with are not displayed WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 227 Picture Tree Manager 6 3 Picture Tree Manager Structure 6 3 4 Introduction Procedure See also 228 Picture Tree Manager Ito mcp iol x Project Edit view Options Help FIRE Hierarchy of the containers and pictures Picture preview NewPdll PDL Ito mep Containerd 4 Container Container 8 Containers NewPdll PDL bow bee vee ts
24. d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BS ym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym lt LOCAL gt LTO_1_LTOPTO3 lt ALL gt Controller 001 Controller 002 Controller 003 Controller 004 Controller 005 De Controller Istwert Simulation Controller Istwert Simulation Controller Istwert Simulation Controller Istwert Simulation Controller Istwert Simulation Controller 011 Controller 012 Controller 013 Controller 014 Controller 015 Controller Istwert Simulation Controller Istwert Simulation Controller Istwert Simulation Controller Istwert Simulation Controller Istwert Simulation Controller O06 Controller 007 Controller 008 Controller 009 Controller 010 Controller Istwert Simulation Controller Istwert Simulation Controller Istwert Simulation w Fa System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Filter including excluding Download Loop display in working area Show as Loop display as window C Group Process picture in working area Process picture as window Cancel de 353 Process control runtime 9 12 Process Controlling Graphic Pictures Dialog Description Functionality Description Computer This drop down list box is only active if the dialog box is opened from wi
25. 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 365 Chip card Reader 10 3 How to set the interface 10 3 How to set the interface Requirements Procedure 366 The following requirements apply if you want to use WinCC with a chipcard e The Chipcard option is installed e An interface COM1 or COM2 for example is assigned to the chipcard reader To activate the menu in User Administrator perform the following steps after you have installed the WinCC Chipcard option 1 Double click the WinCC Chipcard Terminal icon on the Control Panel of the operating system You need Windows administrator rights for the WinCC Chipcard Terminal Configuration dialog 2 Inthe open WinCC Chipcard Terminal Configuration dialog box select the Terminal active check box 3 Activate the function Use existing smart card reader not Plug amp Play if you use the old smart card readers B1 CardMan 9010 and B1 CardMan 9011 4 From the Connection drop down list box select the required interface and click OK Your input will be accepted WinCC Chipcard Terminal Configuration x C Deactivated Terminal gt Active Terminal Connection com1 bd V Use old Chipcard reader not Plug amp Play Cancel When you then open the User Administrator the Chipcard menu will appear If you select the Terminal disabled check box in the WinCC Chipcard Terminal Configuration dialog box on the Control Panel the Chipcard menu i
26. 178 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Time Synchronization 4 6 Simultaneous use of Time Synchronization over System Bus and Local Area Network Note If the WinCC servers belong to a Windows domain and a specialized device such as Siclock operates as the time master on the system bus the Siclock and the domain must have the same time We recommend equipping both with an external time receiver Synchronization via system bus is not allowed if the Use the time from a connected WinCC server check box is activated This is because it makes no sense to import the time from a server connected to the system bus and then to send this time back to the system bus WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 179 Time Synchronization 4 7 Hardware Support of Time Synchronization 4 7 4 7 1 Hardware Support of Time Synchronization Hardware Support of Time Synchronization Industrial Ethernet with automation systems Time synchronization must have access to the Industrial Ethernet Bus with which the AS communicates Special hardware boards include the function of sending and receiving time message frames The following Industrial Ethernet devices support time synchronization e CP1613 hardware board The software is integrated onboard e SoftNet BCE Hardware Software solution A software driver emulates the hardware The two devices have the following properties e They have an intern
27. 356 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 12 Process Controlling Graphic Pictures Plant overview area overview ai Subsection 1 De Subsection 2 gt Subsection 3 am Changes from one area level or subsection to another subsection level e g from subsection level 1 to subsection level 2 Vv Changes within a subsection level to the pictures contained within this subsection level e g in subsection level 1 from picture 1 to picture 2 and back WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 357 Process control runtime 9 12 Process Controlling Graphic Pictures 9 12 5 Selecting Graphic Pictures Directly Selection options There are various ways in which you can select graphic pictures directly Selecting graphic pictures via the picture stack The Split Screen Manager logs every picture change in the working area This enables you to select pictures that have been displayed previously In each working area in the basic picture there is a dedicated picture stack which stores the last eight picture names selected in each working area You use the following button to select the picture that is stored in the picture stack in front of the current process picture You use the following button to select the picture that is stored in the picture stack after the current pr
28. Apply The new tag is applied in the tag management of the project Enter an existing tag name directly If this tag does not have the Binary Tag data type the following note is displayed Must be a binary tag E3 The selected tag already exists and is not of the type Binary You may only use binary tags 2 Confirm the tag selection using the lt gt or lt gt key 3 Click Apply Your settings are saved You can assign several message classes or message properties to a signal tag Signal tags can also be activated as follows e by scripts e by user actions e with the aid of the Central Signaling Devices function in Alarm Logging 3 4 6 Specifying a Triggering Authorization for the Signal Tags Introduction Inthe Authorization column on the Message Assignment tab you use an authorization level to define whether the signal tag will be triggered for a specific user The authorizations of a logged in user are applied on the basis of the User Administrator configuration In addition to the configured trigger permission the audible indicator also checks in runtime if the user has the Release for area access right Only when the user receives the actual messages on which they are based does it make sense to trigger signals for the user For example you have Watch permission for the WarnVar signal tags If a message meets the specified filter criteria and comes from an area for which the user has Watch
29. Area preview window opens and you can follow the configuration Check the settings in the Basic Data tab to avoid any unwanted data overwrites Page 70 Basic data tab Page 85 How to arrange Empty buttons Empty buttons serve as placeholders for the positioning of area buttons in the overview area Plant areas are not assigned to these buttons until later This method avoids having to move a number of area buttons around later Plant operators work with a familiar area overview even after an expansion Open the OS Project Editor and select the Areas tab Select the lt Empty Button gt entry from the Areas not needed list Click lt This entry is placed in the Visible areas list Click Up or Down You will move this area to the desired position Click Preview The Area preview window opens and you can follow the configuration Check the settings in the Basic Data tab to avoid any unwanted data overwrites WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 75 OS Project Editor 2 7 The Areas Tab See also Page 70 Page 85 Page 79 Page Page 83 WinCC Options for Process Control 76 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 8 The Runtime window tab 2 8 The Runtime window tab 2 8 1 Runtime window tab Introduction You configure the number and arrangement settings of the pre configured picture windows in the Ru
30. Changes in the Layout tab affect settings in the Areas Runtime Windows and Basic Data tabs WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 55 OS Project Editor 2 4 The Layout Tab 2 4 4 Changing the monitor configuration Introduction With the configuration of the monitor you set the desired screen division for the target device in runtime Procedure 1 Open the OS Project Editor Select the corresponding monitor configuration from the Layout tab 2 Check the settings in the Basic Data tab to avoid any unwanted data overwrites Note Changes in the Layout tab affect settings in the Areas Runtime Window and Basic Data tabs Up to four screens are supported each screen having one working area one button area one overview window and an unrestricted number of pre configured process windows Before using the OS Project Editor you need to set the Multi VGA in the Windows Control Panel 2 4 5 Adapting the overview window Introduction The overview window is a continuous display that offers an overview of the entire plant Each plant area is represented by an area button in the overview area Procedure 1 Open the OS Project Editor Click Detail on the Layout tab next to Overview Extended Configuration This opens the dialog box for adapting the overview area 2 Change the number of buttons 3 Open the preview during configuration This gives you a
31. Configure user authorizations in the server project and in the WinCC client project The user authorization matrix can only be configured on the WinCC client after the packages of all server projects with configured picture hierarchies Picture Tree Manager have been loaded The areas of a server project are only displayed in the columns of the user authorization matrix on the WinCC client when the package of the server project has been loaded onto the WinCC client project If reconfiguration occurs within the server project at area level in the Picture Tree Manager hierarchy the package for the server project must be generated again You must then load the package on the WinCC client and adjust the authorization matrix Behavior with a Faulty Server The areas of all server projects are displayed in the overview of the basic data picture If a server fails all the areas on this server are displayed as deactivated The order of the areas is not changed as a result of this deactivation When the server comes back online or following a change to the redundant server the areas are displayed as enabled once more Lifebeat Monitoring See also 1 2 5 Introduction Procedure Lifebeat Monitoring is configured on the servers WinCC clients can also be monitored in addition to the OS and the AS Manual configuration of Lifebeat Monitoring is not necessary on the WinCC client itself The project only needs to be updated in the editor after lo
32. Format color Toconfigure the display for the statuses of a bit you select the bit from the Used bits list You then select the status from the Status list for whose value you want to change the pre configured color settings Click the desired color in the color matrix The first click changes the background color and the second click changes the text color foreground color Ifthe value and or the background to be displayed for the utilized bit and the selected status is to flash select the appropriate check box Specify the flashing colors as appropriate If you want to change the format of the value to be displayed open the object properties of the extended analog display In the Text properties group double click the Format property and enter the desired format If you want to output the value as text double click Value as text in the properties group Other or activate the Display value as text check box in the configuration dialog box Configure the display options for additional bits 10 Click OK The settings will be applied 11 Connect the tags for the value that you want to display and for the group value in the object properties of the extended analog display 12 Select the Value property in the Other properties group for this purpose Select the Tag command from the shortcut menu of the Dynamic column Select the tag from the Select tag window 13 Select the property
33. Graphics Designer pictures This documentation shows you the following e How to create and change the hierarchy of a project e How to define systems and subsystems e How to assign pictures to these systems e How to edit pictures e How to create containers WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 207 Picture Tree Manager 6 2 General information about the Picture Tree Manager 6 2 General information about the Picture Tree Manager Functionality 208 The Picture Tree Manager is a WinCC option and is only available to you if you selected the option package Basic Process Control during installation The Picture Tree Manager editor is used to manage a hierarchy of systems subsystems and Graphics Designer pictures The Picture Tree Manager provides you with the following functions e Create and change a project hierarchy e Support during the definition of systems and subsystems e Support during assignment of pictures to these systems It arranges the pictures created in the Graphics Designer e Support for picture selection in runtime by navigation in the hierarchy tree Note When you create new WinCC projects you should also generate and save a picture hierarchy with the Picture Tree Manager Your settings in the Picture Tree Manager relate to the current WinCC project Actions that cross projects such as copying moving pictures and systems across multiple projects are not
34. Pelle Colored button display There are two color display modes for individual buttons e Shaded The buttons are not active These buttons cannot be used e Colored The buttons are active These buttons may be used Switching between the button sets With these buttons you switch between the two button sets When you move the cursor over a button a What s This help item with the button description will be displayed When you click the button the corresponding function is executed Note You can find an overview of the buttons and their functions in Overview of button functions of runtime See also Page Page Page Page WinCC Options for Process Control 304 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA wil Process control runtime 9 7 User Interface 9 7 5 Runtime Window Introduction Top window Special fields The behavior of the Runtime windows in process control system options has changed in Version 6 of WinCC The runtime user interfaces contain the following different window types Pre configured picture windows containing pictures that overlay the working area These top windows are pictures in a process window or picture components in loop display and group display mode Pre configured picture windows containing only one picture that overlays the working area These special fields include such items as warning boxes or information windows the Picture Tree Navigator that displays the hi
35. System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 291 Process control runtime 9 5 How to activate a project for Runtime operation 9 5 How to activate a project for Runtime operation Introduction Activate the project after having completed all preparations Procedure 1 Click on File in the WinCC Explorer The File menu opens 2 Select the Activate menu command WinCC Runtime starts WinCC Options for Process Control 292 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 6 Overview of the button functions in runtime 9 6 Overview of the button functions in runtime The table below lists all buttons which are available in runtime and their functionality Button set 1 Roch bet Se 42 BR 3 Button set 2 lt m Functionality Button set 2 Meaning Displays button set 2 System control elements Password Exit Runtime Key Change Button Set lt d Displays button set 1 change Open the LOGIN dialog box authorization required none PR Exits runtime in a defined manner authorization required system Switch language Changes to a different language authorization required monitoring Online Help Opens the online help authorization required none Save Screen Composition Saves the current composition of displayed pictures on all screens authorization required authorization for area Display the Plant Picture Disp
36. and acts as a master on bus 1 access point 1 Access point 1 always operates as active master and acts as though it is handling external synchronization regardless of whether it really handles external synchronization This prevents a standby master from taking over the role of the active master Synchronization between the two bus systems would be split in this case The station would receive two different times from the two bus systems Access point 1 assumes the active master function if another master is activated on bus 1 during startup of the station Slave Master Acts as the master slave combination in reverse See also 170 Note The selection boxes are disabled if the station to be configured is WinCC Client he Time Synchronization editor Page 164 Simultaneous use of Time Synchronization over System Bus and Local Area Network Page 177 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Time Synchronization 4 4 How to Configure the Synchronization through the System bus BCE 4 4 How to Configure the Synchronization through the System bus BCE Introduction You can use a BCE network card to synchronize the time over the system bus If only one device is being configured always use access point 1 With the option Access point 2 you can configure the following tasks e Use a second access point with a CP1613 or CP1623 card e Synchronize two system buses over
37. characters The device names are set by default in a WinCC Client project The symbolic station name is entered as the device name which can may be longer than 21 characters Device type Specify the device type in this input box Double click this input box to open a selection list The following device types are available e OS e OS OP e OS PC e OS Client e AS 4xx e AS 3xx e AS 2xx e AS e Client v is set by default in a WinCC Client project Enter the OS status as the device type Connection Double click in this input box to open a selection list Select your configured connection from this list See also Page Page Page WinCC Options for Process Control 202 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Lifebeat Monitoring 5 8 Dialog box of the Lifebeat Monitoring 5 8 3 Buttons of Lifebeat Monitoring Overview Button Meaning Close Use this button to close the dialog box Print Use this button to print the feedback messages from the device list Printer Setup Use this button to set up the current printer Preview Use this button to output a print preview of the feedback from the device list to the screen Add Use this button to create a new empty line within the device list This function is not available in WinCC Client projects Delete Use this button to delete a line within the device list Pay attention to the following e The device name is only deleted fr
38. editing mode the picture name is hidden See also Menu bar Page 210 6 3 1 11 How to cut a picture Introduction Select the Edit gt Cut Picture menu command to copy a picture to the clipboard This menu command is only enabled if a picture has been selected The clipboard contents are retained until replaced with a new entry by means of Cut or Copy menu commands The picture name remains visible in the container The picture name is shown in pointed brackets lt lt Picturename PDL gt gt The picture can then be pasted to any other location Procedure 1 Click on the desired picture in the hierarchy window 2 Select the Edit gt Cut Picture menu command or select Cut Picture from the the shortcut menu 3 The picture name is shown in pointed brackets as lt lt Picturename PDL gt gt and copied to the clipboard 4 Finally you can insert the picture in a different place See also Page WinCC Options for Process Control 216 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager 6 3 1 12 Introduction Procedure See also 6 3 1 13 Introduction Procedure 6 3 Picture Tree Manager Structure How to cut a container Select the Edit gt Cut Container menu command to cut and then copy a container and its sublevel hierarchy and pictures to the clipboard The command is only enabled if a container has been selected from the hierarchy window The clipboard contents are retained until being
39. rausgang 2 K4k4 19 akustischer 21 Signalgeber Warnung es Signal3 Bin rausgang 3 akustischer K5k5 Signal3 _ _ _____ fam 22 amp optischer u u Signalgeber Leitechnik Meldung WinCC Options for Process Control 144 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 12 Signal module 24VDC Ausg nge L schdiode bei M OVR12 3 4 induktiver Last 1 Signalbaugruppe Meldegerat Watchdog Ausgang 1 Ausgang 2 Ausgang 3 10 Signalbaugruppe Externer Verteiler Externer Quittierungstaster oo FE Watchdog Sill Ausgang 1 ll K1 Hauptkontakt RE Reset Eingang RA Reset Ausgang K2 Watchdog K3 Ausgang 1 K4 Ausgang 2 K5 Ausgnag 3 K3 K5 Detailkontakte Ausgang 2 Ausgang 3 i I WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 145 Horn 3 12 Signal module Function Characteristics of the Sensor Output The make contact of the sensor output is open if the operator terminal is turned off The relay contact will remain open after the operator terminal is turned on If a classified event occurs during the process control the contact will be closed Other events will only result in the closing of the sensor output if an acknowledgment was made prior You can acknowledge internally by WinCC or via an external confirmation button It is possible to invert the functio
40. 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 189 Lifebeat Monitoring 5 3 Function Principle of Lifebeat Monitoring Project The following is assigned to a project e a group of automation devices e ora standalone computer e or Server computer with one or more WinCC client computers Note You cannot create prefixed tags yourself Only the WinCC PCS7 software can do this You are not permitted to manipulate these system tags The system tags are required for proper functioning of the product While configuring AS and OS monitoring by means of Lifebeat Monitoring device names should not be identical to pictures in the Picture Tree Manager or like internal tags with the name prefix WinCC Options for Process Control 190 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Lifebeat Monitoring 5 4 How to configuring lifebeat monitoring with an OPC connection 5 4 How to configuring lifebeat monitoring with an OPC connection Introduction The communication between WinCC and specific types of automation systems is established over a channel For AS monitoring you can use Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS connections of the SIMATIC S7 PROTOCOL SUITE The OPC connection must be used to monitor WinCC stations Monitoring via the OPC connection is limited to WinCC stations Since the software for the OPC DA server and the OPC DA client is included in the WinCC basic system you can use WinCC simultaneously as an OPC DA server and OPC DA client As a WinCC
41. 2 can acknowledge the signaling device on WinCC client 1 at any time even though it does not see any messages and its signaling device is deactivated Application Examples for Acknowledgement Behavior Page 137 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 12 3 12 1 Introduction 3 12 Signal module Signal module General Information about the Signal Module The signal module is used to control up to three different messaging devices horn buzzer lights etc with an option to connect to a hardware based acknowledgment button used for acknowledging externally It also includes a hardware timer watchdog Itis triggered cyclically by WinCC Runtime via a API call driver An alarm is triggered if an error such as a computer failure occurs so that retriggering no longer takes place The module also possesses 3 additional binary inputs The signal module is a PC module that has been specially developed for use in the OS with an 8 bit ISA bus interface MLFB no 6DS 1916 8AA or a 32 bit PCI bus interface MLFB no 6DS 1916 8RR You need a 5V PCI slot to operate the signal module with PCI bus interface It is not possible to operate it in a 3 3V PCI slot The signal module is a hardware option to the WinCC system that is offered as an option pack In the following figure you can see the general structure of a system and the installation options for the signal module within
42. 23 Maintenance Requirem Beit 31 Alarm High gt Gy eit 22 Process Message Bit 30 Alarm Low em Bit 21 Operating Message ev Bit 29 warning High lt EE Bit 19 Operating Message 4 Bit 28 Warning Low Ey bit 18 Status AS Bit 27 Tolerance High x E bit 17 Status 08 Bit 26 Tolerance Low Bit 16 Measuring point Disab Ei 25 45 Control System Fault Bit 20 Operator Prompt Priority higher Priority lower Simulation bit 0 Export configuration Import configuration 3 Select the bits that you want to use for the extended analog display from the group value Use the arrow keys to move a selected bit between the two lists The default allocation corresponds with the PCS7 standard WinCC Options for Process Control 36 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Overview of process control system options 9 1 7 How to Configure the Extended Analog Display Specify the priority order of the utilized bits for the evaluation of the group value The entries in the Used Bits list show the order of the priorities The top entry has the highest priority priority 1 Select one entry ata time in the Used bits list and change the priority by clicking Priority higher or Priority lower All entries in the Unused bits list have the priority 0 The icons in the Used bits and Unused bits lists always reflect the PCS 7 standard even if there are user defined settings These settings are indicated under
43. 3 6 How to Configure the Acknowledgment Behavior of the Audio Alarm Procedure 1 Select the Signal Assignment tab 4 Horn configuration Test_WinCC_6 2 0 a mcp xl Message assignment Signal assignment Horn acknowledgment Play sounds C Only local Multiple acknowledgment by the following acknowledgment tags i ce Limit number of simultaneously playing Edit sounds Multiple acknowledgment in the following group 2 Sounds grou All sounds simultaneously Signal module Alarmar Horn_Danger way SysVar Horn_Note way Tolar Project documentation Cancel Apply 2 If you just want to acknowledge the horn on a separate computer select the Only local check box in the Horn acknowledgment area 3 For multiple acknowledgment by a group you select the Multiple acknowledgment in the following group check box Enter any group name in the edit box Specify the computer that belongs to a group of the same name under horn This setting is case sensitive 4 For multiple acknowledgment by acknowledgment tags you select the Multiple acknowledgment using the following acknowledgment tags check box Click Edit You specify the acknowledgment tags in the Acknowledgment tags dialog 5 Click the Insert tag button Select the acknowledgment tags in the tag selection dialog box Click OK The tags are separated by semicolons in the Horn acknowledgmen
44. 4 Linking Signal Tags to Messages Procedure 1 Select the message class from the Message Class column on the Message Assignment tab 4 Horn configuration rtt MCP 24x Message assignment Signal assignment Set tag Authorization check for every incoming message Deactivate default authorization check Not for arrival of an unacknowledged message Authorization for area Message class Priority Source Authorization Alarm lt default gt Alarmar Warning Monitoring Warn ar System requires ack gt 7 Process controlling SysVar PLC process con OS process conti Preventive maint Process message Operating messar Project documentation w Cancel Apply 2 Double click in a cell A drop down combo box appears Select the required message class Confirm your selection with the lt Return gt key the lt Tab gt key or by clicking in another cell 3 Click Apply Your settings are saved Use the lt DEL gt key or the lt Backspace gt key to delete the contents of selected cells If insufficient lines are displayed use the pop up menu for the table to insert new lines 3 4 3 Assigning a Message Priority to a Signal Tag Introduction In addition to and independent of the message class the message priority allows you to determine which messages are first to trigger a signal You specify the message priorities for individual messages in the Alarm Logging Editor Click in a line and enter the
45. Access point 2 selection list shows all devices or network cards installed on the station which support time synchronization via Industrial Ethernet Bus Select the device from the drop down list box to configure it for operation in master or slave mode Activate the corresponding check box to specify the device mode You can also view the access points whose symbolic names are enclosed by lt gt brackets on order to configure time synchronization at an ES Activate the corresponding check box These names are assigned to the physical name of the access points during startup of the target station in runtime If you are using two access points with CP1613 or CP1623 the following modules are assigned to the symbolic names in SIMATIC NET WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 165 Time Synchronization 4 2 The Time Synchronization editor Symbolic name Set PG PC Interface dialog box Set PC Station dialog box lt CP1613 1 gt CP1613 ISO CP1613 lt CP1613 2 gt CP1613 ISO lt Board 2 CP1613 2 lt CP1623 1 gt CP1623 ISO CP1623 lt CP1623 2 gt CP1623 ISO lt Board 2 CP1623 2 The symbolic name lt Softnet 1 gt or lt Softnet 2 gt is used for the BCE network card The internal tags TimeSyncDevice1State and TimeSyncDevice2State are used for both access points These tags display the status of the access points and are used for diagnostics funct
46. Acknowledged Background color OFF Went Out Unacknowledged Background color ON Went Out Unacknowledged Background color OFF Font Color Warning Bit 29 Warning High Came In Font color ON Bit 28 Warning Low Came In Font color OFF Came In Acknowledged Font color ON Came In Acknowledged Font color OFF Went Out Unacknowledged Font color ON Went Out Unacknowledged Font color OFF Came In Font color ON Came In Font color OFF Came In Acknowledged Font color ON Came In Acknowledged Font color OFF Went Out Unacknowledged Font color ON Went Out Unacknowledged Font color OFF Background color Alarm Bit 31 Alarm High Came In Background color ON Bit 30 Alarm Low Came In Background Color Off Came In Acknowledged Background color ON Came In Acknowledged Background color OFF Went Out Unacknowledged Background color ON Went Out Unacknowledged Background color OFF Came In Background color ON Came In Background Color Off Came In Acknowledged Background color ON Came In Acknowledged Background color OFF Went Out Unacknowledged Background color ON Went Out Unacknowledged Background color OFF WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 43 Overview of process control system options 1 9 Migration of Extended Status and Analog Displays Prior to WinCC V6 2 Object Property Message Type New Object Properties Font color Bit 31 A
47. Bausteinsymbole 1_5 int jr BauSym CONTR 16_35 ext jr BauSym CONTR 16_35 int fr BauSym CONTR 6_15 ext fr BauSym CONTR 6_15 int Tr BauSym DIGMON 16_35 ext jr BauSym DIGMON 16_35 int fr BauSym DIGMON 6_15 ext V7 BauSym DIGMON 6_15 int fr BauSym MEASMON 16_3 fr BauSym MEASMON 16_3 ir BauSym MEASMON B_15 fr BauSym MEASMON 6_15 jr BauSym MOTOR 16_35 ext jr BauSym MOTOR 16_35 int fr BauSym MOTOR 6_15 ext 4 WinCC Options for Process Control e 3Dbalken 1_10 int e 3Dbalken 11_30 ext e 3Dbalken 11_30 int e 3Dbalken 31_100 ext e 3Dbalken 31_100 int e 3Dbalken ext e 3Dbalken int e Bausteinsymbole ext e Bausteinsymbole int e BSym CONT 16_35 ext e BSym CONT 16_35 int e BSym CONT 6_15 ext e BSym CONT 6_15 int e BSym DMON 16_35 ext e BSym DMON 16_35 int e BSym DMON 6_15 ext e BSym DMON 6_15 int e BSym MEAS 16_35 ext e BSym MEAS 16_35 int e BSym MEAS 6_15 ext e BSym MEA4S 6_15 int e BSym MOTR 16_35 ext e BSym MOTR 16_35 int e BSym MOTR 6_15 ext hh Load Save 777 Show as Working area Process window Preview V Display Cancel System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 12 Process Controlling Graphic Pictures Dialog Description Functionality Description Computer This drop down list box is only active if the dialog box is opened from within a WinCC client pro
48. Bit 20 Operator Prompt Priority higher Priority lower lt lt Es ea a IV Use group value for display Export configuration Import configuration Cancel Apply WinCC Options for Process Control 30 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Overview of process control system options 7 6 How to Configure the Extended Status Display 3 In the Bit selection area form an individual status value from a maximum of 4 interconnectable status words Example A The status value is formed solely from the two to the power of four bit of the tag interconnected with the Status1 property CLLR from statusword1 7 Bit No 4 BIT Ino status word Bit No 0 OKO no status word Bit No 0 KCL no status word M Bit No 0 Example B You want to use the inputs of the four binary variables Status1 to Status4 to form the status value CLUE from statusword1 Bit No 0 BIT from statusword3 7 Bit No 0 OKO from statusword2 gt Bit No 0 4 from statusword4 Bit No 0 4 4 Ifyou want to combine the status value formation with the alarm statuses of the group value select the Use group value for display check box 5 Select the bits that you want to use for the extended status display from the group value Use the arrow keys to move a selected bit between the two lists The default allocation corresponds with the PCS7 standard 6 Specify the priority ord
49. Install the PCI signal module as follows 1 6 7 Soon after the restart the Wizard for Finding New Hardware dialog box will open Select the Install from a list or specific location for advanced users check box Click Next Inthe following dialog box select the Do not find instead user selects driver to be installed check box Click Next Inthe Hardware Type dialog box select the Display all devices check box and click Next Click on the Data carrier button Navigate to driver lt WinCC gt Options Drivers and click Open Click OK to close the Install from data carrier dialog box In the device list select the entry Signal Unit PCI Adapter and click Next Confirm any warnings or safety notices that may appear by clicking Yes In the last dialog box Finish Wizard click Finish The installation is then complete Restart the computer with the following Windows dialog box The Signal Unit PCI Adapter device now appears under the PCS 7 group in the device manager A device conflict is reported incorrectly in the Properties dialog box of the Resources tab Ignore this message Alternatively start the hardware wizard from the Windows Control Panel PCI Signal module under Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 Install the PCI signal module as follows 1 2 6 Open the device manager in Windows Under the category Other devices you will find the signal modul
50. Manager 6 6 Effects on other applications Deleting parts of the hierarchy Containers that are deleted from the hierarchy are also deleted in the User Administrator Upon deletion of this container all corresponding information contained in the User Administrator is also lost See also ffects on other applications Page 6 6 3 Effects on the Group Display Introduction In certain cases the hierarchy affects the group display The objects of the Group Display can only receive and forward messages if they contain pictures in the hierarchy Construct a group display hierarchy according to the picture hierarchy The OS Project Editor supports you in configuring the group display hierarchy By selecting the Create update group displays check box in the Message Display tab the group displays in the area overview are automatically integrated in the picture hierarchy However you can also interconnect the group display objects independent of the picture hierarchy Receiving messages We recommend that you place the pictures from which you want to receive messages in the hierarchy on the level of the corresponding group object or below this level Relaying messages We recommend that you place the pictures to which you want to relay messages in the hierarchy on the level of the corresponding group object or above this level See also ffects on other applications Page 6 6 4 Effects on the Text Library Introduction Th
51. Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 345 Process control runtime 9 11 Group display 1 Click on the button for the group display that is showing an alarm whose source you wish to view The picture is displayed with the alarm source If it is not possible to uniquely identify this picture because the same event is queued in several sources the first picture in the search results is displayed The affected measurement point is highlighted for example R 1_5 CONTR_001 2 Right click the group display button to open a message which indicates the picture from which a message originated Note If there is no connection to a WinCC tag or the configuration is faulty the buttons of a group display object appear dark gray in a picture and cannot be operated These buttons if in pressed state are visualized in light gray color in the group displays of the overview area Hierarchy of the Group Displays 346 The group display usually consists of several individual displays associated with an area or subarea This generates a kind of hierarchy for group displays When bringing up the alarm source the picture shown will always be the one of the lowest level that still permits an association with a particular alarm The OS Project Editor supports you in configuring the group display hierarchy By selecting the Create update group displays check box in the Message Display tab the group displays in the area overview are a
52. Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 85 86 OS Project Editor 2 9 Basic data tab If there is a check mark against an entry in the list the basic picture will be replaced in the project by the picture that was supplied as the product Note If BATCH Engineering or BATCH Client is installed on the computer at the same time the picture AlarmJournal PDL will be shown to differ from the originally delivered version Overwriting project actions that are local to the computer The list of actions local to the computer upper right shows all actions with time stamps that do not match those of the actions in the delivered state This may have arisen due to a newer version of the basic data or the actions concerned may have been configured by the user Entries in the Project column show the respective dates of the files in the project path Entries in the Product column show the respective dates of the files in the installation folder If there is a check mark against an entry in the list the modified action will be replaced in the project by the action that was supplied as the product WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 9 Basic data tab Overwriting picture modules in the project These lists are available only ina PCS7 OS If WinCC and Basic Process Control are installed the lists will be disabled and grayed out OS
53. PCS 7 OS The Loop In Alarm function is used to visualize a measuring point which triggered an alarm in a loop display on the faceplate or as process picture that has been linked in the Component List Editor WinCC Options for Process Control 280 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Component List Editor 8 7 How to configure the Loop in Alarm function Procedure 1 Start the Alarm Logging editor You can select the Loop in Alarm function from the Tag Action tab or from the Loop in Alarm column in the message Properties dialog box The WinCC default here is Open Picture Single message ajx Parameters Text Tag Action i Function Browser x Loop in Alarm You can use Loop In Alarm to select 2 re Functions a picture that shows the part of the Ej a Alarm process in which the message E re FaceplateDesigner occurred a GRAPHICS To do this you normally use the gt options Open Picture function Report Split Screen Manage 2 Acknowledge llf ALGAcxAddPern ALGAcxAddPern If you want to use a different function to select the picture make sure that this other function also uses a string as call parameter elt be ls le fe Ea a a esl al sl a a CSigRTExit Picture Name Parameter ExtractPrefix E R 4 9 4 fe GetAreaPermiss Function Name GetAreaPermiss OperPiue GetAsvarIndex OpenPicture AR rl sn GetCountPi
54. Picture Tree Manager Structure 6 3 1 17 How to insert a container before another container Introduction Select the Edit gt Insert Before menu command to copy the clipboard contents to a position before the selected container The command is only enabled if a container that is not the root node has been selected and one or more containers have been copied into the clipboard Procedure 1 Select the container after which you would like to insert the contents of the clipboard 2 Select the Edit gt Insert Before menu command or select the Insert Before command from the shortcut menu 3 The contents of the clipboard will be inserted before the selected container Note You cannot insert a container before the root node See also Menu bar Page 210 6 3 1 18 How to insert a container into another container Introduction Select the Edit gt Insert Into Node menu command to paste the clipboard contents into the selected container Each container in the clipboard is inserted as a new node of a sublevel hierarchy The command is only enabled if a container that is not the root node has been selected and one or more containers have been copied into the clipboard Procedure 1 Select the container into which you want to insert a new node with the contents of the clipboard 2 Select the Edit gt Insert Into Node menu command or select the Insert Into Node command from the shortcut menu 3 The new
55. Project Editor 21x T Layout x Message configuration Message display Emm Area gt Runtime window Basic data ES General Base pictures in project deviate from delivered state Computer local actions in project deviate from delivered state accept delivery state accept delivery state Action Product Project Picture Name Product Project Ur AlamOneLine PDL 11710 2004 8 11 2004 X autoload pas 25 11 2002 03 08 2001 1 amp amp ssetFaceplate RPL 10 18 2004 9 29 2004 X checkifopen pas 25 11 2002 03 08 2001 Or Buttons11 PDL 9 28 2004 8 19 2004 X CheckLevel pas 25 11 2002 03 08 2001 Or Buttonst2 PDL 9 28 2004 9 20 2004 X DolobAsyne pas 25 11 2002 03 08 2001 DT Language PDL 9 28 2004 8 30 2004 X LangChg pas 25 11 2002 03 08 2001 Or 0verview1 PDL 10 27 2004 8 30 2004 1 8 i telenme PMI 1027204 AANFnNd Picture modules in project deviate from the product library or user Duplicate picture modules were found in product library and user library library accept picture modules from the libraries accept picture modules from the user library Product libr Project Picture Component _Produet libr User library Ar PCS7Typicals PDL 12 12 2002 25 10 2001 GAuto emf 08 04 2002 03 08 2001 Ctrl_Auto emf 08 08 2002 03 08 2001 Ctrl_extem emf 08 08 2002 03 08 2001 Ctrl_intem emf 08 08 2002 03 08 2001 Ctrl_Manual emf 08 08 2002 03 08 2001 TA CHIH emf nenn navnav
56. Select the Edit gt Delete Picture menu command or select Delete Picture from the the shortcut menu WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 221 Picture Tree Manager 6 3 Picture Tree Manager Structure Note You can reinsert the picture deleted from the hierarchy at a later time See also Menu bar Page 210 6 3 1 21 How to delete a container Introduction Select the Edit gt Delete Container menu command to remove a selected container from the hierarchy All pictures contained in the deleted nested hierarchy will automatically be moved to the selection window This command is only enabled if a container with or without subcontainers or with or without pictures has been selected in the hierarchy window Procedure 1 Mark the container which you would like to delete 2 Select the Edit gt Delete Container menu command or press the lt Ctrl L gt keystroke See also Menu bar Page 210 6 3 1 22 How to display the properties of a picture Introduction You can view the properties of a picture by selecting the Edit gt Properties menu command Procedure 1 Mark the picture whose properties you want to display 2 Select the Edit gt Properties menu command or click the properties icon on the toolbar The properties will be displayed WinCC Options for Process Control 222 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager 6 3 Picture Tree
57. Table of contents DINO ao NN Na 0 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 1 10 000 52172120008 ao PADRA DW WW ID DIN Blo MS Blo ho lwli e gt o gt e w N gt Q Q oo gt eo A OO N Yaak amp WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 7 Table of contents co co co KO KO KON IKO KO co KO KO KO ol co KO KO KO KO KO KO KO KO KO KO KO KO KO KON KO KO soll ONO KO KO o8 g gpg ge A N 6000 100 00 00 00 G0 Go 00 00 gt gt N BON S NIO BO Nh gt O O WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Table of contents a N O uo wo O O CO O CO CO mal NNN gt N O O WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 9 Overview of process control system options 1 1 1 General Information on the Process Control System Options Installation of the process control options together with WinCC The process control options must be installed on all computers ina WinCC project with multiple computers In is not allowed for example to install the process control options only on one client computer License check for chipcard reader WinCC V7 no longer contains a license check for the chipcard reader The license is no longer required Ability to make changes to configuration data in the course of current operations The add on component
58. a fast overview of the entire plant down to detail level The user is supported in this task by function oriented operation and extensive help functions Group displays for the alarm and warning functions in the different system areas together with the Loop in alarm function in respect of messages help to ensure for the user fast reaction and sharply focused intervention WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 3 System Structure 9 3 System Structure Overview Project WinCC Runtime is an operator system for central operating and monitoring The following system configurations are possible e WinCC computer with one screen e WinCC computer with up to four screens through a Multi VGA card The following screen arrangements are supported C mjm m C mj Co mm mm C omm m m m mj a OS Project Editor configures the screen arrangement and screen resolutions 1024x768 1280x1024 1152x864 or 1600x1200 pixels for the WinCC computers A project is a consistent database which contains the configuration data for executing the entire Runtime Working on multiple screens with a mouse and keyboard To work with the screens you require only a keyboard and a mouse How to work with the mouse e Put the mouse pointer onto any screen and move it out of the screen area The direction of the permitted cursor movement depends on the screen arrangement left right u
59. a type of bridge e Synchronize two system buses as simultaneous masters Requirement e Only one BCE network car can be used for time synchronization on an OS e The ISO log must be installed and activated for the network card e The BCE network card can be used for up to eight connections e The time synchronization via a BCE network card cannot be used redundantly e A1 10 second grid must be set on the external time transmitter e The following target address is used for Multicast with a BCE CP1612 network card Address 09 00 06 01 FF EF e Broadcast must not be used WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 171 Time Synchronization 4 4 How to Configure the Synchronization through the System bus BCE Procedure 1 Activate option Synchronization via System Bus Master Slave g Time Synchronization Ito mcp M General Settings Use time receive utility Deactivate time synchronization Cancel I Synchronization via Terminal Bus Slave C Use the time from a connected Win server C Use the time from a specific computer Computer 1 s Computer 2 C Lettime be set by external 2rd party components Synchronization via System Bus Master Slave r Access point 1 Master C Slave lt Softnet 1 gt m Access point 2 Master lt None gt IV Display symbolic name of the access point Process
60. all participating servers in order to created the internal LBMRTConfigState tag Otherwise the non updated server in the Config PDL of the WinCC client will be shown with the Disturbed state in Runtime The diagnostic window of the GlobalScript shows a non existent tag See also unction Principle of Lifebeat Monitoring Page 189 Practical Example of Lifebeat Monitoring Page 197 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 193 Lifebeat Monitoring 5 6 How to Design the System Configuration Picture 5 6 How to Design the System Configuration Picture Introduction The following possibilities are available for designing the system configuration picture Config PDL e Automatically generating the system configuration picture e Specifying custom positions of the lifebeat objects e Inserting graphic objects into the system configuration picture e Specifying custom display sizes of the lifebeat objects e Specifying custom display forms of the lifebeat objects Automatically generating the system configuration picture 1 In the Device positioning in the system configuration selection box select the setting Automatic Lifebeat Monitoring will be updated Note If the Device positioning in the system configuration option is set to Automatic the objects are tiled in the picture as of a certain number depending on their size If you do not wish this then select User d
61. better idea of the configuration 4 Check the settings in the Basic Data tab to avoid any unwanted data overwrites Note Changes in the Layout tab affect settings in the Areas Runtime Windows and Basic Data tabs WinCC Options for Process Control 56 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 5 Message Configuration Tab 2 5 Message Configuration Tab 2 5 1 Message Configuration Tab Introduction The first time the Message Configuration tab is selected the OS Project Editor reads the following data from the message system e Message classes e Message types e Message blocks e PCS 7 messages This takes some time A notice indicating Data will be read from the message system One moment please is displayed WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 57 OS Project Editor 2 5 Message Configuration Tab Message system settings On the Message configuration tab you specify how the OS Project Editor should configure the message system axi Be Layout X Message configuration E Message display Ep Area Runtime window a Basic data Ef General Message window column width r Message classes types Column Name Column Width v Date 8 26 09 08 V Update Time 12 18 30 25 012 7 Derive from a Message Duration 8 18 30 25 Se l Status 2 IV Message class Tolerance has to be acknowledged Acknowledged 4
62. client the computer can be simultaneously connected to several servers Note the following points for the configuration of the lifebeat monitoring in a distributed system or a distributed redundant system e The lifebeat monitoring of a server pair monitors its subordinate automation devices e Configure the monitoring of all WinCC clients in the network either only from the standard server pair or distribute the monitoring of the WinCC clients over several server pairs The OPC DA client channel uses one channel unit The channel unit does not require general configuration Procedure 1 Start WinCC and enter a new OPC CHN driver in the tag management 2 Select OPC Unit 1 Open the shortcut menu Select the New Connection command A connection is created WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 191 Lifebeat Monitoring 5 4 How to configuring lifebeat monitoring with an OPC connection 3 Select the Properties command from the shortcut menu of the new connection Click Properties in the General tab NewConnection Properties OPC Group Setting OPC Server Name T XML DA server orcs erver WinCC Test Run the server on another computer Server PC PCat sti lt SW W WOC i Read data from Cache C Device In here specify the OPC server and if necessary the computer that you want to access Cancel Help 4 Enter the nam
63. clients acting in unison having signaling devices Each WinCC client can acknowledge the signaling devices of all WinCC clients using common acknowledgement tags See also Page Page 138 Page 139 3 11 2 Example 1 Automatically acting WinCC clients with signal transducer Introduction The following example shows the configuration of standalone WinCC clients that have signaling devices and that are networked with multiple servers Requirement e Each WinCC client is in a separate room e The WinCC clients have one signaling device each the servers have none Requirement WinCC clients monitor the servers and use their signaling devices in accordance with their access rights When a WinCC client receives a message a signal is triggered or acknowledged independently of the other WinCC clients This does not affect the other WinCC clients WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 137 Horn 3 11 Application Examples for Acknowledgement Behavior Procedure 1 Configure the Horn message and signal assignment on every WinCC Client 2 In each Signal assignment tab select the Only local check box 3 Click OK to save your settings Runtime behavior The horn runs on each WinCC client The signaling devices of individual WinCC clients are triggered by a message independently of one another Each WinCC client acknowledges its own signaling device Its own signal tag is reset and the si
64. color flashing of the elements e The text in text elements e The time stamps in the message line WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 325 Process control runtime 9 9 Message system Messages and their acknowledgment The following table shows the acknowledgment concept of the available message classes Message class Message type Acknowledgment Alarm AlarmHigh AlarmLow incoming flashing on Warning WarningHigh incoming flashing on WarningLow Tolerance ToleranceHigh No acknowledgement no flashing ToleranceLow Option as of V7 01 incoming flashing on AS process control messages Fault incoming flashing on Faults OS Process control system messages Fault Came in flashing on without state went out Faults Preventive maintenance Process message Maintenance maintenance request Process message incoming flashing on incoming flashing on Operating message Process message No acknowledgment no flashing Operator prompt Operator prompt No acknowledgment no flashing Operator Input Message Operator Input Message No acknowledgment no flashing without cleared state Status message Status AS Status OS No acknowledgment no flashing without cleared state System requires acknowledgment Process control system messages Not used in the Basic Process Control and PCS 7 System does not require acknow
65. configured on a server in a Multi user project project form are always stored locally on this computer You can load these trend groups only on this computer If you have configured trend groups on a WinCC client in the Client project you have the following options of saving and calling up these trend groups Standard server configured for Split Screen Manager Configuration data of the trend groups are automatically saved to the standard server if a standard server was configured for the Split Screen Manager in the shortcut menu of Server data on the WinCC client Other WinCC clients can specify this server as the standard server for Split Screen Manager The trend groups are also available to these WinCC clients The trend groups created on the clients cannot be called from the server The trend group data on a redundant server is automatically synchronized with the data on its redundancy partner If the redundant standby station has assumed master mode the WinCC clients are still be able to load all configured trend groups No standard server configured for Split Screen Manager The configured trends are saved locally on a WinCC client which does not contain a configured standard server for Split Screen Manager Other WinCC clients cannot display these trend groups in WinCC OnlineTrendControl Likewise these trend groups cannot be displayed on the actual server and on its connected clients Note If you are configuring online tags
66. connected DCF77 radio receiver or the GPS satellite receiver Check the version by clicking the DCF77 icon in the station s Control Panel Click the About button in the dialog box If you choose UTC as time reference for the DCF77 Reception Service dialog you may not configure any GMT time shift for SICLOCK GPSDEC With the exception of the FIFO buffer the Windows default setting for the COM interface is maintained Deactivate the Use FIFO buffer option at Advanced settings Dialog box for opening time synchronization You can assign time synchronization parameters on the DCF 77 object in the Control Panel Open the required dialog box as follows 1 Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel This opens the Control Panel 2 Inthe Control Panel folder double click DCF 77 This opens the DCF77 Reception Service dialog box 3 You configure all required settings within this dialog box Structure of the dialog box Input Box Meaning Signal Source The entry Serial is shown in this input box by default You cannot edit this input box Connection Enter the COM port to which the external DCF77 or GPS receiver is connected The recommended default is COM2 WinCC Options for Process Control 184 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Time Synchronization See also 4 8 2 Introduction 4 8 General Information on the Time Reception Service Input Box Signal Shape Meaning
67. contains settings for the OS Project Editor Overview of the Editors of the Process Control System Options Page 23 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Overview of process control system options 7 5 Overview of the Editors of the Process Control System Options 1 5 6 Optional Component List Editor Introduction This editor is available only when installing a PCS7 OS Use the Component List Editor to configure entry point pictures and the area assignments of measurement points required for the runtime functions Picture via measurement point and Loop in Alarm You can also create new measurement points or define entry point pictures and areas for the components that have been created by AS OS Engineering The Component List Editor provides a user interface for the following tasks e Creating new measuring points e Editing existing blocks e Searching for blocks How to open the Component List Editor Double click the Component List Editor in WinCC Explorer This starts the editor If you have created an OS but did not do so on an ES you must first start the OS Project Editor in WinCC After the OS Project Editor runs you can edit the component list via the Component List Editor See also Overview of the Editors of the Process Control System Options Page 23 1 5 7 Optional Editor Time Synchronization Introduction You can use the Time Synchronization editor to configure t
68. description of smart card readers that can be used CardMan Desktop serial 3111 by Omnikey The serial smart card reader CardMan Desktop serial 3111 replaces serial smart card readers B1 CardMan 9010 and B1 CardMan 9011 CardMan Desktop serial 3111 has two LEDs only one of which is currently used The LED turns a solid green when the smart card reader is correctly detected and the driver for the smart card reader is started The LED begins to flash green red when communication with an inserted smart card begins The CardMan Desktop 3111 smart card reader is installed manually Proceed as follows 1 Connect the smart card reader when the PC is switched off The power supply runs via the PS2 port The plug is connected between the computer and the keyboard 2 Check the COM1 interface setting in the Windows device manager More information is provided in chapter How to set up the interface 3 Save the necessary files on your PC by downloading them from http omnikey aaitg com index php id 69 amp L 1 CardMan3111_V1_1_2_1 exe CardMan 3111 PC SC Windows CT API_V4_0_2_2 exe CT API for Windows 4 Double click on the saved CardMan3111_V1_1_2_1 exe Follow the setup and extract the driver software to the C Omnikey directory 5 Double click on the saved CT API_V4_0_2_2 exe Follow the setup and extract the CT API to the C Omnikey directory 6 To install the driver start the Windows Hardware Assistant Go to
69. dialog box remain hidden so that the corresponding setting options are not available However reducing the hardware acceleration to 0 can cause the system to slow down For this reason it may be useful to attain an optimal setting as follows Set the slider to None Close the dialog box and restart the computer Set the slider to Maximum Close the dialog box and restart the computer If this does not correct the problem reduce the hardware acceleration step by step Note Depending on the computer PC BIOS used detection of some monitors could fail sporadically after installation of the graphics driver Restart the computer in such situations Remove the Matrox software by selecting Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Add and Remove Programs Restart the computer to repeat your installation WinCC Options for Process Control 110 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 13 Split Screen Manager 2 13 5 How to set the parameters for the M9120 9140 under Windows XP and Server 2003 Introduction To use the multi VGA option configure the M9120 M9140 Matrox graphics card for Windows XP and Server 2003 using the Control Panel The two modules Dual and Quad were tested with the driver 2 08 04 011 SE U WHQL The driver is available on the Web site of the manufacturer Matrox Procedure Download the driver for the Matrox M9120 9140 graphics card from the Matrox homepage Shut down t
70. followed by 1 to 7 digits e Exponential number Such things as limit value violations can be displayed by changing the background color or pattern Example NH3 FL OUT 3362 Bar graphs display process values in analog form The current value is visualized on a scaleable bar The object properties of the bar are user definable Limit value violations can be displayed by changing the color Example WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 351 Process control runtime 9 12 Process Controlling Graphic Pictures Process values Meaning 3D bar graph The Basic Process Control option pack provides you with a 3D bar graph for graphically displaying values relative to an upper and lower limit value The three dimensional representation is user definable Limit value violations can be displayed by changing the color Example Input Text Input texts are dynamic texts which you enter into a field of predetermined length number of characters Areas of the text box which remain blank are padded with filler characters as specified by the engineer Invalid characters are not displayed on the screen Output text Output texts are dynamic texts which are output in a field of predefined length number of characters You can display process states in the form of text for example or display context dependent operator prompts Users can edit multiline texts Trends The o
71. for process controlling and for all runtime functions The language will change immediately Procedure 1 Click this button in button set 2 The Change Language dialog box will open displaying the available languages C german Germany english USA french France italian Italy C spanish Spain 2 Select the check box with the desired language The language will change WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 311 Process control runtime 9 8 System operator input 9 8 7 9 8 8 9 8 9 9 8 10 312 How to Display the Content of the Picture Stack D You can use the Previous picture button to have the process picture that is stored before the current process picture in the picture stack displayed in the working area ei You can use the Next picture button to have the process picture that is stored afterthe current process picture in the picture stack displayed in the working area BATCH selection m You can start one of the displayed applications of BATCH by means of this dialog box The buttons of the respective components are activated only if they were installed correctly For related topics consult the PCS 7 BATCH manual SFC Visualization selection an Use this dialog box to visualize program or edit SFC charts The buttons of the corresponding components are only activated if properly installed You can find related information i
72. for the screen setting and open the Matrox Quick Desk dialog box from the toolbox Clear all options i Matrox PowerDesk Multi Display Controls Barter ciala noaza aneas fe la sarare SEET WATTE MENSE Bolster dispan g li patane oaa eE g ln denl plada orseircire winless SE a iSl sericea circles g lg diuk 9 Troubleshooting in case of error Read the information in the Troubleshooting tab WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 109 OS Project Editor 2 13 Split Screen Manager Plug and Play Monitor and Matrox G450 Multi Monitor E sth Ed ET Monitor Settings Color Multi Display Setup Color Management Information Options General Adapter Monitor Troubleshoot r Are you having problems with your graphics hardware These settings can help you troubleshoot display related problems r Hardware acceleration Manually control the level of acceleration and performance supplied by your graphics hardware Use the Display Troubleshooter to assist you in making the change Hardware acceleration Non All accelerations are enabled Use this setting if your computer has no problems Recommended I Enable write combining Cancel Apply When using the Windows Server 2003 operating system the manufacturer especially recommends setting the slider for the hardware acceleration to None This means that some of the tabs in the
73. hierarchy Subsection Switch language Switching Language Synchronization 161 Configuring via Local Area Network Configuring via system bus Industrial Ethernet bus How to configure with the system bus CP1613 379 Index Synchronization interval System block System bus and Local Area Network simultaneous use System messages 57 System operator input System pictures T Tab Message configuration Message display Tag group Text Library Time format Time of day 299 Time receiving station 180 Time reception service Effects Settings Time signal receiver for WinCC Time synchronization 1161 Time Synchronization 27 Tolerance Toolbar Hide Show Trend group display Modify 83 Trend groups Archive tag Configuring Grouping Load Loading New Trend Group dialog box Online configuration Save Template pictures Trends U Updating Picture objects Picture Tree Manager Upgrade in Run 380 Use Online Help User 320 User administrator User Administrator User authentication User authorization Configuring in the PCS 7 environment User filters User Interface User Management User text block Users V Valve View Picture preview Picture properties 222 Visible areas 70 Visible messages W Warning WinCC Time signal receiver 181 WinCC Chipcard Terminal WinCC Client Configuration Working Area 103 303 write to Chipcard WinCC Op
74. individual messages you can find the Loop in Alarm function on the Tag Action tab The WinCC default here is Open Picture WinCC Options for Process Control 112 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 13 Split Screen Manager Function Browser Standard Functions 455 ae Le ae DE af ae E E eae ee gt et In the Picture name Call parameter input box enter the measuring point name e g FIC_752_003 Replace OpenPicture with LoopInAlarm by selecting the LoopInAlarm function in the function browser under Split Screen Manager and clicking OK If you accidentally start LoopInAlarm by double clicking then click Cancel in the Parameter Assignment dialog box Note Do not use the normal Open Picture function in the PCS 7 environment A picture called using this function overlays the entire screen Operator input is therefore no longer possible WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 113 Horn 3 1 Horn Content With the Horn editor you configure the output of message related events on signal modules and PC sound cards This documentation includes the following topics e Linking signal tags to messages e Declaring signal tags e Defining message priorities and authorizations in signal tags e Assigning signal encoders to a signal tag e Installing and testing signal modules WinCC Options for Process Cont
75. list The first of several block icons found in the same entry point picture is used WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Component List Editor 8 6 How to Select a Picture via the Measurement Point 8 6 How to Select a Picture via the Measurement Point Introduction The tag selected in the measuring point list represents a measuring point that is highlighted according to the configured display format Example R 1_5 CONTR_001 5 C 0 mo Prerequisite Appropriate area authorizations must be assigned in the User Administrator to the logged on user WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 277 Component List Editor 8 6 How to Select a Picture via the Measurement Point Procedure 1 Click the Picture via measurement point button in runtime within button set 1 i The Picture selection via measurement point dialog box opens Any block comment of the measuring point is also displayed in the table beside the measuring point The block comment is also displayed in the window bar of the faceplate which can be opened by clicking the block icon The comment originates from the comment block structure tags and is configured at the block in CFC B Picture selection via measurement point Filt Computer lt LOCAL gt LTO_1_LTOPTO3 Me including Meas point lt ALL gt v f excluding Measuring point Comments a
76. master WinCC does not have to be installed on the specified computer If both specified computers are not available the time synchronization will be lost Setting time over an external third party component When you select this radio button you are specifying that the time will be set by an external component Time Synchronization must not set the computer time Synchronizing a client without its own project To synchronize a client without its own project from a server you will have to enter the application ccTMTimeSync EXE in its startup list In this case no additional synchronization may be active on the default client e g DCF 77 Client Service or other 3rd Party Software which provides the local PC time Note If the DCF 77 time receive utility is used the Allow time to be set by external third party component radio button must not be activated Instead the Use time receive utility check box must be activated WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 175 Time Synchronization 4 5 How to configure the synchronization over the Local Area Network See also he Time Synchronization editor Page 164 Simultaneous use of Time Synchronization over System Bus and Local Area Network Page 177 WinCC Options for Process Control 176 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Time Synchronization 4 6 Simultaneous use of Time Synchronization over System Bus and Local Area N
77. monitor 7 s Monitored value control system messages 1000904 OS process PERFMON 7 s is low System monitor 7 s Monitored value control system messages 1000906 OS process PERFMON 7 s is high System monitor 7 s Monitored value control system messages 1000908 Preventive PERFMON 7 s is low System monitor 7 s Monitored value maintenance 1000910 Preventive PERFMON 7 s is high System monitor 7 s Monitored value maintenance 1000912 PLC process Loss of redundancy of terminal System monitor 2 s MAC address control system adapter 2 s messages 1000915 PLC process Terminal adapter System monitor 2 s MAC address control system 2 s disconnected messages 1003101 Operator Input 102 s Acknowledgment WinCC 102 s User Message 9 s 8 s on 9 s Message class 100 s 8 s Message type 100 s Computer name 1003107 Operator Input 102 s Hide Manually WinCC 102 s User Message 9 s 8 s on 9 s Message class 100 s 8 s Message type 100 s Computer name 1003108 Operator Input 102 s Show Manually WinCC 102 s User Message 9 s 8 s on 9 s Message class 100 s 8 s Message type 100 s Computer name 1003109 OS process The connection to the master WinCC control system was interrupted messages WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 ASJE32315704 AA 93 OS Project Editor 2 12 Overview of the Process Control Messages
78. of the buttons The effect of the group display default setting is described below Displaying process process control system and operating displays 342 The group display object is visualized in the area overview the Picture Tree Navigator the faceplate and by group displays in the process picture The display varies with the global design setting The group displays in the area overview and in the picture tree navigator are always only related to the system area picture tree in which it is displayed e General Display in the overview area and the Picture Tree Navigator a s o oona e Differentiated display in the process picture i Es on ace on e Display in the PCS7 faceplate WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 11 Group display Process displays A Alarm white on red flashing activated quiet acknowledged W Warning black on yellow flashing activated quiet acknowledged T Tolerance white on blue quiet no acknowledgment required Configured by default for new projects as of WinCC V7 01 The option for acknowledgment response for the Tolerance message class is enabled in the OS project editor Process alarm display S Fault yellow on black flashing activated quiet acknowledged F Error yellow on black flashing activated quiet acknowledged MR main
79. of the server on which the package was generated Because the symbolic computer name is generally longer than the width of the buttons in the overview area of the runtime user interface you should give the computer a nickname that indicates their assignment to the servers 1 In WinCC Explorer select Serverdata and open the pop up menu 2 Select the Preferred Server command from the shortcut menu The Configure Preferred Server dialog box will open WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 15 Overview of process control system options 1 2 Configuring in the PCS 7 environment See also 1 2 4 3 Click on the symbolic computer name and input a new expressive name 4 When you have changed the symbolic computer name and closed the Package Properties dialog by clicking the OK button a warning dialog box is displayed This warning dialog box advises that all configuration data that has been addressed to the old symbolic computer name is invalid Enter the new symbolic computer name in all configuration data inCC Client Configuration Page onfiguring in the PCS 7 environment Page 13 otes on configuring in the PCS 7 environment Page 16 Notes on configuring in the PCS 7 environment Picture Configuration The appearance of the runtime user interface is largely governed by the settings of the layout chosen in the OS Project Editor Various engineering tools used in Basic Process Contr
80. on other applications Page WinCC Options for Process Control 249 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Graphic Object Update Wizard 7 1 Graphic Object Update wizard Content With the Graphic Object Update Wizard editor you export import or update dynamic user objects from WinCC pictures This documentation includes the following topics Creating object templates Exporting user object templates Importing WinCC pictures Updating WinCC pictures Changing user object interconnections Working with configuration files WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 251 Graphic Object Update Wizard 7 2 Functionality of the Graphic Object Update Wizard 7 2 Functionality of the Graphic Object Update Wizard Functionality See also 252 You use the Graphic Object Update wizard to export import or update dynamic user objects from WinCC pictures in the Graphics Designer The interconnection with the assigned tags is retained This wizard functionality is only available ina PCS 7 OS With the Graphic Object Update wizard you update existing objects in WinCC pictures on the basis of a new template To change dynamic information you export it into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet Thereafter you re import the dynamic information With the Graphic Object Update wizard you edit dynamic WinCC pictures as follows 1 You copy the dynamic WinCC pictures 2 You change the interconnection i
81. overwritten with a new entry by the next Cut or Copy menu command The container remains visible at the cut location until it is pasted at another location 1 Click the desired container in the hierarchy window 2 Select the Edit gt Cut Container menu command or press the lt Ctrl X gt keystroke or Select the Cut Container command from the shortcut menu The container and its corresponding nested hierarchy are copied to the clipboard The container icons are displayed in gray color 3 The container can then be pasted to any other location Menu bar Page 210 How to copy a container Select the Edit gt Copy menu command to copy the empty container in the selection window to the clipboard The clipboard contents are retained until overwritten with a new entry by the next Cut or Copy menu command After the copy operation you can insert the clipboard contents into the hierarchy 1 Mark the empty container in the selection window 2 Select the Edit gt Copy menu command or press the lt Ctrl C gt keystroke or select the Copy command from the shortcut menu WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 217 Picture Tree Manager 6 3 Picture Tree Manager Structure 3 Now select the container into which the new container should be inserted 4 Select the Edit command from the menu bar of from the shortcut menu and then select one of the three options Insert Afte
82. picture in the working area and to all nested pictures of the picture authorization required process control elements Process pictures Acknowledges all group display objects and faceplates created accordingly in the picture authorization required none Message list Acknowledges all unacknowledged messages authorization required none The signaling devices are automatically acknowledged Overview Area Area Selection Button a Displays the area identified on this button authorization depends on the setting in the Areas tab of OS Project Editor pertaining to the picture selection in areas with missing authorization 294 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 6 Overview of the button functions in runtime Functionality Server Selection Button Key Meaning rver area Displays the server package identified by the this button authorization required none Group display All messages of an area are interconnected with the display by means of logical OR function authorization required depends on the setting in the Areas tab of OS Project Editor pertaining to the picture selection in areas with missing authorization Select Alarm Source Open Picture Displays a picture with the alarm source if an alarm is active and if you press one of the four buttons authorization required depends on the setti
83. possible You can only assign pictures to a system once On switching the language in the WinCC Explorer the language in the open Picture Tree Manager is also switched The container names are only switched to the newly set language after starting the Picture Tree Manager Duplicate container names are not allowed in Picture Tree Manager This is checked by the configuration interface The container names cannot be manipulated through the Text Library Trick configuration with the same container names but different numbers of spaces is also not allowed This is also checked by the configuration editor In this case as well the container names cannot be manipulated through the Text Library With distributed systems the area names in the projects of the various WinCC servers must be unique in order to ensure correct filtering and display of the messages according to the area It is not possible to configure the picture hierarchy on the WinCC client Instead in Runtime on the WinCC client a full overview of all server projects imported to the hierarchies by packages is offered in Runtime on the WinCC Client The Picture Tree Manager has no limitation with respect to the hierarchy size However note that only the first 256 ranges can be configured for user authorization in the User Administrator Messages or modules that are assigned to a range extended beyond this limit in the ES or OS cannot be selected in Runtime WinCC Options for Proc
84. settings in the Basic Data tab to avoid any unwanted data overwrites See also Page 70 Page 85 2 7 3 How to change the sequence of areas Introduction You can change the sequence and arrangement of the area buttons in the overview window by moving individual areas The areas are ordered from left to right and then from top to bottom Procedure 1 Open the OS Project Editor and the Areas tab Select the area from the Visible Areas list 2 Click Up or Down to move this area to the required position 3 Click Preview The Area preview window opens and you can follow the configuration 4 If necessary select further areas that you wish to move 5 Check the settings in the Basic Data tab to avoid any unwanted data overwrites See also Page 70 Page 85 WinCC Options for Process Control 74 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 7 4 Introduction Procedure See also 2 7 5 Introduction Procedure 2 7 The Areas Tab How to Hide an Area If not all the system areas are intended for runtime operation for example reserve areas you can hide the currently unneeded areas This procedure is also practical on the WinCC clients where not all of areas of all servers need to be operated Open the OS Project Editor and the Areas tab Select the area from the Visible Areas list Move this area to the list of Areas not needed by clicking gt Click Preview The
85. since they already exist in the project You then save all future changes in the group display hierarchy e g changes to the pictures or the tree structure in the Picture Tree Manager These group displays are not seen in runtime by default With loop in alarm via group displays from the area overview therefore a process picture can be opened in which no group display flashes or a group display displays another message type However you can navigate to the alarm sources using the Picture Tree Navigator If you wish to make the generated group display automatically visible you need to adapt the GroupDisplay object in template picture CSig_Template PDL in the Graphics Designer Change the property Other Display to Yes Check all settings of the group display object in the template picture before you execute the Create update group display function This especially applies to the properties Display Group Relevant and Acknowledgment mask Define each of the desired properties in the template picture The factory state corresponds to the PCS 7 standard Here is how you can use the individually configured and tested group displays from a process picture as a template 1 Copy the individually configured and tested group displays into the template picture CSIG_Template PDL 2 Use the C action of the original GroupDisplay object for the new object 3 Change the name of the original object from GroupDisplay to Ori
86. tags from the ES into the OS WinCC server with the Transfer AS OS connection data function in the SIMATIC Manager The transfer takes place only from the ES to the OS Packages are only created on the WinCC servers Once created you can download the packages onto the WinCC clients WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 13 Overview of process control system options 1 2 Configuring in the PCS 7 environment Internal connection tt gt ES IPCS 7 Compact Process values Engineering System Station Program loading SIMATIC Manager Il Cable connection Automation system Transfer lt from ES to OS CPU Internal connection IPCS 7 Compact i Process values WinCC server project Commands Generating packages Cable connection PCS 7 Loading packages from the server WinCC Client1 WinCC Client2 WinCC Client3 project project project Loading packages Loading packages Loading packages Figure 1 1 Picture Hardware components transfer and packages Note When configuration data is transferred to an OS the data is not available on the WinCC client until the package has been generated again on the OS WinCC server and loaded onto the client See also inCC Client Configuration Page Page 15 otes on configuring in the PCS 7 environment Page 16 WinCC Options for Process Control 14 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Overview of proces
87. the acknowledge button in the top right hand corner The red button stops flashing on the operated client The red button may flash under the following conditions WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 301 Process control runtime 9 7 User Interface Flashing Meaning Yes The client has just activated runtime and not all the servers have the status OK Because the status of the servers was confirmed on the client the status of some of the servers has changed from OK to Not OK No The current status of the servers was confirmed using the acknowledge key Because the status of the servers was confirmed on the client the status of some of the servers has changed from Not OK to OK Picture Tree Navigator 4 Clicking this button opens the process window of the Picture Tree Navigator which displays the hierarchy assembled in the Picture Tree Manager for this area The Picture Tree Navigator allows you to select the individual pictures in the area You can also select pictures in the hierarchy using the keyboard If you are using multiple screens with multi VGA the screen selection with the keyboard always acts on the first screen Key Key combination Meaning lt Picture up gt Moves one picture up in the current hierarchy level for example from Container 7 to Container 6 lt Picture down gt Moves one picture down in the current hierarchy level
88. the print scope Note Time synchronization takes effect a few minutes after its activation in Runtime Synchronize the local PC clocks before you activate Runtime if precise time synchronization is required during startup This may be necessary for example in order to receive the PCS messages in the correct sequence WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Time Synchronization 4 2 The Time Synchronization editor See also ow to configure the synchronization through the system bus CP1613 and CP1623 Page 168 ow to configure the synchronization over the Local Area Network Page 174 Simultaneous use of Time Synchronization over System Bus and Local Area Network Page 177 ffects of the Time Reception Service Page 185 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 167 Time Synchronization 4 3 How to configure the synchronization through the system bus CP1613 and CP1623 4 3 How to configure the synchronization through the system bus CP1613 and CP1623 Introduction You can use up to two devices to synchronize the time over the system bus If only one device is being configured always use access point 1 With Access point 2 you have the option of configuring the following tasks e Implement one device redundantly e Synchronize two system buses over a type of bridge e Synchronize two system buses as simultaneous masters Due to asystem
89. time is updated Event Log The events are recorded in the event log How to open this event log Select the Start gt Programs gt Management General gt Event Display command Time When this check box is enabled all time comparisons are entered in the event log Comparisons Every Valid Time Message Frame Changes in Signal Quality When this check box is activated every valid time message frame is entered in the event log When this check box is activated every change of signal quality is entered in the event log ffects of the Time Reception Service Page 185 Effects of the Time Reception Service If the Use time receive utility check box is enabled in the Time Synchronization editor the time synchronization uses the time reception service to set the computer time This prevents other processes from setting the internal time Effects on a computer in slave mode If the computer is operating as a slave the time synchronization deactivates the time reception service with a software setting Otherwise the time synchronization and time reception service would set the local time WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 185 Time Synchronization 4 8 General Information on the Time Reception Service Effects on a computer in active master mode If the computer is operating as an active master the time synchronization activates the time reception service and a
90. to delete the hierarchy using the drag and drop function Procedure 1 Click on the container that you want to delete in the hierarchy window 2 Use a Drag amp Drop operation to drag the selected container and its underlying containers to the selection window 3 When you release the mouse button all pictures are moved to the selection window All information of the deleted and underlying containers are lost in this process See also Page Page Page Page Page Page WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 243 Picture Tree Manager 6 5 General information on the hierarchy 6 5 4 3 How to delete the hierarchy using the shortcut menu Procedure 1 Click on the container that you want to delete in the hierarchy window 2 Open the corresponding shortcut menu 3 Select the Delete Container menu command and confirm the prompt The container and all its nested containers will be deleted from the hierarchy All pictures are moved to the selection window All information of the deleted and underlying containers are lost in this process See also Page Page Page Page Page Page 6 5 4 4 How to delete the hierarchy using the menu bar Procedure 1 Click on the container that you want to delete in the hierarchy window 2 Select the Delete Container menu command or press the lt Ctrl L gt keystroke The corresponding container and all its nested containers will be deleted fro
91. view of the lifebeat objects associated with a project and of automation devices and operator stations of other projects To this end all plant parts must be connected to a shared network Tasks of the Servers The servers have the following tasks e The servers record the data for the process images and messages from the automation devices To this end the servers are connected via industrial networks e g PROFIBUS to the automation devices e The servers provide the process data for the WinCC clients and record processing states Tasks of the WinCC Clients The WinCC clients have the following tasks e The WinCC clients are used for inter server operator control and monitoring of the entire system By double clicking on the picture of the server the WinCC client can see all the way to the automation device e The WinCC clients obtain the states of the respective servers over the network Tasks of the Automation Devices The automation devices have the following tasks e The automation devices perform on site measurement control and regulating tasks Requirements for monitoring The following operating states are relevant to monitoring e Connection established e Connection not established e Disturbed Monitoring Cycle You set the monitoring cycle to the values 5 s 10 s or 1 minute in the Lifebeat Monitoring dialog box A default monitoring cycle of 10 seconds is preset WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual
92. when a PCS 7 OS is installed You can use the extended status display to define statuses on the basis of the group value and or up to four control tags You assign pictures to the statuses The group value is triggered by a tag which represents the message status Other types of dynamizing are not possible The group value is usually interconnected with a PCS 7 EventState You can use any numerical tag from the WinCC Tag Management as a status tag The alarm status results from the evaluation of the bits of the group value If the group value contains multiple bits the priority determines which status is displayed For the bits of the group value you assign pictures for the Came In Came In Acknowledged Q and Went Out Unacknowledged statuses In addition you can assign a basic picture and a flashing picture for the OK status Configuration steps You configure the extended status display in several steps 1 Specify how many tags you want to use Connect these tags to the appropriate object properties Status1 to Status4 of the extended status display 2 For status value generation determine the bit assignment of the status value in accordance with a bit position of the utilized tags Status1 to Status4 3 If you want to consider the alarm statuses of the group value you determine the bits of the group value to be used Connect the Group value property to a tag In PCS 7 this is usually the EventState ta
93. you dimension in the Graphics Designer The configuration options are the same as for the loop display mode Special fields are picture windows that you assign to a particular picture during configuration for example a warning notice You configure the default settings in the 1001 pdl picture In runtime the picture is placed in the configured position each time it is opened WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 305 Process control runtime 9 7 User Interface Number of faceplates in the picture window In the Runtime Window tab of the OS Project Editor you can set the maximum number of faceplates in the picture window that can be simultaneously displayed on each monitor or by the same instance Up to four faceplates can be displayed When you open a faceplate and the number of open faceplates exceeds the configured number a faceplate already open is closed Picture Tree Navigator The Picture Tree Navigator is opened in runtime at the pre configured position and in the maximum picture size The size ofthe window can be changed However ifthe picture tree is large the window is not larger than the working area otherwise the user cannot select the lower ranks of the hierarchy You can close the Picture Tree Navigator after opening a picture from the Picture Tree Navigator You can specify the response of the Picture Tree Navigator after opening a picture in the Runtime Window tab of the OS P
94. 0 Y78 Trend_xxx Y78 SVALVE VALVE 710 90 Y78 Trend_test Y79 SVALVE VALVE 20 20 Y79 Trend_test2 Comment The name of a tag consists of the columns Link1 to Link6 Example of line 1 HAUPT TYPICALS SA0001 SANTRIEB The names in the table must not have blank spaces See also unctionality of the Graphic Object Update Wizard Page WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 265 Component List Editor 8 8 1 General Information About the Component List Editor Introduction You can use the Component List Editor for example to configure the properties of the measurement points that are needed for the PCS 7 OS runtime e Type e Entry point picture Loop In Alarm e Area assignments The function is only available in one PCS 7 OS Overview The component list is usually derived from the PCS 7 ES configuration in the course of the AS OS engineering Compile OS The AS OS engineering distributes all relevant runtime properties of the measurement point in the WinCC configuration data such as data manager alarm logging and the component list Following configuration changes in the PCS 7 ES you can use the AS OS engineering to ensure that specific data on the OS remains consistent You can create new measurement points yourself using the Component List Editor The editor shows you all the information of the component list regardless of the source However you can only change data in the editor that you have e
95. 2 Specify your settings for your computer configuration in the General tab 3 Switch to the Startup tab WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 289 Process control runtime 9 4 How to set up and load the project Computer properties xj General Startup Parameters Graphics Runtime Runtime WinCC runtime start up order Global Script Runtime 4larm Logging Runtime _ Tag Logging Runtime C Report Runtime Graphics Runtime C Meldefolgeprotokoll SEQPROT x Edit Additional Tasks Applications Add CCTMTimesyne exe CCPerfmon exe Remove CCCSigAT Server exe CCTTRT Server exe OSLTMHandlers exe SFCRT EXE Up S7JCBAAX EXE Down Edit List of WinCC tasks that will be started when the WinCC project is activated If the Basic Process Control optional package is being used the entries shown above are made in the Additional Tasks Applications list of the OS Project Editor Note The OS project editor automatically activates the startup applications Alarm Logging Runtime Global Script Runtime and Graphics Runtime in the Startup tab In addition the application CCCSigRTServer is automatically linked WinCC Options for Process Control 290 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 4 How to set up and load the project See also ow to activate a project for Runtime operation Page WinCC Options for Process Control
96. 4 AA 187 Lifebeat Monitoring 5 2 General Information About Lifebeat Monitoring 5 2 General Information About Lifebeat Monitoring Functionality Lifebeat monitoring monitors WinCC stations and automation devices that are accessible over PC and industrial networks Lifebeat Lifebeat object object WinCC client Process control level PC network Server Lifebeat Lifebeat object monitor m Process level System bus Lifebeat object Lifebeat object Automation devices AG The above sketch illustrates as an example the structure of a lifebeat monitoring system with the computers of the command level and the subordinate process level You can configure lifebeat monitoring only via Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS connections of the SIMATIC S7 PROTOCOL SUITE or via an OPC connection between WinCC stations NetDDE is not supported See also ow to configuring lifebeat monitoring with an OPC connection Page 191 isualizing the Lifebeat Monitoring in Runtime Page 193 WinCC Options for Process Control 188 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Lifebeat Monitoring 5 3 Function Principle of Lifebeat Monitoring 5 3 Function Principle of Lifebeat Monitoring Introduction Lifebeat Monitoring monitors servers clients and automation devices In general Lifebeat Monitoring runs on a central WinCC client It provides a
97. 4 AA 87 OS Project Editor 2 9 Basic data tab Entries in the User Library column show the dates of the files in the user library in the folder lt Product gt Options pdl FaceplateDesigner Entries in the Product Library column show the respective dates of the files in the product library in the folder lt Product gt Options pdl FaceplateDesigner_V6 Picture components with a check mark alongside will be adopted from the user library The lower two lists of face plates are interdependent If a modified picture component that is local to the project and shown in the left hand list is flagged not to be overwritten it will in fact not be overwritten by a picture component from the user library Updating the Dynamic Wizard scripts Use the Update Dynamic Wizard Scripts check box to define whether all the files associated with the Dynamic Wizard scripts will be overwritten You cannot select individual files If the check box is selected associated files local to the project will be replaced by the files in the delivered state Updating the screen composition for startup If you select the Update screen for start up check box the screen that is local to the project will be overwritten This is the special screen that is stored for all users of the project as Default ssm Thus the users have a common start screen which opens during logon instead of the Welcome pdl A separate start screen can be created for each user
98. 8 s Name of faulty AS control system interrupted 8 s OS connection display of AS messages OS connection in Domestic Shell 1012268 PLC process Message synchronization for Maintenance control system diagnostic messages is messages running 1012269 PLC process There are more diagnostic Maintenance control system messages of the type messages MAINTENANCE_ERROR 1012270 PLC process There are more diagnostic Maintenance control system messages of the type messages MAINTENANCE_DEMAND 1012271 Preventive There are more diagnostic Maintenance maintenance messages of the type MAINTENANCE_REQUEST WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 ASJE32315704 AA 99 OS Project Editor 2 12 Overview of the Process Control Messages Message Message Class Message text Created for Meaning No 1012272 OS process Error while exporting Maintenance 2 s Free text The control system identification data 2 s following texts are currently messages available in English Initialization error Failed to build the list of servers Failed to obtain project path Failed to enumerate server information I O Write error Unspecified error 1012273 PLC process There are more maximum Maintenance control system priority diagnostic messages messages 1012291 Operator Input 2 s Message system Maintenance 2 s User na
99. 8 s Unit 4 s Old value 1013010 Operator Input 7 s SIMATIC BATCH 7 s Operator Message 4 s 5 s 6 s 4 s Operating text 5 s Function name 6 s Reserved 1013011 Operator Input 7 S 6 s 8 s PCS 7 7 s Operator Message 4 s 6 s Operating text 8 s Labeling of the requirements number 4 s Requirements number specified by the operator WinCC Options for Process Control 102 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 13 Split Screen Manager 2 13 Split Screen Manager 2 13 1 Picture Management in the activated project Picture management In an activated project the Split Screen Manager manages the display data the picture compositions and the picture changes according to the picture hierarchy You can address and retrieve the individual display areas using the API functions of the Split Screen Manager You can also switch the language to the languages supplied in the Text Library The Split Screen Manager runs in the background of the active project It cannot be accessed via the user interface The important features of the Split Screen Manager are the following e Manages the screen data e Saves the screen composition e Manages the plant membership of all displayed pictures e Supports picture changes in accordance with the picture hierarchy created in the Picture Tree Manager e Manages a picture stack Picture Memory e Manages a picture storage Picture S
100. 9 12 Process Controlling Graphic Pictures Appropriate area authorizations must be assigned in the User Administrator to the logged on user This function is only available ina PCS 7 OS Procedure Click Picture via measurement point in runtime in button set 1 The Picture selection via measurement point dialog box opens Any block comment of the measuring point is also displayed in the table beside the measuring point The block comment is also displayed in the window bar of the picture component which can be opened by clicking the block icon The comment originates from the comment block structure tags and is configured at the block in CFC Bi Picture selection via measurement point Computer Meas point d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT WinCC Options for Process Control d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d B Sym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BS ym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym
101. AA 261 Graphic Object Update Wizard 7 5 Structure of the configuration file In the course of a subsequent import you can interpret the export file in accordance with the settings of the original configuration file The picture objects with the object properties created accordingly are then determined from the picture or pictures The data are written to a file that can be edited with Microsoft Excel The structure corresponds to the settings of the configuration file Importing the picture objects The picture objects named in the export file are copied from the template picture into the pictures of the project The configuration corresponds to the settings of the export file When the objects are imported the Wizard reads the configuration from the file name of export file cfg If this file does not exist the import takes place via the project specific file Updating the picture objects If the export file does not have to be edited the Update the picture objects Wizard basically uses the project specific file to replace the objects changed in the template picture See also Structure of the configuration file Page 7 5 3 How to exchange script and instance specific picture information Introduction When objects are imported and updated alongside the tag connections of dynamic object properties the structure instance names of the following tags are also recognized and exchanged e Tags used in C scripts e Tags used in tri
102. Bus The image shows the factory settings of the jumpers and the default switch positions Configuration meaning of the jumpers switches interfaces The functions of signal generators watchdogs plug control and addressing are set using plug in jumpers Slot Jumper Meaning X6 1 2 jumpered Signal generator function on 3 4 open Signal generators can only be acknowledged by software 3 4 jumpered Signal generator acknowledgment is possible by means of software and externally wired pushbutton 5 6 open Watchdog function normal 5 6 jumpered Watchdog function inverted 7 8 open Event triggered release of the signal generator relay 7 8 jumpered Event triggered activation of the signal generator relay 9 10 open Watchdog function off 9 10 jumpered Watchdog function on x4 1 2 jumpered Insertion check is activated by means of jumper between pin 6 8 inside the connector 2 3 jumpered Insertion check activated by means of 5 V signal from printer WinCC Options for Process Control 152 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn Slot 3 12 Signal module Jumper Meaning x1 25 pin watchdog and signal generator interface x2 9 pin hardcopy interface All X6 jumpers are inserted in delivery state The X4 jumper 1 2 is inserted in delivery state The jumper settings marked with represent the standard configuration for use with PCS7 OS and do not co
103. C Omnikey CardMan3111 PCSC driver V1 1 2 1 for the source of the driver installation 7 Open the C Omnikey CT API_V4_0_2_2 directory to install the API with Windows Explorer To begin double click on SETUP EXE Follow the setup and install the API to the suggested directory 8 Restart the computer 9 Open the WinCC Chipcard Terminal dialog via the Windows Control Panel Activate the connection via port 1 or port 45 The Use existing smart card reader check box must be cleared for this The CardMan Desktop 3111 smart card reader is now ready to use Insert the cards into the smart card reader so that the chip is facing the LED After the reinstallation the previously used models B1 CardMan 9010 and B1 CardMan 9011 can still be used Open the WinCC Chipcard Terminal dialog box via the Windows Control Panel First activate the function Use existing smart card reader not Plug amp Play WinCC Options for Process Control 362 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Chip card Reader 10 2 General Information About the Chip Card Reader Then select the connection via COM1 The previously used smart card readers are now ready for use CardMan Desktop USB 3121 by Omnikey The smart card reader CardMan Desktop USB 3121 is functionally identical with the model CardMan Desktop serial 3111 but is equipped with a USB connection The CardMan Desktop USB 3121 smart card reader is installed manually Proceed as fo
104. C Chipcard Terminal dialog via the Windows Control Panel Activate the connection via port 1 or port 80 The Use existing smart card reader check box must be cleared for this The CardMan Desktop USB 3121 smart card reader is now ready to use Insert the cards into the smart card reader so that the chip is facing the LED After the reinstallation the previously used models B1 CardMan 9010 and B1 CardMan 9011 can still be used Open the WinCC Chipcard Terminal dialog box via the Windows Control Panel First activate the function Use existing smart card reader not Plug amp Play Then select the connection via COM1 The previously used smart card readers are now ready for use B1 CardMan 9010 9011 by Omnikey The B1 CardMan 9010 9011 smart card readers are discontinued old devices that can be used After the installation of WinCC they can used as before They have a LED which alternately remains dark is lit green or flashes red WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 363 Chip card Reader 10 2 General Information About the Chip Card Reader The dark state indicates the following e No power supply e Reset mode e Self test The self test only lasts a few seconds The green state indicates the following e A successful self test e Smart card reader is ready e Card is not inserted or is not recognized The red flashing state indicates the following e Self test not succ
105. CC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 233 Picture Tree Manager 6 5 General information on the hierarchy 6 5 6 5 1 General information 234 General information on the hierarchy General information on the hierarchy In WinCC the interdependence of containers and pictures is illustrated in the form of a hierarchy Note the following information for this hierarchy The nodes of the hierarchy are always made up of containers All container may be empty or contain a picture of Graphics Designer You can assign any name to the container However the container name must be unique and checked by the Picture Tree Manager If you derive the picture tree from the plant hierarchy the complete path with separator characters is entered as the container names However only the last part of the container name is displayed during runtime You can only include existing pictures in the hierarchy You cannot change picture names in the Picture Tree Manager The structure of the hierarchy is open which means there is no height or width limit prescribed for the hierarchy tree When a hierarchy is created with the help of the Picture Tree Manager hierarchy information is stored in various OS engineering data such as the message system user administrator and component lists Therefore it is necessary to specify and retain the OS hierarchy at the earliest possible point in the planning process Subsequ
106. Class 5 ae Type 8 ystem messages Comment 2 IV Activate Info 2 Loop in Alarm 2 Message priority jo 4 0 Se meer 16 Prinriku 1 Process control system and Operator Messages p Message Nu Class Event Operation Created for 1000204 0 OS process co Connection 6 s not established WinCE CO 1000205 0 05 process co Connection 6 s established WinCE 1000900 0 05 process co PERFMON 7 s is low System monitor 1000902 0 OS process co PERFMON 7 s is high System monitor 1000904 0 OS process co PERFMON s is low System monitor 1000906 0 OS process co PERFMON s is high System monitor 1000908 O Preventive mal PERFMON 7 s is low System monitor 1000910 0 Preventive mai PERFMON s is high System monitor 1000912 0 PLC process c Loss of redundancy of terminal ada System monitor 1000915 0 PLC process c Terminal adapter 2 s disconne System monitor 1003101 0 Operator Input 102 s Acknowledgment 9 102 s cknowledg WinCC FA inn2in7 No N narskar beret PRINT Atay UA hd wee sll OFEN RINT Yara ida hd neil utas CE xi OK Cancel Apply Column widths of the message window Edit the column width of the message blocks you created in the Column widths of message window list The column widths are preset according to PCS 7 guidelines Define the desired output format in the Date and Time message blocks Defining the message classes and message types T
107. Font color ON Came In Acknowledged Font color OFF Went Out Unacknowledged Font color ON Went Out Unacknowledged Font color OFF WinCC Options for Process Control 44 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Overview of process control system options 7 9 Migration of Extended Status and Analog Displays Prior to WinCC V6 2 Object Property Message Type New Object Properties Background Color Bit 20 Operator Request Came In Background color ON Be for Operator Came In Background Color Off npu Came In Acknowledged Background color ON Came In Acknowledged Background color OFF Went Out Unacknowledged Background color ON Went Out Unacknowledged Background color OFF Font Color Request for Bit 20 Operator Request Came In Font color ON Operator Input Came In Font color OFF Came In Acknowledged Font color ON Came In Acknowledged Font color OFF Went Out Unacknowledged Font color ON Went Out Unacknowledged Font color OFF If flashing was configured for message classes of the extended analog display before WinCC V6 2 then flashing is activated for all states as of WinCC V6 2 Transfer of the priorities of the extended status and analog displays The transfer of the previous object properties for the priorities to the new object properties in the Status properties group Object Property New Object Property Request for operator input priority Prio
108. Group value in the properties group Other Select the Tag command from the shortcut menu of the Dynamic column The tag must be a signed 32 bit variable Select one of the tags from the process layer or from the internal tags in the Select tag window Configuring a simulation You can configure a simulation for the purpose of replicating a specific situation using different text and background colors The Simulation and Simulation bit properties will only be evaluated if the status is O K 1 2 3 Select the Simulation property in the object properties ofthe extended analog display Select the Tag command from the shortcut menu of the Dynamic column Select the tag from the Select tag window Double click the Simulation bit property in the extended analog display Other properties group In the edit box enter the simulation tag bit that is to be evaluated In the Colors properties group specify the text and background colors for the simulation WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 37 Overview of process control system options 1 7 How to Configure the Extended Analog Display Export import configuration You can forward the configured settings for the extended analog display by exporting the configuration as an XML file This is also how you import existing configurations You cannot import a configuration of the extended analog display that you ha
109. However this file is not overwritten Updating the configuration of the Graphics Object Update Wizard The Graphics Object Update Wizard requires configuration files that are copied from the OS Project Editor into the project folder The configuration files make it possible to exchange instance specific picture information and script information centrally If you select the Update Graphics Object Update Wizard configuration check box modified configuration files that are local to the project are replaced by the configuration files in the delivered state Updating the audio files for the horn Use the check box headed Update sound files for the horn to define whether all the files that the horn uses for output via the sound card will be overwritten You cannot select individual files If you select the check box the sound files local to the project will be replaced by the sound files in the delivered state WinCC Options for Process Control 88 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 10 General tab 2 10 General tab Introduction The General tab contains settings for the OS Project Editor 2x F Layout x Message configuration Message display Ep Area EB Runtime window B Basic data EE General m Activities when processed by project editor Only configurations capable of online download of changes Only message configuration online download of changes no longer possible
110. Manager Structure See also Menu bar Page 210 6 3 1 23 How to Display the Picture Preview Introduction Select the View gt Preview command to hide or show the picture preview If the option has been selected the preview window will automatically display the picture selected from the hierarchy window If the container does not contain a picture the preview window remains empty Regardless of whether or not this option has been selected the header line of the preview window will always display the name of the picture contained in the container In the event of resizing the displayed picture will be fitted to the new dimensions Procedure 1 Select the View gt Preview menu command 2 Activate the check box The picture preview is selected See also Page 6 3 1 24 How to arrange the picture icons alphabetically Introduction The View gt Arrange Picture Icons Alphabetically menu command is used to set the alphabetic arrangement of pictures in the selection window You cannot specify this option permanently Procedure 1 Select the View gt Arrange Picture Icons Alphabetically menu command See also Menu bar Page 210 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 223 Picture Tree Manager 6 3 Picture Tree Manager Structure 6 3 1 25 How to arrange picture icons automatically Introduction Select the View gt Arrange Picture Icons Automatically menu command to activ
111. Messages Message Message Class Message text Created for Meaning No 1012352 OS process RedundancyControl System Redundancy control system blockade determined Restart messages the computer as soon as possible 1012363 OS process RedundancyControl ERROR Redundancy control system state reset until the partner has messages reached a stable state 1012502 OS process PHRDY Communication with Process Historian control system Process Historian is not messages available 1012503 OS process PHRDY Communication with Process Historian control system Process Historian is disrupted messages 1012700 PLC process Self diagnostics Value Self diagnostics control system s of station 10 s messages is invalid 1012701 PLC process Self diagnostics Value Self diagnostics control system s of station 10 s messages has violated the error limit HIGH 1012702 PLC process Self diagnostics Value Self diagnostics control system s of station 10 s messages has violated the error limit LOW 1012703 PLC process Self diagnostics Value Self diagnostics control system 7 s of station 10 s messages has violated the warning limit HIGH 1012704 PLC process Self diagnostics Value Self diagnostics control system 7 s of station 10 s messages has violated the warning limit LOW 1012707 OS process Self diagnostics Station Self diagnostics control system 10 s caused 2 s messages 1013001 O
112. Monitoring on that server as you would on any other WinCC server WinCC clients will still use Lifebeat Monitoring by importing packages from all servers Runtime Functions 20 The runtime dialog boxes for Configure trends online Picture selection via measurement point and Picture selection by name behave on servers with imported packages exactly as they do on WinCC clients The restriction that only local configuration data is offered for selection on WinCC server projects is canceled WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Overview of process control system options 7 3 Server Server Communication LTO Component List In the runtime of the superimposed WinCC server project the LTO component list evaluates not only the data local to the project but also the imported packages The component information for a WinCC client is located exclusively in the packages and is read from the packages for the purpose of the runtime functions Authorization Matrix In the LTO specific add ins of the User Administrator WinCC server projects can now also take package data into account in determining area information WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 21 Overview of process control system options 1 4 Authentication of Messages 1 4 Authentication of Messages Authenticating messages See also 22 Messages can be integrated into the authorization
113. OS process CAS Connected backup Central Archive Server 2 s Database segment control system 2 s messages 1010111 OS process CAS Backup connection Central Archive Server 3 s Error text control system failed error 3 s messages 1010112 OS process CAS Backup 2 s Central Archive Server 2 s Database segment control system disconnected messages 1010113 OS process CAS Backup disconnection Central Archive Server 3 s Error text control system failed error 3 s messages 1010114 OS process CAS Import from archive Central Archive Server 2 s Archive name control system 2 s started messages WinCC Options for Process Control 94 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 12 Overview of the Process Control Messages Message 6 s Message Message Class Message text Created for Meaning No 1010115 OS process CAS Import from archive Central Archive Server 2 s Archive name control system 2 s failed error 3 s Error text messages 3 s 1010116 OS process CAS Import from archive Central Archive Server 2 s Archive name control system 2 s completed messages 1010117 OS process CAS archive 2 s Error Central Archive Server 2 s Archive name control system during application 3 s 3 s Error text messages 1010118 OS process CAS archive 2 s Central Archive Server 2
114. Procedure 1 Select the Project gt Exit menu command 2 If you have made changes without saving you will be asked whether you want to save your changes Click the appropriate button See also Menu bar Page 210 6 3 1 9 How to edit a picture Introduction Select the Edit Picture menu command to start Graphics Designer Graphics Designer is used to edit the picture This menu command is only enabled if a picture inserted into the tree has been selected Procedure 1 Select the picture you want to modify 2 Select the Edit gt Edit Picture menu command or select Edit Picture from the the shortcut menu 3 The Graphics Designer is started You can now edit the picture See also Menu bar Page 210 6 3 1 10 How to edit container names Introduction Select the Edit Container Name menu command to rename the container You cannot rename the root container WinCC project name The container name can have a maximum of 200 characters WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 215 Picture Tree Manager 6 3 Picture Tree Manager Structure Procedure Select the container which you would like to rename Select the Edit gt Edit Container Name menu command or activate editing mode by pressing lt Ctrl E gt or select Edit container name from the the shortcut menu The container is in editing mode You can now change the name Note While in container
115. Room Boiler room PDL New MCP Boiler1 Boiler1 PDL BoilerRoom Boiler2 Boiler2 PDL BoilerRoom Boiler1 Boiler3 Boiler3 PDL BoilerRoom Boiler2 Post treatment Posttreatment PDL New MCP Cooling1 Cooler1 PDL Post treatment Cooling2 Cooler2 PDL Post treatment Cooling1 Cooling3 Cooler3 PDL Post treatment Cooling2 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 235 Picture Tree Manager 6 5 General information on the hierarchy Note You can also insert empty pictures into the hierarchy These pictures must already be created in WinCC For a future expansion of the plant areas never configure containers with no pictures assigned to them as placeholders This can result in faulty navigation through the picture tree The OS Project Editor makes it easy to configure empty area keys See also Page 246 Page 236 Page Page Page Page 6 5 2 Creating a Hierarchy 6 5 2 1 Creating a Hierarchy Options All pictures of the project are in the selection window at the start of building a hierarchy The hierarchy window contains a root node that contains the name of the project A picture cannot be stored in the root node You can create the hierarchy in the following ways e Drag amp Drop e the pop up menu e the menu bar e by changing the container name WinCC Options for Process Control 236 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager 6 5 General in
116. SIEMENS SIMATIC HMI WinCC V7 2 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual Print of the Online Help 02 2013 ASE32315704 AA Overview of process contro system options OS Project Edito 2 Horn 4 6 9 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety as well as to prevent damage to property The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken A WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken A CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken If more than one degree of danger is present the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage Qualified Personnel The product system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in
117. Tree Manager When you select the Close window for picture selection check box the Picture Tree Navigator window closes as soon as a picture in the hierarchy is selected WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 8 The Runtime window tab See also Page 79 Page Page 83 2 8 2 Loop display and process window Introduction Loop display gives a detailed display of faceplates Process windows display processes Both the loop display and the process window use windows that do not adapt to the size of picture being displayed The windows have scroll bars and the size of the windows can be changed The windows can be displayed either in a grid or in an arrangement similar to the group display Grid display Each window has the same size and is positioned in a grid The input boxes called Number of windows horizontally and Number of windows vertically on the Runtime Windows tab make dimensioning and positioning the windows in the grid an easy matter Either enter the number straight into the input field or else use the slider or the spin box WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 79 OS Project Editor 2 8 The Runtime window tab User defined display Activate the User defined check box on the Runtime Windows tab and click Detail The Loop Display Process Window dialog box will open Loop display Process window
118. User Administrator 10 4 3 Chip card reader in runtime Introduction To log on to the operator control and monitoring system insert your chipcard in the chipcard reader The required data are read out When a card is inserted in the chipcard reader it is not possible to log on to the system manually You will remain logged on to the system until you remove the card from the chipcard reader When you use the chipcard the Automatic logout function is disabled If when you are reading or writing to a chipcard a message appears on the screen telling you that the card is inserted incorrectly or is defective proceed as follows 1 Remove the chipcard 2 Close the dialog box with the message 3 Slowly reinsert the chipcard into the chipcard reader Always make sure to insert or withdraw the chipcard smoothly Note This menu command can only be activated if the Chipcard option was installed In runtime the Chip Card menu is disabled since the functions can only be used in the configuration system WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 371 Index 3 3D bar graph A Accept Faceplate 85 Access point 168 Access rights Acknowledge Group acknowledgment Message Signaling devices Acknowledge button Acknowledged alarm list Acknowledged messages Acknowledgement response Action 85 Activate Runtime Activating a faceplate 85 Activating runtime Acti
119. a system Plant bus If the server operator stations have multiple client operator stations each terminal can be equipped with a signal module Note The signal module is configured separately for each computer You need to configure each computer When you use the project duplicator the settings are not copied WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 141 Horn 3 12 Signal module See also Page Page Page Page Page 154 Page 158 Page 156 3 12 2 Function Characteristics of the Signal Module Functionality See also 142 The signal module performs the following functions e Control of three acoustic or optical sensors e Watchdog e Three binary inputs e Acknowledgment resetting of the audible signals through software control or external acknowledgment A 25 pin and a 9 pin Sub D plug are located at the front of the module The watchdog and signaling device functions are carried through the 25 pin Sub D plug The 9 pin plug is not used Via the Basic Process Control option pack the group signal or the group audible indicator is controlled by a logical OR When control is through the software the three signal outputs are reset When acknowledgment is carried out externally for instance using keystrokes all assigned signal tags are set to 0 and the signal outputs are reset at the same time All signals sent through the two plu
120. able with these settings 1 1 The structure instance is replaced in all tag files in accordance with the settings described above The structure instance name is always defined at the tags and must have the same structure instance WinCC Options for Process Control 264 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Graphic Object Update Wizard 7 6 Introduction 7 6 File Format of the Export Import File File Format of the Export Import File The export import file contains the following columns in this order Picture Name Object Type Link1 to Link6 Object name Individually configured columns from the configuration file Example of an export and import file The Export Wizard generates a file in the csv format as illustrated below You can change or expand the file as needed The Import Wizard regenerates objects e g motors or valves with this file Picturename Object type Link1 Link2 Link3 Segment4 MyPic Pdl MOTOR MAIN TYPICALS MyPic Pdl MOTOR MAIN TYPICALS MyPic Pdl VALVE MAIN BEF DT1BA1 MyPic Pdl VALVE MAIN BEF DT1BA1 MyPic Pdl VALVE MAIN BEF DT1BA1 MyPic Pdl VALVE MAIN BEF DT1BA1 Continuation of the Table Segment5 Segment6 Objectname X Pos Y Pos Tag Identifier Trend SD0001 SDRIVE MOTOR 200 120 SD0001 Trend_2 SDO0003 SDRIVE MOTOR 190 230 SD0003 Trend_3 Y71 SVALVE VALVE 20 20 Y71 Trend_6 Y78 SVALVE VALVE 20 7
121. accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Trademarks Note the following A WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation If products and components from other manufacturers are used these must be recommended or approved by Siemens Proper transport storage installation assembly commissioning operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with The information in the relevant documentation must be observed All names identified by are registered trademarks of Siemens AG The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described Since variance cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full consistency However the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequen
122. ading the package All server projects whose packages are loaded on the WinCC client are displayed in the plant configuration picture of Lifebeat Monitoring If an OS or AS being monitored by the server project fails this failure is displayed in the plant configuration picture of the WinCC client When you click the OS icon of the relevant server project the picture changes to the process picture of the server project The operator station PLC which has failed can be viewed there onfiguring in the PCS 7 environment Page Configuring a distributed system The main steps for configuring a distributed system in the PCS 7 environment are described below 1 Create a server project with the aid of the OS Project Editor 2 Configure the picture hierarchy using the Picture Tree Manager WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 17 Overview of process control system options 1 2 Configuring in the PCS 7 environment oa Aa O N Configure the user authorizations in the User Administrator Configure the Lifebeat Monitoring functions Generate the packages on the server Create a WinCC client project with the aid of the OS Project Editor Select the area view required in runtime Download the packages 8 Configure the Lifebeat Monitoring functions on the WinCC client Configure the user authorizations in the User Administrator of the WinCC client Note If you create a new project
123. age_1 pdl CFC_Teilanlage_1 MEASMON_14 System ES CFC_Teilanlage_1 MEASMON_15 MEAS_MON Anlage_1 Bild_Teilanlage_1 pdl CFC_Teilanlage_1 MEASMON_15 System ES CFC_Teilanlage_2 MEASMON_21 MEAS MON Anlage_2 Bild_Teilanlage_2 pdl CFC_Teilanlage_2 MEASMON_21 System ES CFC_Teilanlage_2 MEASMON_22 MEAS_MON Anlage_2 Bild_Teilanlage_2 pdl CFC_Teilanlage_2 MEASMON_22 System ES CFC_Teilanlage_2 MEASMON_23 MEAS_MON Anlage_2 Bild_Teilanlage_2 pdl CFC_Teilanlage_2 MEASMON_23 System ES CFC_Teilanlage_2 MEASMON_ 24 MEAS_MON Anlage_2 Bild_Teilanlage_2 pdl CFC_Teilanlage_2 MEASMON_24 System ES CFC_Teilanlage_2 MEASMON_25 MEAS_MON Anlage_2 Bild_Teilanlage_2 pdl CFC_Teilanlage_2 MEASMON_25 System ES Pressure Object1 Anlage_2 Bild_Teilanlage_2 pdl Sammelanzeigei User Temperature Object1 Anlage_1 Bild_Teilanlage_1 pdl Sammelanzeige1 User I Ready h Using the editor The Component List Editor is only available WinCC single user projects and multi user projects The configured component list of the loaded server packages is used on the WinCC client You apply the settings made in the dialog boxes of the Component List Editor by double clicking the OK button The settings are always based in the currently opened WinCC project You sort the entries in the Component List Editor as follows e When you click one of the column headers the entries in this column are sorted in ascending order e When you click this column header again the entries are sorted in
124. al clock e They can operate as slaves They detect when the time message frames are not being received e They can operate as active or standby masters e The synchronization interval is permanently set at 10 seconds and cannot be configured Local Area Network with operator station The operator station synchronizes its local time over the Local Area Network All network adapters that support Windows can be used External time reception station See also 180 The DCF 77 or GPS time signal receivers at the serial port operate with the DCF 77 reception service program as an external reception station The reception station synchronizes the internal time of the computer using the received radio waves The time synchronization cooperates with the time reception service The software is activated if the computer is an active master and it is deactivated if the computer is a slave This enables the time synchronization alone to set the internal computer clock An external receiver must be available on both redundant WinCC stations Page 181 eneral Information on the Time Reception Service Page 184 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Time Synchronization 4 7 Hardware Support of Time Synchronization 4 7 2 Time signal receiver Introduction The following time signal receivers are supported WinCC e DCF77 Receiver DCFRS e WINGPS GPS receiver DCF77 Receiver DCFRS The DCF77 recei
125. als for the incoming messages You assign available physical signaling devices to the signal tags and define the acknowledgement response Application examples show you the configuration of the acknowledgement response in a client server system You use the Project Documentation button to print out the configuration data of the horn Using a horn without activating a signal transmitter You can use a horn in order to set a signal tag without activating a signal transmitter when a message arrives After the message has been acknowledged the signal tab is reset In the Message assignment tab configure the message properties and the signal tag Select the signal tag in the Signal assignment tab Do not assign a signal module or sound file to the tag Runtime response of the horn 116 If configuration is performed during runtime please note that the horn is reinitialized The signal transducer is acknowledged but queued alarms are triggered again The alarm logging system has no influence over this response Acknowledge the signal transducer once again WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn See also 3 2 General Information About the Audio Alarm On activating runtime the horn is only activated after the Alarm Logging system has started up The standard delay is 30 seconds and can be modified in the SSM cfg file of the project in the section RTControl using the HornDelay par
126. ame message occurs again only one signal is triggered if the previous message has already been acknowledged as Came In or Went Out 8 Click Apply Your settings are saved If a message satisfies the conditions of a number of signal tags only the first assigned signal tag is taken into consideration This is because a message can only set one signal tag You can change the assignment order by moving the selected rows in the table up or down using the arrow buttons next to the table See also Page 120 Page 121 Page 123 Page 123 124 ow to assign a signal transducer to a signal tag Page 127 3 4 2 How to assign the message class to the signal tag Introduction An incoming message of a message class defines whether the signal tag will be activated and thus a signal triggered taking further message properties into account All the message classes which exist in a project are available In addition access can be made to message classes by means of message class IDs Name these message classes using the syntax ID where ID is the number of the message class Example entry 1 corresponds with message class Alarm In the Properties dialog box of the Alarm Logging Editor you see the ID numbers of the relevant message class If you do not specify a message class each incoming message activates the signal tag WinCC Options for Process Control 120 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3
127. ameter The value should not be less than 30 seconds In the case of large projects 60 seconds may perhaps be sensible The signal transducer behaves in different ways depending on the delay e n normal operation the signal transducer is only triggered by alarms for a certain user alarms which occur chronologically after the user has logged on Alarms which occurred before logging on but have not yet departed are included in the new list but no longer trigger the signal transducer e If alarms occur between booting runtime and the user logging on the signal transducer is triggered from the past for these alarms after HornDelay has expired Note The signal transducer is also triggered in runtime when the user is logged off Page 119 Page Page Page Page WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 117 Horn 3 3 Limits on Voice Output in the Horn 3 3 Limits on Voice Output in the Horn Use on voice outputs If you want to use voice outputs in the horn note the following items when configuring e Keep the voice output as brief as possible e f possible create small WAV files by generating the WAV files in mono rather than stereo with medium or wherever possible with a low quality low sampling rate e Add up the size of all WAV files configured in the horn for each operating station and increase the RAM accordingly e To achieve clearly audible voice output you mu
128. an external third party component Client computers are integrated into time synchronization via routers UTC is used as the time base If the client computer is located in a different time zone it will automatically switch to the local time zone for display and output purposes Import Time from a Connected WinCC Server WinCC clients and servers with their own project can use the WinCC servers whose packages they have loaded If the server that was named as master fails the WinCC client selects another server from the list of packages A WinCC server must be in runtime mode to be able to detect a client as the time master Only the active WinCC master can be the time master for a redundant server pair Import Time from Permanently Defined Computers When you select the Import Time from permanently defined computers radio button is selected the Computer 1 and Computer 2 input fields can be edited Enter the names of the specified computers from which the time will be imported here Use Computer 1 as long as it remains available Then use Computer 2 The status of the WinCC project on the defined computers is not taken into account Only the operating system must be fully functional The computer name can be a Windows computer name such as kh19074d or a qualified domain name if a DNS server is available A complete name would be something like kh19074d khe siemens de or kh19074d if the slave is in the same DNS domain as the
129. arms authorization required none List of messages to be hidden Display list of messages to be hidden authorization required none Print message sequence report Prints a chronological list of messages authorization required none Trend system Recall compile trend groups Recalls and displays trend groups online authorization required j none The function is only available at one PCS 7 OS Note The SFC Visualization BATCH flexible and Route Control Center buttons are only displayed in button set 2 in runtime if the corresponding optional packages have been installed Each of these optional packages must be ordered separately from the WinCC Basic Process Control optional package WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 297 Process control runtime 9 7 User Interface 9 7 User Interface 9 7 1 User Interface Overview This section describes the layout ofthe user interface and the basic control elements of WinCC Runtime Prerequisite The optional Basic Process Control package was used during configuration WinCC Runtime After the project has been activated the following startup screen is displayed WinCC Options for Process Control 298 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 7 User Interface User Interface The user interface is divided into three areas e Overview Area e Working Area e But
130. assigned to the COM interfaces e WinCC redundancy redundant batch server e Time receiver DCF77 GPS e Chip card Reader It is usually not possible to run all applications simultaneously as standard computers are only equipped with two COM ports WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 183 Time Synchronization 4 8 General Information on the Time Reception Service 4 8 General Information on the Time Reception Service 4 8 1 General Information on the Time Reception Service The DCF 77 time reception service The DCF77 long wave transmitter transmits time information in coded form on the 77 5 kHz frequency Because of its central location in Central Europe and its extensive range up to 2000 km this transmitter is significant far beyond Germany The time information that is broadcast is picked up by the two atomic clocks CS1 and CS2 of the Physikalisch technische Bundesanstalt in Mainflingen near Frankfurt Germany and represents the official time according to the Time Law of 1978 of the Federal Republic of Germany It corresponds to central European time or central European daylight saving time and is derived directly from the internationally accepted Universal Time Coordinated scale Note After having installed the DCF77 receiving service you start it using either the Windows system management or you the restart the PC The DCF77 receiving service software Version V2 0 is used for the
131. at are displayed as columns in a table In WinCC these columns are called message blocks The message blocks consist of three sections e System blocks contain system data issued by Alarm Logging These data include date time or report ID e Process value blocks contain the values returned by the process e g critical fill levels or temperatures e User text blocks are texts that contribute to general information and understanding e g information about messages fault locations or causes of messages Whereas the system blocks are permanently associated with the message the user may add process value blocks and user text blocks to a message During configuration in Alarm Logging CS you configure each individual message in one line Example of a message line A Cod 5 I lt amp a el Ble e a a 4 4 8 a Date Time of Da Priorit Source Event Status Info Cor Message state In a message a distinction is made between the state of the message source process value 0 1 and the acknowledgment status not acknowledged acknowledged As a result the message status is a combination of the state of the message source and the acknowledgment status Depending on the acknowledgment concept a message may have up to four acknowledgment statuses e Came in e Came in acknowledged e Came in went out not acknowledged e Came in went out acknowledged The current status of the message is indicated as follows e The
132. ata csv file installation directory WinCC bin are entered in the message system of the project The LTMdaten csv file contains system messages from WinCC and Basic Process Control System need not be acknowledged and Process control are used as the message class and message type for all messages In Runtime the messages are displayed in the control system list as non flashing WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 59 OS Project Editor 2 5 Message Configuration Tab black object on a gray background These messages are of lower weighting and are used for information You can change certain the system messages from LTMdaten csv to process control message in the Process control and operator input messages list Specify the priority of system messages in the Message priority input box Either enter the value directly in the input field or use the slider or the spin box The input limits are predefined and are displayed alongside the slider Reserve message priority 16 for vital messages of your plant particularly for Fatal event messages Activating process control and operator input messages Select the system messages from the LTMdaten csv file to be converted into process control messages from the Process control and operator iinput messages list You can create additional messages for PCS 7 such as Simatic Batch or SFC Activate the check box in leading the list entry Thi
133. ate the automatic arrangement of pictures in the selection window If the option is activated the pictures will be arranged automatically The gaps will automatically be filled Procedure 1 Select the View gt Arrange Picture Icons Automatically menu command 2 Activate the check box Automatic picture arrangement is now set See also Menu bar Page 210 6 3 1 26 How to specify Confirm for Replace Picture Introduction The Options gt Confirm For Replace Picture menu command is used to you specify that users must confirm the replacement of a picture in the hierarchy Procedure 1 Select the Options gt Confirm for Replace Picture menu command 2 Activate the check box The picture is replaced after the user has confirmed the prompt See also Menu bar Page 210 6 3 1 27 Confirm for Delete Hierarchy Introduction The Options gt Confirm for Delete Hierarchy menu command is used to specify that users must confirm deletion of the hierarchy WinCC Options for Process Control 224 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager 6 3 Picture Tree Manager Structure Procedure 1 Select the Options gt Confirm for Delete Hierarchy menu command 2 Activate the check box The hierarchy is deleted after a user has confirmed the prompt See also Page 6 3 1 28 Recalculating the group display hierarchy completely when saving Functionality If the check box Recalculate the group display
134. ating an OS using PCS7 Engineering Station the project is automatically called in the background and initialized using the default settings How to install optional editors of the process control system options 1 During the installation of WinCC click User defined installation in the Setup Type dialog box 2 Inthe Select Components dialog box select the Options check box All the subcomponents available for installation are displayed as enabled on the right 3 Clear the check boxes for the subcomponents that you do not want to install 4 Then click Next The installation will continue Installing the editors The following table shows you which selection boxes you use to install which editors Selection Box Installing the editors Basic Process Control OS Project Editor Picture Tree Manager Time Synchronization Horn Lifebeat Monitoring and the Component List Editor Smart card Chipcard functionality for user authorization Installation of WinCC with Smart card option extends the functionality of User Administrator The Chipcard reader option adds a Chipcard item and its corresponding functions to the menu bar WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 23 Overview of process control system options 7 5 Overview of the Editors of the Process Control System Options Optional editors in the WinCC system If you select every option in the Setup dialog bo
135. be changed The picture is scaled to match the change in size The configuration corresponds to the picture window configuration for the group display In the Maximum Number of Windows field define in each case the maximum number of picture windows permitted to be displayed Either enter the value directly in the input field or use the slider or the spin box The input limits are predefined by the layout and are displayed alongside the slider Faceplates in the Picture Window In this input box you configure the maximum number of the following faceplates in the picture window e Faceplates that are displayed simultaneously on each monitor Up to four faceplates can be displayed irrespective of the faceplate instance and of the picture window layout When a picture component opens and the number of open picture components exceeds the configured number a faceplate already open is closed Faceplates that are displayed simultaneously by the same instance of the faceplate Up to four faceplates of the same instance can be displayed irrespective of the monitor and the picture window layout When a faceplate opens and the number of open faceplates of the same instance exceeds the configured number a faceplate of this instance that is already open is closed Picture Tree Navigator 78 In Runtime click a button to open the Picture Tree Navigator window in the overview area in order to display the picture hierarchy arranged in the Picture
136. c diagrams of a project You must change this template centrally if necessary This object template is called a template picture The name of the template picture has to start with the symbol During the import process the user object templates are copied to the respective process pictures with connection information This is only possible if the user objects present in a process picture do not have to be adapted on an instance specific basis Otherwise the import causes the loss of object information Only the tag connection is adapted on an instance specific basis For example if you need a script to call a specific faceplate it must be identical for all user objects of one type You achieve this when the script automatically accesses the connection information when you click the user object AS block name and derives the name of the faceplate from it The user objects must have the type object property In this property the customized object type is entered e g VALVE This entry in the type object property is the identifier for the object Give a unique identifier to the newly created objects The tag object property exists for this purpose If this object property is present the current text is also exported into the tag column of a Microsoft Excel file during the export You can then change the entries in Microsoft Excel For the next import these values are then entered in the tag object property for the correspond
137. cannot set these four address lines with DIP switches This results in the following assignment of switch to address line as described above in general form Switch 8 7 6 5 4 3 Lines A 11 10 9 8 7 6 Switch 2 1 Lines A 5 4 3 2 1 0 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 12 Signal module Setting the I O Address You now set the I O address as follows using the available switches e Select the I O address e g 180h the address must not yet be in use on the PC concerned otherwise an I O address conflict will result e Convert to binary notation 0001 1000 0000 the conversion is simplified by considering each HEX digit as a 4 Bit block e Set and delete the individual address bits CAUTION The DIL switches do not cover the four least significant bits The example given 180h therefore has the following switch positions default setting Switch Pin 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Address Pin 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Position OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF Example for the Address 100H 0001 0000 0000 Switch Pin 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Address Pin 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Position OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF See also ISA Bus Signal Module Page 143 Structure of the Switches and Plug In Jumpers with the ISA Bus Page 147 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 149
138. cess Control Messages Message Message Class Message text Created for Meaning No 1012002 OS process 2 s cannot send time Time synchronization 2 s Device name e g control system signal CP1613 messages 1012003 OS process Time reception service Poor Time synchronization control system or failed signal messages 1012004 OS process 2 s cannot receive time Time synchronization 2 s Device name e g control system signal CP1613 messages 1012005 OS process 2 s cannot receive time Time synchronization 2 s Device name e g control system signal CP1613 messages 1012006 OS process 2 s no time switching to Time synchronization 2 s Device name e g control system backup device 3 s CP1613 messages 3 s Device name 1012007 OS process 2 s can send time signal Time synchronization 2 s Device name e g control system properly CP1613 messages 1012008 OS process Time reception service Time synchronization control system functions properly messages 1012009 OS process 2 s can receive the time Time synchronization 2 s Device name control system signal properly Device 1 messages 1012010 OS process 2 s can receive the time Time synchronization 2 s Device name control system signal properly Device 2 messages 1012011 OS process 2 s switched to Slave Time synchronization 2 s Device name e g control system mode 3 s CP1613 m
139. chy area you want to assign to the specified measuring point from the drop down list box The areas configured in the Picture Tree Manager are offered for selection Entry point picture In order to change the entry point picture click E The entry point picture selection dialog box opens Select the picture Click Open Object name Shows the name of the block icon in the entry point picture The object name cannot be changed Owner Indicates the data origin of the selected measuring point The owner cannot be changed WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 275 276 Component List Editor 8 5 How to edit a measuring point Field OK Cancel Definition Action Save your changes and close the dialog box by clicking this button Click this button to close the dialog box Your entries are not saved You can also select and edit a number of measuring points in the editor window The entry lt various gt is displayed in the input boxes Configured changes are valid for all selected measuring points However only the entry point picture is changed at measuring points created by the owner System ES Note If you change the entry point picture the existing object name is deleted from the component list The new object name is derived from the new entry point picture If a suitable block icon is found its object name is entered in the component
140. concept without assignment to the picture hierarchy or to the PCS 7 technological hierarchy This makes it possible to check the authorization of messages without area information This mainly affects process control messages and function related operator input messages So that certain workstations can view and acknowledge process control messages that are not assigned to any area a default area for example is defined on the Message configuration tab in the OS Project Editor Users need authorization for this default area This method defines which area is needed for checking the authorization of messages without area information The authorization of messages without area information can also be checked on an OS independent basis in the context of server server communication Page Optional OS Project Editor Page 26 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Overview of process control system options 7 5 Overview of the Editors of the Process Control System Options 1 5 Overview of the Editors of the Process Control System Options 1 5 1 Overview of the Editors of the Process Control System Options Introduction You can expand the performance range of the WinCC system with option packages In order to use the individual option packs in the best way you must install the Basic Process Control option package If you create a new project manually you must first run the OS project editor While cre
141. connections How to Open Lifebeat Monitoring 1 Double click the Lifebeat Monitoring editor in WinCC Explorer This starts the editor 2 Enter all connections to be monitored See also Overview of the Editors of the Process Control System Options Page 23 1 5 4 Optional Editor Horn Introduction The Horn editor is used to control optical or acoustic signaling devices or the output from audio files when messages occur Use the Horn editor to configure which signals you wish to be triggered when particular message classes types or message priorities occur The horn is based on the following components e A component that monitors the WinCC alarm system for message related events e A component that is responsible for the user configured output form How to open the horn Double click the Horn editor in WinCC Explorer This starts the editor WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 25 Overview of process control system options 7 5 Overview of the Editors of the Process Control System Options See also 1 5 5 Introduction Overview of the Editors of the Process Control System Options Page 23 Optional OS Project Editor The OS Project Editor is used to configure the currently open WinCC project for use with Basic Process Control and PCS7 The OS Project Editor offers numerous options for designing user specific basic data and supports the generic positioning of buttons i
142. controlling messages Project documentation IV Send once Print Send every i minutes Preview Setup 2 The drop down list for Access point 1 shows all of the network cards and devices installed on the computer Choose the BCE network card suitable for time synchronization via the system bus from the drop down list 3 The installed access points are unknown if you configure station time synchronization on a different computer The symbolic name of access points may be displayed in brackets lt gt for this reason for example lt Softnet 1 gt If you want to use symbolic names for access points activate the Display symbolic name of the access point check box The symbolic names of the access points are assigned to the physical names of the access points during startup in Runtime WinCC Options for Process Control 172 System Manual 02 2013 ABE32315704 AA Time Synchronization 4 4 How to Configure the Synchronization through the System bus BCE 4 Activate the corresponding check box to define the device as master or slave 5 Optionally choose a CP1613 or CP1623 card as a second access point If two access points such as a BCE network card and a CP1613 card are configured on the same computer the combination of functionality results in the following behavior Access Point 1 Slave Access Point 2 Slave Behavior The computer always operates in slave mode This combination is us
143. corresponding operator message is entered to indicate the enabled state of reporting of a measurement point e the display of the disabled state at the measurement points is reset e the display of the disabled state in the group display of the higher level group display hierarchy and of the area overview is reset if no other messages are disabled in the hierarchy WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 8 System operator input Disabling enabling messages of a measuring point Enable and disable the messages of a specific measurement point in the faceplate belonging to the measurement point Click the message disable or enable buttons which correspond to the buttons of the second key set WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 323 Process control runtime 9 9 Message system 9 9 9 9 1 Introduction Message system Message system This section shows how to display and edit messages in runtime Function of the Message System The control and monitoring system records the messages from the automation system and writes these in chronological order to the message log The messages can be viewed in various message lists in the message window The message lists contain a selection of all messages in the log The following different message types exist e Process messages report events that occur during the automated process Pr
144. cription of the message as a filter The text must agree exactly during the filter evaluation Capital and small letters are not taken into account You can also use wildcards stands for any one character and stands for several characters or none If the line is empty every text is taken into account The text in the Source and Event columns is valid for all languages in WinCC Runtime If the Runtime language has been changed source and event of the messages are given new values and the defined filter texts may become ineffective Compared with this the area names of the messages are adapted to the Runtime language so that the filter evaluation works correctly Introduction e e J Procedure 1 2 3 See also inking Signal Tags to Messages Page 119 3 4 5 Creating Signal Tags Introduction You create a signal tag in the form of a binary data manager tag This tag is the link between the message and the acoustic or optical signal WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 123 Horn 3 4 Linking Signal Tags to Messages Procedure 1 Select the Message Assignment tab Select a message class from the Message Class column Now double click in the Tag column to define the associated signal tag For this you have the following options Click The tag selection dialog box opens Select a signal tag that has already been created Enter a new tag directly Click
145. ctionality You use commercially available sound cards in order to output messages acoustically In this case a WAV audio file created using commercially available software is played back and repeated until the message is acknowledged If several messages from different message classes come in the assigned sounds are played back simultaneously In order to access multimedia hardware the sound card communicates via the DirectSound component of the standard operating system component DirectX DirectX takes advantage of all the properties that the sound card driver supports and emulates those properties which the driver does not support but which are nonetheless needed Thus the sound card implementation is independent of the hardware To configure the sound card select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel Double click Sounds and Multimedia to open the dialog box The sounds of the WAV files must support the Pulse Code Modulation format Both mono and stereo are supported Corresponding to the three channels of the signal module three audio files are supplied for the sound card WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 135 Horn 3 10 Creating project documentation 3 10 Creating project documentation Procedure You have the following options for printing out project documentation Button Meaning Project Clicking this button opens a submenu with the commands Print Preview an
146. ctivate the Main Output check box in the Main Unit group group message Main Output After you activated this check box the connected sensor is activated at the output of the group signal Binary Input Channels Displays the status of binary inputs 1 2 and 3 Output Channels A corresponding relay is activated if you select an output The outputs are controlled in system runtime by means of the permanently assigned tags Close See also Use this button to close the Setup dialog box Note The previous Auto Trigger Watchdog option is no longer available as the PCI version of the signal module does not support auto triggering of the watchdog Installing the Signal Module Page 154 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 157 Horn 3 12 Signal module 3 12 10 Pin Assignment of the External Interface Pin Assignment Watchdog and Horn Signal Interface X1 The sensor output and the channel outputs are directly connected externally Each contact controls a signaling device In the event of an error message the main contact and the assigned detail contact are set An acknowledgment results in the control software resetting the main contact and all detail contacts The acknowledgment is triggered externally via the acknowledgment input or by the software The following table shows the wiring of a 25 pin Sub D plug which is used for connecting ext
147. cture GetIndexFromm pin Alarm picture Fee GetMessageCla fe coninalarm OK Cancel Help 2 In the Picture name Call parameter input box enter the measuring point name e g FIC_752_003 Go to the Split Screen Manager in the Function Browser to select the LoopInAlarm function Click OK OpenPicture is replaced by LoopInAlarm Caution Do not double click LoopInAlarm If this occurs accidentally then click Cancel The additional Parameter Assignment dialog box will close Note The standard function Open Picture may not be used in the PCS 7 environment A picture opened with this function overlays the standard runtime environment Now operator input is no longer possible WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 281 Process control runtime 9 1 Process control runtime Content This documentation provides an overview of the runtime functionality in PCS 7 This chapter shows you the following how to use the key and button functions how to navigate the picture hierarchy how to display message lists how to work with graphic pictures how to show alarm sources in the group display WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 283 Process control runtime 9 2 Product Overview 9 2 Product Overview About the Manual Assumption Usage 284 The operating manual provides operating personnel with a gu
148. cture change is carried out via the runtime of the Split Screen Manager As a result the runtime of the Split Screen Manager can provide information at all times about the association of the currently displayed pictures to the system system hierarchy This information is the prerequisite for system specific user authorization checking System specific user authorization checking can be activated and queried with the standard functions of Global Script and the appropriate API functions of the Split Screen Manager Managing the screen data 2 13 3 Introduction The Split Screen Manager supports up to four screens with the following areas e Working area e Button area e Overview area e Process window top window e Unrestricted number of pre configured fields with permanently assigned pictures special fields You can address and retrieve the individual display areas using the API functions of the Split Screen Manager Notes on Multi VGA You need one of the following graphics cards for the multi VGA WinCC option e Matrox G450 MMS Dual order no 6ES7 652 0XX03 1XE0 The graphic card is only supported for Windows XP and Server 2003 e Matrox G450 MMS Quad order no 6ES7 652 0XX03 1XE1 The graphic card is only supported for Windows XP and Server 2003 e Matrox M9120 Plus LP PCle X16 Dual order no 6ES7 652 0XX04 1XE0 e Matrox M9140 LP PCle X16 Quad order no 6ES7 652 0XX04 1XE1 You can also use other graphics car
149. d Setup Documentation Project Click this button to print the configuration data on the assigned printer Documentation Print Printing is started immediately after you clicked the button If you want to preview the pages to be printed first click the Project Documentation Preview button Project Click this button to open a print preview This allows you to check the page view It displays the Documentation pages as they will look when printed Preview Project Click this button to configure the print job Select the printer and the layout in the tabs of the dialog Documentation box You also specify the start parameters and select the print scope Setup WinCC Options for Process Control 136 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 11 Application Examples for Acknowledgement Behavior 3 11 Application Examples for Acknowledgement Behavior 3 11 1 Application Examples for Acknowledgement Behavior Overview of application examples The following application examples explain the options available for using the horn in particular with regard to the acknowledgement behavior e Standalone WinCC clients with signaling devices that independently monitor the servers trigger signals and acknowledge their signaling devices e WinCC clients acting in unison having signaling devices Each WinCC client can acknowledge the signaling devices of all WinCC clients because they are in a group e WinCC
150. d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT Controller 001 Controller 002 Controller 003 Controller 004 Controller 005 Controller Istwert Simulation Controller Istwert Simulation Controller Istwert Simulation Controller Istwert Simulation Download Loop display in working area Show as Loop display as window Controller Istwert Simulation C Group Controller 011 Controller 012 Controller 013 Controller 014 Controller 015 Controller Istwert Simulation Controller Istwert Simulation Controller Istwert Simulation Controller Istwert Simulation Controller Istwert Simulation Controller O06 Controller 007 Controller 008 Controller 009 Controller 010 d Bausteinsymbole ext CONT d Bausteinsymbole ext d B Sym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d B Sym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BS ym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsy
151. d area If messages are assigned neither to a picture heirarchy nor derived from the plant hierarchy of PCS 7 in the Authorization check of messages without a specified area group specify the area for which the messages should be viewed acknowledged The user will need the necessary access rights to the assigned area If you select No area in the drop down list box all users can view and acknowledge the messages Smart Alarm Hiding In the message lists you can use the Hide Unhide message button in the toolbar to hide selected messages temporarily This prevents minor events from being displayed during this time It also enables you to maintain a better overview during critical phases Acknowledgment takes place automatically during hiding and an operator message is generated The button is only available if you have as a minimum been assigned the authorization level Higher process controlling for an area If you select the Key for hiding showing manually check box the Hide Unhide message button is displayed in the toolbar The hidden messages are transferred to the list of hidden messages The operator can use the List of hidden messages button from the key set to access this list From this list you can use the Hide Unhide message button in the toolbar at any time to make hidden messages reappear The temporary hide function is canceled automatically as soon as a set time period defined in the OS Project Editor expi
152. d manually during login during runtime select the corresponding check box 4 Insert the chipcard into the read write device WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 369 Chip card Reader 10 4 Chip Card in User Administrator 5 Click Write to Chip Card User Administrator transfers the data to the chipcard 6 Close the dialog box Note This menu command can only be selected if the Chipcard option is installed 10 4 2 3 Howto check a chip card Introduction If you want to check whether the data were entered correctly read the chipcard out again Check Chip Card Ea User Administrator Card is valid Procedure 1 Select the menu command Chipcard gt Check chipcard 2 Insert the chipcard into the read write device 3 Select the Read card switch User Administrator reads out the card data The login name of the card that was read is displayed in the User dialog box If the login name already exists in User Administrator the Card is valid message will appear If the login name does not exist the Card is invalid message is displayed If there is an error when the chipcard is read this error is noted in this dialog box and no user name is specified Note This menu command can only be activated if the Chipcard option is installed WinCC Options for Process Control 370 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Chip card Reader 10 4 Chip Card in
153. d message Authorization for area Message class Priority Source Authorization Project documentation w Cancel Apply 2 Double click an input box in the Message Class column In this way you select the message Class for which you want to configure a signal output 3 In the Priority column enter a number for the message priority The number specifies the relative importance of an incoming message that causes a signal tag to be activated WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 119 Horn 3 4 Linking Signal Tags to Messages 4 Specify additional filters in the Origin Area and Event columns which determine the triggering of a signal 5 In the Authorization column enter the authorization which will cause the signals to be triggered when this access right is present 6 Double click an input box in the Tag column This specifies a signal tag When a message in the assigned message class comes in the signal tag is activated 7 Inthe Set Tag field define the message status which will cause the signal tag to be set Ifthe signaling device has to be triggered after every occurrence of an incoming message select Message for every incoming This corresponds to the behavior in WinCC Version 5 Ifthe signaling device only has to be triggered on the first occurrence of an incoming message select Not for arrival of an unacknowledged message Then if the s
154. dard is the default setting and can be used universally for all projects SIMATIC Standard is ideal for local projects or projects with a server If several server packages are loaded the area buttons of all servers are displayed behind each other The server buttons are not displayed You can configure the number of area buttons e SIMATIC Serverview SIMATIC Serverview is ideal for projects with several servers You see only the area buttons of the selected server You can configure the number of server buttons and area buttons The layouts in screen formats 16 9 1920 1080 and 16 10 1680 1050 1920 1200 2560 1600 are not approved for the use of Multi VGA Only one monitor is supported The Current layout output box shows the name of the currently selected layout in the project This layout is automatically selected in the Available layouts list The Description output box provides brief information about the selected layout You can configure any number of layouts for runtime by selecting another available layout and changing the monitor configuration Monitor configuration In the Monitor configuration group you can set the desired screen division for the target device in runtime Only the supported monitor configurations can be selected for the selected layout The settings for multi VGA must be made in the Control Panel of the operating systems before running the OS Project Editor Expanded Configuration of the Ove
155. descending order Requirements for using the Component List Editor If you have created a PCS 7 OS but did not do so ona PCS 7 ES you must first run the OS Project Editor in WinCC The OS Project Editor defines the basic properties of the component list You will not be able to edit the component list in the Component List Editor unless you have gone via the OS Project Editor Effect in Runtime Use the LoopInAlarm function for active alarms You can configure an entry point picture for each measuring point using the Component List Editor Measuring points for which no entry WinCC Options for Process Control 268 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Component List Editor 8 1 General Information About the Component List Editor point picture is configured are displayed as a loop at the corresponding faceplate by the LoopInAlarm function The Picture via measuring point is usually used for informational purposes in runtime Only the measuring points that are entered in the Component List Editor are entered in the runtime dialog box You can select among five display formats e Process picture in working area e Process picture as window e Group display e Loop display in working area e Loop display as window If no entry point picture is configured the default setting is Loop display in working area WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 269 Component List Editor 8 2 Functio
156. ds However Siemens only provides support for the graphics card mentioned above Installing the G450 MMS card The Matrox G450 MMS is a PCI module Before installing the card ensure that the corresponding system parameters are correctly set in the BIOS e g Primary Display PCI VGA Otherwise all of the monitors remain dark and the boot messages are not displayed WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 105 OS Project Editor 2 13 Split Screen Manager Start the PC after installing the card and open the BIOS dialog box once more Set the system parameter Reset Configuration Data 1 and exit BIOS by clicking the Save button Note The 1600 x 1200 resolution is only available for analog control of the monitors The maximum resolution of 1280 x 1024 can be used on monitors controlled through DVI Installing the M9120 M9140 card The Matrox M9120 M9140 module is designed for operation on the PCI Express X16 slot Following the installation of the card the corresponding system parameters will be set automatically Over and above the performance of the Matrox G450 MMS the new graphics cards offer the following options e Digital control of monitors with a resolution of 1600x1200 pixels via DVI e Use monitors in widescreen formats 1680x1050 1920x1080 and 1920x1200 for multi VGA operation Multi VGA is not supported for the largest format 2500x1600 pixels Arranging the monitors
157. e Editing mode is now active 3 Change the container name See also Page Page Page Page Page Page WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 239 Picture Tree Manager 6 5 General information on the hierarchy 6 5 3 Changing the Hierarchy 6 5 3 1 Changing the Hierarchy General information You can change the hierarchy by moving individual nodes or complete sections of the hierarchy In doing so you can move the nodes within one level or between the levels You cannot move the root node WinCC project name You can use the following means to change the hierarchy e Drag amp Drop e the pop up menu e the menu bar Note Inserting a new container into an existing node expands the hierarchy by one level Note Modifications to the hierarchy are initially local The changes are lost if you exit the Picture Tree Manager without saving Select the Save command to save all changes and to report these to all runtime client of Picture Tree Manager for example to the Group Display The clients then import the new hierarchy See also Page 234 Page 241 Page 241 Page 242 WinCC Options for Process Control 240 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager 6 5 General information on the hierarchy 6 5 3 2 How to change the hierarchy using drag and drop Procedure See also Click on the container node that you want to move in
158. e OPCServer WinCC in the OPC Server Name box Enter the name of the computer to be monitored in the Run the server on this computer box Click Test Server to determine ifthe corresponding OPC connection can be established Note Note that OPC connections must be correctly configured and fully operational to enable monitoring of PC stations WinCC station PCS 7 OS WinCC Options for Process Control 192 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Lifebeat Monitoring 5 5 Visualizing the Lifebeat Monitoring in Runtime 5 5 Visualizing the Lifebeat Monitoring in Runtime General Note the following when visualizing the Lifebeat Monitoring e To call the visualization of the plant configuration configure for example buttons with picture selection on Config PDL e When the OS Project Editor is run pre configured basic data are created in the current project This means that the picture selection is already on the system configuration for a button in the key set e With a WinCC client project the connections to the server as well as the status of the lifebeat objects to be monitored by the server is displayed e When you click the system configuration the configuration of the server whose packages have been loaded is displayed This is not possible if the server has failed In the Disturbed state the disturbed Lifebeat objects can be displayed Note You have to open and update the Lifebeat Monitoring editor on
159. e System DMA Controller you want to install Open the installation dialog with a right mouse click and select Update driver software Select the option Browse my computer for driver software gt Browse here for driver software gt Browse Navigate to the storage location of the driver installation Siemens WinCC Options Drivers Confirm with Next Use the file HMPCI INF Finish the installation with Close The Signal Unit PCI Adapter device now appears in the device manager under the PCS 7 group WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 155 Horn 3 12 Signal module PCI Signal module under Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 R2 in the 64 bit version Install the PCI signal module as follows 1 Open the device manager in Windows 2 Under the category Other devices you will find the signal module System DMA Controller you want to install 3 Open the installation dialog with a right mouse click and select Update driver software 4 Select the option Browse my computer for driver software gt Browse here for driver software gt Browse 5 Navigate to the storage location of the driver installation Siemens WinCC Options Drivers Confirm with Next Use the file HMPCI64 INF 6 Finish the installation with Close The Signal Unit PCI Adapter device now appears in the device manager under the PCS 7 group See also esting the Signal Module Pag
160. e 156 3 12 9 Testing the Signal Module Introduction In order to test the installed signal module proceed as follows Procedure 1 Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel SS JE Signal Unit Konfiguration 2 Double click this icon to open the Signal Unit Hardware Setup dialog box 3 You can now test the signal module in the Signal Unit Hardware Setup dialog box Note e After having closed the dialog box you must wait approx four seconds after the icon is focused again before you re open the dialog box e Close the Signal Unit Hardware Setup dialog box before activating Runtime The horn is not triggered by message events otherwise Structure of the dialog box Signal Unit Hardware Setup WinCC Options for Process Control 156 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 12 Signal module Signal Unit Hardware Setup Es m Watchdog Main Unit 7 Main Input I Main Output Binary Input Channels Output Channels 7 Input 1 OLM T Output 1 IY Input 2 T Output 2 M Input 3 I Output 3 Close Activate Output 1 to Output 3 check boxes in the Output Channels group in order to immediately test the functions of the signal module and connected signal generators Dialog boxes The dialog box settings are defined as follows Field name Meaning Trigger Watchdog The watchdog is triggered once when you click this button Test Main Unit You can only a
161. e Tree Manager Certain menu functions are disabled while data are being saved for example in the Project menu However you can still edit the hierarchy See also Menu bar Page 210 6 3 1 3 How to print the project documentation hierarchy Introduction Use the menu command Project gt Print Project Documentation Hierarchy to print the hierarchy on the selected printer The printer settings you configured using the Project gt Set Up Project Documentation Hierarchy menu command are active Procedure 1 Select the Project gt Print Project Documentation Hierarchy menu command or click the Print icon on the toolbar Note The command starts the printout immediately You can open a preview of the project documentation for the hierarchy by selecting the Project gt View Project Documentation Hierarchy command See also Page ow to set up the project documentation hierarchy Page WinCC Options for Process Control 212 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager 6 3 Picture Tree Manager Structure 6 3 1 4 How to set up the project documentation hierarchy Introduction Select the Project gt Set Up Project Documentation Hierarchy to define specific criteria for printing the hierarchy tree You specify these settings on the following three tabs in the dialog box Tab Description Print Job On this tab you enter general information about the print job Selection O
162. e also Page Page Page Page Page 232 Page 208 6 5 3 4 How to change the hierarchy using the menu bar Procedure 1 Select a container in the hierarchy window 2 Select the Cut Container menu command or use the lt Ctrl X gt keystroke to move the container including its sublevel containers to the clipboard The affected containers are displayed in gray 3 Select the target container 4 Paste the clipboard contents to the new position using the Insert After Insert Before or Insert into Node menu command See also Page Page Page Page Page Page 6 5 4 Deleting in the Hierarchy 6 5 4 1 Deleting in the Hierarchy Options Deleting the hierarchy in this case means removing individual containers with all their underlying containers from the hierarchy window and thus out of the hierarchy You can use the following means to delete the hierarchy WinCC Options for Process Control 242 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager 6 5 General information on the hierarchy e Drag amp Drop e the pop up menu e the menu bar Note With the Confirm when Hierarchy Deleted option you change the behavior of the Picture Tree Manager when you delete the hierarchy with or without confirmation The pictures deleted from the hierarchy are moved to the selection window and can be reinserted into the hierarchy at a later time See also Page Page Page Page 6 5 4 2 How
163. e configured supplemental message texts Loop in Alarm Shows a picture for the selected message or triggers a script w E gt E te e a E We Autoscroll Activates or deactivates automatic scrolling for the latest message If the function is On Off not activated you can scroll manually This function is only available if the Latest message at bottom option was set in the Message display tab of OS Project Editor Refresh Updates all messages in the process list operation list and journal list The messages are displayed again Comment Opens a dialog where the user can retroactively enter a comment for a message in the process list operation list and journal list Hide message 88 Hides the selected message from the message list and enters it in the list of hidden messages 334 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 10 Trend system 9 10 Trend system 9 10 1 Configuring Saving and Loading Trend Groups Introduction The following rules apply to the configuration saving and loading of trend groups See also Trends which were configured in online mode are persistent Users are always offered all trend groups including any trend groups created by other users On a WinCC client you can display tags configured on a server in trends Precondition is the loaded packages of the relevant server Trend groups
164. e container names are administered in the text library WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 247 Picture Tree Manager 6 6 Effects on other applications When the picture tree is saved the texts are saved in all languages available in the text library Only the text specified as the current language is used as the text Container lt Text ID gt is entered for all other languages If the name already existed in the text library the existing text is used Language change After switching languages all container names are displayed in the selected language Container names for which there is no corresponding name in the selected language are displayed in the language in which they were created The language switch is only displayed in the Picture Tree Manager next time it is opened If you change languages in runtime all non compiled containers are named Container lt Text ID gt Renaming a text When a text in the picture tree is renamed it is only renamed in the current configuration language When the text of a container in the text library is renamed in a language that is not the configuration language this text is not changed when the picture tree is saved This is the case for example when translations are entered in the text library Adding a language See also 248 When you add a new language in the text library the texts of the picture tree do not exist in this langua
165. e expression contains a digit at a position that is occupied by a placeholder in the format string the digit is displayed Otherwise nothing is displayed at this position This symbol behaves like a 0 placeholder However leading or trailing zeros are not displayed if the format expression contains more placeholders before or after the decimal separator than there are digits in the number Placeholder for the decimal separator In many locales a comma is used as decimal point and in others a point is used The placeholder for the decimal separator determines how many places are displayed to the left and right of the decimal separator If the format expression contains only placeholder to the left of this symbol numbers smaller than 1 begin with a decimal character If you require decimal numbers always to be displayed with a leading zero you must specify a 0 placeholder for the first digit to the left of the decimal point The character that is actually output as the decimal separator depends on the system settings for the number format Placeholder for percent The expression is multiplied by 100 The percent sign is inserted at the position it occupies in the format string Thousands separator In many locales a comma is used as the thousands separator and in others a point is used The thousands separator divides thousands from hundreds in a number containing four digits or more A thousands separato
166. e horn to be acknowledged on all computers of this group and all signal transmitters to be deactivated Multiple acknowledgment by a group is possible for all WinCC project types Any combination of letters and numbers can be used for the group name If a computer forming part of the client server system is unable to communicate beyond the router limits using Multicast you will need to bypass the router by configuring a Multicast proxy in the Simatic Shell dialog box Multiple acknowledgment of the horn by an acknowledgment tag Multiple acknowledgment by a group is the preferred configuration Multiple acknowledgment by acknowledgment tags is retained for compatibility reasons If you have connected an acknowledgment button for the horn with a binary tag in the AS you must configure the multiple acknowledgment using one or several acknowledgment tags The acknowledgment tags must already be configured on the server of the WinCC client or on other servers You must interconnect the acknowledgment button so that the corresponding tag in WinCC is set to 0 when acknowledgment occurs The additional acknowledgment tags are synchronized with the local HornReset tag When a signal has been activated as soon as an acknowledgment tag is acknowledged and thus deactivated the local HornReset tag is acknowledged thereby deactivating all signaling devices WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 129 Horn
167. e icons Arrange alphabetically Arrange Automatically Picture information Replace Picture management Picture memory Manage Picture objects Export Import 255 Modify interconnection Update 255 Picture preview View Picture properties View 222 Picture stack 378 Picture Tree Manager Exit Functions Information Start Update Picture Tree Navigator 299 Pictures Plant area Select Plant configuration picture Display Plant hierarchy 208 Plant view Preview 70 Preview window Previous picture Print Group display Hierarchy Print hierarchy Project documentation Print Project Documentation Group Display Project documentation Printing the message sequence log with a client without its own project Priorities 29 35 Process Control Display Monitoring Operating 284 Process alarm Process alarm 342 Process alarm list Process control Process control messages 57 324 Process control system messages 93 Process control system options 11 23 Process message Process value block Process window 79 Process window layout Modify 79 Project Close Example Select Setting Project documentation Print hierarchy Print Project Documentation Group Display WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Index Setting up the hierarchy Setup Group Display Properties of WinCC Online Trend Control R Recalculating the group disp
168. e instance name entered as a whole is also replaced as a whole for example define TagNamelnAction Instance1 gt define TagNamelnAction Instance2 e The instance specific part is replaced at all tag databases which access a part of the structure instance name for example define TagNamelnAction Instance1 ui gt define TagNamelnAction Instance2 ui The scripts you edited are recompiled if the instance specific part of the tag file is replaced Configuring the replacement process Structure instance information on the objects is provided only on a limited basis for extended replacements You can configure the replacement behavior of the Graphic Object Update Corresponding settings can be made in the General section of the configuration file General ChangeTag 0 ChangeLink 0 The ChangeTag entry enables tag replacement The default setting is 0 The Wizard only replaces the tag interconnections of dynamic object properties By entering the value 1 you update all used tags in C scripts triggers and the content of the tagname object property at faceplates The ChangeLink entry is used to specify how the tag interconnections are to be replaced The default setting is 0 The tag interconnections of dynamic object properties are replaced by the structure instance information of the tag interconnection similar to the previous version The structure instance name does not have to appear in the tag By entering t
169. e list of available layouts in the Layout tab When you open the OS Project Editor again the current project settings are displayed You must first confirm modified basic data picture files and actions in the Basic Data tab before these data are accepted in the project Activities when processed by project editor In PCS 7 projects you can change configuration data during operation using the Download changes function Online delta download Every configuration change via the user interface or programming interface is recognized by the runtime software and accepted during operation WinCC Options for Process Control 48 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 2 General information about the OS Project Editor You set this behavior for the OS Project Editor in the General tab If the configuration of the OS allows modification of data during operation data that prevent a Download changes function are brought into the project during the initial configuration This applies in particular for alarm configuration and the startup list Each time the OS Project Editor is run hereafter only those configurations that do not prevent the Download changes function are carried out In the case of a complete configuration all settings are transferred again to the project Changes to configuration data during operation are lost in the process You must download the entire OS After this you can again switch on the del
170. e no effect on the process They affect only the OS and permit the handling of pictures and dialog boxes System operations include selecting further pictures dialog boxes and repositioning pictures in their window e Operator process controls which affect the sublevel control They adjust values such as setpoints or valve positions in the automation system WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 359 Chip card Reader 1 0 10 1 Chip card reader Content The Chip Card Reader option serves to integrate a chip card reader into the WinCC environment If the Chip card Reader option is installed WinCC User Administrator supports the chip card readers named in chapter General information on the chip card reader This option must not be confused with the SIMATIC login This documentation shows you the following e An overview of chip card readers that can be used e How to set the interface e How to write to a chip card e How to check a chip card WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 361 Chip card Reader 10 2 General Information About the Chip Card Reader 10 2 General Information About the Chip Card Reader Introduction The smart card reader is an external device for reading and writing to smart cards You connect the smart card reader to a serial COM1 interface or USB Do not confuse this WinCC option with the SIMATIC Logon The following provides a
171. e terminal bus or an access point in the system bus is configured as master and another access point is configured as slave the time synchronization is permanently disabled A process control message to this effect is sent e Ifthe synchronization is performed via the system bus and the access points in the system bus are configured as master the access points are switched to slave mode The master of another computer takes over the time synchronization and synchronizes the time of the affected computer A process control message to this effect is sent Note Greenwich Mean Time GMT or winter time is used on all devices on the system bus for user data and time message frames You could only upgrade V5 projects to WinCC V5 online if the V5 compatible communication mode check box was activated in the Parameters tab of the Computer Properties dialog box in the WinCC Explorer The following default setting is enabled for this option e for newly created projects as of WinCC V6 check box is deactivated e for projects migrated from WinCC V5 check box is activated Note Up to Version WinCC V 5 1 clock synchronization on the PROFIBUS was supported This function is no longer directly available as of WinCC V 6 0 For questions concerning this problem please contact Customer Support WinCC Options for Process Control 162 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Time Synchronization 4 1 General Information on Time Synchroni
172. e user can also acknowledge messages from this list The other list shows all messages from the area for which the user has the access right Authorization for area but not the access right for Process controlling The user cannot acknowledge messages from this list The message line in the overview window shows only messages which can be acknowledged with the Process controlling access right e Acknowledgeable messages on separate page switch selectable Both messages mentioned above are available to the user The message page with just one list shows only the messages from the area for which the user has the access right for Process controlling The same applies to the message line in the overview window Note If the chosen layout does not support the Message filtering setting the buttons are disabled See also Page 63 2 6 3 Extended message line Introduction An extended message line can be displayed via the working area if the layout supports this setting An extended message line is like a New list but scaled down as appropriate The window adapts to the size of picture being displayed It has no scroll bars and its width cannot be changed You can define its height however since the extended message line is configured as a dedicated picture in the layout WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 67 OS Project Editor 2 6 Message Display Tab Procedure 1 In the Messa
173. e width or height of the working area You can only move the windows within the range from 0 to 100 pixels The following settings are suggested by the OS Project Editor The position is 20 pixels from the top and 20 pixels from the left The next window is displaced horizontally and vertically by 10 pixels See also raphic positioning of a runtime window Page Runtime window tab Page 2 8 4 Trend group display Introduction Configure the trend groups generated using the Online Trend Control function in the same way as for Loop display Windows adapt to the size of the picture being displayed They have no scroll bars and their size can be changed When you change the size the picture is also scaled See also oop display and process window Page 79 Runtime window tab Page WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 83 OS Project Editor 2 8 The Runtime window tab 2 8 5 Graphic positioning of a runtime window Introduction In the picture window display dialog boxes you can open a dialog box for easier positioning of the windows To do so click Detail in the Graphic Positioning group The following dialog box will open F Cancel Position this window so that it corresponds to the setting desired for the corresponding Runtime window Procedure 1 Move the window to the position you want it to occupy in runtime and drag it to the appropriate size w
174. ect restricted operations will only be available to those users who possess the required authorizations Authorization Only the user who has authorization for the User Administration level also has the authorization to start the User Administrator All changes to user authorizations take immediate effect in runtime WinCC Options for Process Control 320 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 8 System operator input Procedure 1 Click this button The User Administrator will open fii User Administrator 05 1 mcp x File User Table View Chipcard AddOns Help i latlie lt I gt lel Group_Operator Login Group_Operator IV SIMATIC Logon Administrator Group ER i Group_Operator F Login au yia chip card WebNavigator Automatic logout after 30 Minutes absolute time BEE ve Authorizatio UserAdministration C BEE LET ST S CCOO Picture Editing Change picture Wi i window selection Hardcopy 10 Free alarms BEER Confirm alarms a 10 Br Br By Br Br ee tfMessage Editing C Start archive a 14Stop archive et Edit archive values Er 15 rchive Editing a 1GActionEditing CE C VAProjectManager C 1000 Activate remote ur _1001 Configureremte C _1004Web Access monitoring only Operating the User Administrator The operation of the User Administrator is described in the User Adminis
175. ect the Tag command from the shortcut menu of the Dynamic column Select the tag from the Select tag window If using multiple tags interconnect these with the Status2 to Status4 properties 14 Connect the tag for the group value in the object properties of the extended status display Select the property Group value in the properties group Other Select the Tag command from the shortcut menu of the Dynamic column The tag must be a signed 32 bit variable Select one of the tags from the process layer or from the internal tags in the Select tag window Export import configuration You can save and forward the configured picture assignments for the extended status display by exporting the configuration as an XML file This is also how you import an existing configuration You cannot import a configuration of the extended status display that you have exported prior to WinCC V6 2 Behavior of message priorities in Runtime When a queued event is acknowledged it goes to the background regardless of its priority Events with lower priority that have not yet been acknowledged are displayed prior to events of higher priority that have already been acknowledged Lower priority events are not displayed so long as a higher priority event is displayed as Unacknowledged Outgoing Special settings in the properties dialog box The extended status display has been modified for optimum compatibility with how the group display be
176. ective value property Link02 1 for example means that the dynamic value is written to the export import file by means of the tag name During import the descriptions are compared with the configuration file settings If the import and configuration files do not match the import is aborted In the next sections of the configuration file you specify the assignment of the object properties to the columns of the export import file You can assign multiple entries for each column that was defined in the fifth section A maximum of 10 entries are permitted in ascending order without blank lines Column00 PropertyO Left Propertyl PosX ColumnO1 PropertyO Top These entries are compared sequentially with the properties of the object to be edited As soon as a match is found the Wizard links this property to the corresponding column See also Application of the configuration file Page ow to exchange script and instance specific pi i i 262 7 5 2 Application of the configuration file Introduction After you have created your project specific configuration file the Graphic Object Update Wizard calibrates the user objects Exporting the picture objects During export of a picture object the Graphic Object Update Wizard creates an export file In addition the Wizard saves the configuration file under the name of the export file in CFG format WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704
177. ed if a redundant bus is available The system bus whose master receives the time from an external time signal receiver is used to synchronize the local time of the station Master Master The station operates as cooperative master at both access points and bus systems Either the masters transfer the time message frames to both bus systems or operate in standby mode as slave on both bus systems Note that after changing the active master to standby mode on one device the partner device automatically changes to standby mode The transmitted time message frames contain information from the master pertaining to the quality of external synchronization If an access point changes to a different state the functionality of the active master is forced at the standby master if its external synchronization is operating properly This ensures that the master with the best external synchronization transmits the time message frames on the bus Master Slave This setup results in a bridge function The station synchronizes itself with the time message frames received on bus 2 access point 2 and acts as a master on bus 1 access point 1 Access point 1 always operates as active master and acts as though it is handling external synchronization regardless of whether it really handles external synchronization This prevents a standby master from taking over the role of the active master Synchronization between the two bus systems would be spli
178. ed in the Object type column of the export import file A maximum of 10 entries are permitted in ascending order without blank lines IdentifierObjecttype Objecttype0 tagtype Objecttype9 typ A property of the group display objects can be entered as an identifier in the CSIG cfg configuration file CSIG cfg contains UserValue1 by default These entries are compared sequentially with the properties of the object to be edited When a match is found the wizard accepts this property as an identifier In the fifth section of the configuration file you specify the columns of the export import file The descriptions ofthe columns are located in the first line ofthe export import file Amaximum of 100 entries are permitted in ascending order without blank lines The data type of the associated object property is specified Only the following data types are permitted e Numerical 3 e Alphanumerical 8 e Binary Boolean 11 Columns Column00 X Pos Type00 3 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Graphic Object Update Wizard 7 5 Structure of the configuration file ColumnOl Y Pos Type0l 3 Column02 Tag Type02 11 In the CSIG cfg configuration file the column for the collective value is named CollectValue A link identifier is provided instead of the data type e O for the static value of the Collective value property e 1 forthe tag name of the Coll
179. ed in the Tag Logging application window An archive of trend values is no longer created in Tag Logging New Trend Group Dialog Box Page onfiguring Saving and Loading Trend Groups Page 335 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 10 Trend system 9 10 3 Online Trends dialog box Prerequisite Users require the Authorization for area authorization for the picture window in the working area to open the Trend Online dialog box Click Load configure trend groups in button set 1 WinCC Runtime to open the Online Trends dialog box Ef Trends Online AA TrendGroup 05 05 06 10 18 AA TrendGroup2 05 05 06 10 18 TrendGroup3 05 05 06 10 18 Delete Rename Save As Cancel This dialog box displays all last created trend groups including their contents and the date time of the last change Dialog Description Functionality Meaning Show Displays the selected trend group in WinCC Online Trend Control New Opens the New Trend Groups dialog box In this dialog box you configure the settings for a new trend group Removing Deletes the selected trend group You can also delete several trend groups Rename Opens the New Trend Group Name dialog box in which you can enter a new name for the selected trend group This button is only active if you have selected a trend group Save as Creates a copy of the selected trend group Cancel Close
180. ed in the User Administrator runtime can be used by all users WinCC Options for Process Control 308 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime Procedure 9 8 3 9 8 System operator input 1 Click on this button or click on the login field in the Overview window The System Login dialog box opens el amet ewes Zus 2 Enter your login name and the password You are then authorized to operate runtime Basic control elements in Runtime In the following table the basic operations are listed Function Cursor in runtime Button 4 Description When the cursor assumes the shape of a lightening bolt you can activate a function button or input or enter process information Ifthe lightening bolt cursor is not displayed you cannot make any entries Button functionality fy Reports When you move the cursor over a button and let it hover there a What s this help item with the button functionality is displayed Picture information The picture information displays information about the complete picture currently being displayed When the complete picture changes the picture information is updated as well Click the button shown to display the picture information Information about screen in the work area ie Local Welcome PDL server name picture name container name member of area width 350 height 250 Tab Cursor C Program Files S
181. ed state display disabled by default WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 259 Graphic Object Update Wizard 7 5 Structure of the configuration file 260 AdvancedAnalogDisplay Objects 0 Advanced analog display disabled by default CSIG Objects 0 Group display object disabled by default In the second section of the configuration file you specify whether a log file should be output Trace Logfile 0 no log file is output In the third section of the configuration file you specify what happens during exchanges General ChangeTag 0 ChangeLink 0 With the ChangeTag entry you enable the tag exchange The default setting is 0 The Wizard only exchanges the tag connections of dynamic object properties When you enter the value 1 all used tags in C scripts triggers and the content of the tagname object property for faceplates are updated With the ChangeLink entry you specify the tag replacement type of the tag connections The default setting is 0 The wizard replaces the tag connections of dynamic display object properties with the structure instance information of the tag connection The structure instance name does not have to appear at the tags When you enter the value 1 the tag connections are replaced according to the structure instance names In the fourth section of the configuration file you specify the unique identifier of the object that is indicat
182. editor To accept the imported configuration data in the project click OK or Apply OS Project Editor Page 50 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 91 OS Project Editor 2 11 Structure of the configuration file 2 11 Structure of the configuration file User specific configuration file Pre configured layouts complete with their respective configuration files are available in the OS Project Editor You do not have to change anything in the configuration files Experienced developers can create a configuration file of their own For this purpose a sample file has been prepared and is held in the folder of configuration files to which the developer should refer WinCC Options for Process Control 92 System Manual 02 2013 ASJE32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 12 Overview of the Process Control System Messages 2 12 Overview of the Process Control Messages Overview of the Process Control Messages Message Message Class Message text Created for Meaning No 1000204 OS process Connection 6 s not WinCC 6 s Name of the control system established connection messages 1000205 OS process Connection 6 s WinCC 6 s Name of the control system established connection messages 1000900 OS process PERFMON 7 s is low System monitor 7 s Monitored value control system messages 1000902 OS process PERFMON 7 s is high System
183. ee tabs in the dialog box Tab Description Print Job On this tab you can enter general information about the print job Selection On this tab you can enter information about the page range and time range of the print data Printer Selection In this tab you can specify the output device for the print job The print job can also be directed to a file The appropriate system layout from the Report Designer is used for the printout See also Menu bar Page 210 6 3 1 7 How to update Picture Tree Manager Introduction Select the View gt Update menu command to update the contents of Picture Tree Manager When new pictures are created and saved in the Graphics Designer and in the corresponding directory of the current project while the Picture Tree Manager is open the new pictures only appear in the Picture Tree Manager after an update is performed When pictures are deleted from the directory you must perform an update to remove the pictures from the Picture Tree Manager Procedure 1 Select the View gt Update menu command or click the Update icon on the toolbar or press the lt F5 gt key 2 The existing graphics in the Picture Tree Manager are updated See also Menu bar Page 210 WinCC Options for Process Control 214 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager 6 3 Picture Tree Manager Structure 6 3 1 8 How to exit the Picture Tree Manager Introduction Click Exit to close Picture Tree Manager
184. efined and position the objects with the Graphics Designer Specifying custom positions of the lifebeat objects You can change the positions of the lifebeat objects at any time using the Graphics Designer editor An existing system configuration picture is a requirement 1 Click Edit picture The system configuration picture Config PDL opens in the Graphics Designer editor 2 Change the positions of the lifebeat objects and close the Graphics Designer Note If you want to receive the lifebeat object changes update Lifebeat Monitoring To do so select the setting User defined in the Device positioning in the system configuration selection box New lifebeat objects configured in the Lifebeat Monitoring are inserted at the specified positions in the system configuration picture during updating WinCC Options for Process Control 194 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Lifebeat Monitoring 5 6 How to Design the System Configuration Picture Inserting additional graphic objects into the system configuration picture 1 Click Edit picture The system configuration picture Config PDL opens in the Graphics Designer editor 2 In the Graphics Designer insert additional graphic objects e g standard smart or Windows objects into the system configuration picture and then close the Graphics Designer Note If you want to receive the lifebeat object changes update Lifebeat Monitoring To do so select
185. en Manager Managing the picture stack The Split Screen Manager logs each picture change in the working area and enables you to recall the pictures previously displayed In each working area in the basic picture there is a dedicated picture stack which stores the last eight picture names selected in each working area You use the following button to select the previous picture in the stack D You use the following button to select the next picture in the stack You retrieve the contents of the picture stack using the API functions of the Split Screen Manager Note The authorizations for the pictures in the picture memory and picture stack are user specific Consequently the picture memory and picture stack of all displays are deleted in their entirety every time the WinCC user changes Support for picture changes in accordance with the picture hierarchy 104 Prerequisite for this function is an existing system picture hierarchy that has been created with the Picture Tree Manager A picture can also be changed using the API functions of the Split Screen Manager The runtime of the Split Screen Manager together with the runtime of the Graphics Designer will then perform the picture change according to the configured picture hierarchy WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 13 Split Screen Manager Managing the system association of pictures Every pi
186. ened automatically when the user logs on i e it is the user s personal start picture A screen composition can only be saved recalled or deleted if a user is logged on 1 Click this button The Save Screen Composition dialog box will open un EJ C _m If the user who is logged on has already saved screen compositions these screen compositions are displayed in the list Screen compositions of other users are not displayed 2 Enter a name for the screen composition or select an existing screen composition in order to delete it 3 Click on the Save button The pictures currently displayed on all screens are saved WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 317 Process control runtime 9 8 System operator input See also ow to recall the screen composition Page ow to delete a Screen Composition Page 9 8 14 How to recall the screen composition Procedure 1 Click this button The Recall Screen Composition dialog box will open Ds Creed If the user who is logged on has already saved screen compositions these screen compositions are displayed in the list Screen compositions of other users are not displayed 2 From the list select one of the displayed picture compositions 3 Click Recall All the pictures that were saved are displayed again on all screens WinCC Options for Process Control 318 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runt
187. ennd I Update Dynamic Wizard Scripts Update Graphics Object Update Wizard configuration Update screen for start up Update sound files for the horn OK Cancel The two picture modules lists below show the picture modules with time stamps that match neither those of the picture modules in the product library in the folder lt Product gt Options pdl FaceplateDesigner_V6 nor those of the picture modules in the user library in the folder lt Product gt Options pdl FaceplateDesigner This may have arisen due to a newer version of the basic data or the picture modules concerned may have been configured by the user Entries in the Project column show the dates of the files in the project path Entries in the Product Library column show the dates of the files in the installation folder If there is a check mark against an entry in the list the picture component from the product and user libraries is adopted Duplicated picture modules in the product and user libraries This list is available only ina PCS7 OS If WinCC and Basic Process Control are installed the list is disabled and grayed out The list lower right shows all picture modules that are present in both the product library and the user library This may have arisen due to a newer version of the basic data or the picture modules concerned may have been configured in the Faceplate Designer WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E3231570
188. ent changes to a hierarchy at the area level require manual corrections in the following places Correction of hierarchy data in the messages Editing user authorizations User Administrator Generation of new packages for connected WinCC clients For more information see Effects on other applications WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager Example configuration In the following you can see an example based on WinCC with Basic Process Control not based on the plant hierarchy Picture Tree Manager e577d6 MCP 6 5 General information on the hierarchy Project Edit View Options Help Pretreatment Pretreatment Pdl RB Distillery Distill1 Pdl DB Distillery2 Distill2 Pdl DB Distillery3 Distill3 Pdl ZB Boiler Room boiler room Pdl Bolierl Boiler Pal 8 Boiler2 Boiler2 Pdl Boiler3 Boiler3 Pdl E Ea Posttreatment Posttreatment Pdl 0 Cooling Cooler1 Pdl 483 Cooling2 Cooler2 Pdl 48 Cooling3 Cooler3 Pdl Picture previes Container Ready uF Y This hierarchy is displayed in the following table Container Name Picture Name Father Left Neighbor New MCP Pre treatment Pretreatment PDL New MCP Distillery1 Distil1 PDL Pre treatment Distillery2 Distil2 PDL Pre treatment Distillery1 Distillery3 Distillery3 PDL Pre treatment Distillery2 Boiler
189. equired none Picture via measurement point Selects a picture via measurement point authorization required none The function is only available at one PCS 7 OS Store Picture Recall picture T kep Saves the current picture authorization required none Displays the saved picture again authorization required none WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 295 Process control runtime 9 6 Overview of the button functions in runtime Functionality Previous picture A ey Meaning Displays the process picture which is saved to the picture stack before the current process picture in the working area required authorization none Next picture Displays the process picture that is stored in the picture stack after the current process picture in the working area authorization required none Navigate in the picture tree Detail screen Switches from the area level or sublevel to the next lower level authorization required none Picture up Change to the next higher area level or sublevel authorization required none Picture left Changes to the next sublevel of the current level authorization required none Picture right Changes to the next sublevel of the current level authorization required none Messages Alarms Previous graphics picture E Ih AL IE 015212 Exits message system aut
190. er Matrox Procedure Download the driver for the Matrox M9120 9140 graphics card from the Matrox homepage Shut down the computer Install the graphics card and start the computer Install the graphics card driver a A OO N After installation of the driver set the required parameters for the screen settings in the Windows dialog e g 4 monitors in horizontal arrangement with 1920x1200 pixels at 60 Hz 6 Use display 1 as the primary monitor and use a numerical ascending order when arranging the monitors Note Your required pixel setting can usually be found in the Windows dialog for screen settings Then you will not have to make additional settings for multi VGA In this case do not start the Matrox Tool Matrox PowerDesk SE that was automatically installed during the driver installation Do not change any of the settings in the following dialogs e Multi Display Setup e Desktop Management e Desktop Divider e Hotkeys 2 13 7 The Loop in Alarm Function Loop in Alarm The Loop in Alarm function is only available at a PCS 7 OS For a given measuring point that is exhibiting an alarm you can use the Loop In Alarm function to display the picture component as a pie chart or a process picture that has been linked with it in the Component List Editor Open the Alarm Logging editor to configure Loop in Alarm function In the Loop in Alarm column or in the Properties dialog box of
191. er multi user projects A PCS 7 OS that can view other PCS 7 OS by this means is described below as a superimposed PCS 7 OS or a superimposed server A superimposed server behaves like a WinCC client with regard to what it can view and distribute The difference is that it also behaves like a server project A superimposed server is configured in the same way as for conventional server projects in which additional packages can be loaded for other servers From the point of view of the WinCC client all servers are still equal Effects on packages of process control system options The possibility of configuring OS independent pictures and data has an effect on the individual packages of process control system options Picture Tree Manager The hierarchy of a superimposed WinCC project in runtime consists of the project specific hierarchy and the hierarchy of all projects loaded by means of packages Group display In group display it is possible to connect group display objects to measuring points and pictures From the engineering viewpoint however you must only connect group display objects to pictures in the same project Group display jobs Loop In Alarm and acknowledgments are processed by routing the superimposed WinCC server project to the servers concerned Lifebeat Monitoring For the engineering or runtime functions of Lifebeat Monitoring nothing changes If the superimposed WinCC server is used for workstations configure Lifebeat
192. er of the utilized bits for the evaluation of the group value The entries in the Used Bits list show the order of the priorities The top entry has the highest priority priority 1 Select one entry ata time in the Used bits list and change the priority by clicking Priority higher or Priority lower All entries in the Unused bits list have the priority 0 The icons in the Used bits and Unused bits lists always reflect the PCS 7 standard regardless of any project specific deviation WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 31 Overview of process control system options 1 6 How to Configure the Extended Status Display 7 Assign the used bits in the Assign pictures tab The Index is formed from the status value formation or the combination of status value and group value You can specify the basic picture and flash picture for each combination If a flash picture is configured the basic picture and the flash picture will be displayed alternately in Runtime You can use your own pictures but these must be located in the GraCS directory of the project Extended status display properties 2x1 General Assign pictures Index list Picture Flash picture Index Status Alarm Basic Picture 0 O Bit31 AH 0 0 Bit 30 AL 0 Bit 30 AL 0 Bit 30 AL Q File filter 0 Bit 29 WH D Bit 29 WH wmf em
193. erarchy of the plant pictures The behavior of the top window can be configured in the OS Project Editor If the default behavior is not to your liking then use that editor to change the behavior of the window The Runtime Window tab in the OS Project Editor offers you the following configuration options loop display mode for picture components The windows are automatically adapted to fit the size of the picture on opening Their size cannot be changed You can configure the number and position of the windows With the Detail button you open a configuration dialog in which you set up the position of the first window and the position of the other windows relative to the previous one group display mode for picture components and for windows in the function Picture by Name The windows open with predefined dimensions which can be changed If you activated the User defined check box you can use the Detail button to open a configuration dialog box in which you configure the number position and size of the windows Alternatively you can display the windows in a grid For example with a 2x2 grid each window takes up one quarter of the working area Sets of two windows opened next to each other and one below the other Trend display mode for windows configured with the Trend Online function The windows are adapt to fit the size of the picture Their size can be changed The trends are displayed using pre configured pictures which
194. eration e You can expand the hierarchy by one container by inserting the empty container from the selection window e Cut and paste a picture from the selection window or move it using Drag amp Drop to insert a picture into a container in the hierarchy e You can also move nested hierarchies branches within the hierarchy e Pictures that you remove from the hierarchy hierarchy window are inserted in the selection window automatically e Picture properties such as change date and size of a selected picture can be displayed Note None of the changes you make while editing take effect until you save See also ow to add pictures by Drag amp Drop Page ow to add a new container by Drag amp Drop Page eneral information about the Picture Tree Manager Page WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 229 Picture Tree Manager 6 4 Working with the Picture Tree Manager 6 4 2 How to Display the Picture Properties Introduction You can show information about every picture such as date of change or size of picture Properties Procedure 1 Select the desired picture and open the pop up menu 2 Select the Properties menu command or select the Edit gt Properties menu command or click this toolbar icon The picture properties will be displayed 6 4 3 How to add a new container by Drag amp Drop Introduction You can insert a new container into the hierarchy window by Dra
195. erent power supplies While the old ifc B1 smart card reader is operated from an external plug in power supply unit the CT B1 Snuggle and the Card Man obtain their power supply directly from the PC via the PS2 port To this end you need to disconnect the keyboard and interpose the female connector WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Chip card Reader 10 2 General Information About the Chip Card Reader The smart card reader with PS2 port cannot be replaced or re started while the system is running You must switch off the PC using the power switch If you disconnect the PS2 plug while the computer is running the operating system will crash Note You must make the hardware connections between the smart card reader and the computer before the computer starts up Smart card and redundancy The smart card is configured separately for each computer You configure each computer separately When you use the project duplicator the settings are not copied Note During plant configuration make sure that the following applications are assigned to the COM interfaces of the computer WinCC redundancy redundant batch server e Time receiver DCF77 GPS e Smart card reader Since a computer generally has only one COM interface you cannot use all applications simultaneously See also Chip Card Option in User Administrator Page 368 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual
196. ernal devices lights buzzers bells buttons etc Pin Signal Description Connection H S 1 Signaling device M Relay center contact 2 Reset output Optocoupler 3 Reset output Optocoupler 4 Reset input Optocoupler 5 Reset input Optocoupler 6 Signaling device R Relay normally closed contact 7 Signaling device A Relay front contact 8 Watchdog M Relay center contact 9 Watchdog R Relay normally closed contact 10 Watchdog A Relay front contact 11 BI 1 Bl 12 BI 1 Bl 13 BI 2 Bl Optocoupler 14 BI 3 Bl 15 BI 3 Bl 16 Output 1 M Relay center contact 17 Output 1 A Relay front contact 18 Output 1 R Relay normally closed contact 19 Output 2 M Relay center contact 20 Output 2 A Relay front contact 21 Output 2 R Relay normally closed contact 22 Output 3 M Relay center contact 23 Output 3 A Relay front contact 24 Output 3 R Relay normally closed contact 25 BI 2 BI H Housing S Shield BI Binary Inputs 25 pin subminiature plug connector pin connector with screw locking WinCC Options for Process Control 158 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 12 Signal module Comments Wire the main signaling device horn signal lamp etc to the main contact of the signal module The main signaling device responds every time a detail contact is set that is each time an alarm is reported at the signal mod
197. erred to the project over again When the OS Project Editor is started for the first time this is the only available setting in the project Since the ability to load changes is lost when a configuration WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 11 Overview of process control system options 7 1 General Information on the Process Control System Options 12 is complete a notice is displayed if the project can still execute the Download Changes function Note When migrating to a new product version you must start the OS Project Editor on the client project You must subsequently make customer specific changes to the basic data in the OS Project Editor You can then operate the system as before All functions are available as usual WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Overview of process control system options 1 2 Configuring in the PCS 7 environment 1 2 Configuring in the PCS 7 environment 1 2 1 Configuring in the PCS 7 environment Distributed systems in the PCS 7 environment The OS Project Editor is used to create not only the basic data in server projects or WinCC client projects but also the main picture setup in their overview working and button areas With PCS 7 WinCC is included in the Engineering System SIMATIC Manager for operator station configuration You create the WinCC clients on the Engineering Station ES You introduce
198. ertical directions for displaying servers WinCC Options for Process Control 54 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 4 The Layout Tab Area preview The Preview button opens an area preview of the configured buttons in the overview window The generated overview is displayed schematically The following area preview shows by way of example three area buttons in the horizontal direction and three area buttons in the vertical direction gt Area preview While the preview window is open you can continue configuring Each change is immediately updated in the preview Note The setup options of the Number of Areas and Number of Servers are limited by layout specific considerations If there is no entry in the configuration file for the layout concerned the following settings apply e The horizontal and vertical number is limited to between 1 and 8 areas in the Number of Areas e In Number of Servers the horizontal number is limited between 1 and 4 buttons and the vertical number is limited from 1 to 8 buttons 2 4 3 How to change the configured layout Introduction If you do not want the layout predefined by the OS Project Editor you can change the layout Procedure 1 Open the OS Project Editor and select the Layout tab Select a layout from the Available Layouts list 2 Check the settings in the Basic Data tab to avoid any unwanted data overwrites Note
199. es e Green button The servers monitored are in Runtime and their status is OK e Red button Not all monitored servers are in Runtime Not all monitored servers have the status OK Not all monitored servers have a fault free network connection e Yellow button Fault on one or more servers The servers are still available to the clients 1 e No button The CCEmergencyWatchRTServer exe process is missing in the startup list on the client No packages are loaded on the client Area selection button Container4 Displays the area picture in the working area The button labels correspond to the container names of the picture configured in the top level of the Picture Tree Manager Loop in alarm alarm source picture selection for group display m m P Selects the picture with the alarm source N Group display Vay ke Opens the process window of the Picture Tree Navigator The button is only enabled when i there is a hierarchy below the area WinCC Options for Process Control 300 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 7 User Interface Current date and time 01 10 2008 11 00 53 01 10 2008 11 00 53 Shows the date and time in digital format Login user04 Shows the name of the current user Screen hardcopy Prints out the contents of the current screen on the computer s standard printer For screen Lal formats 16 9 and 16 10 use
200. es e Inthe entries created by AS OS engineering they can change the entry point picture These entries have the owner System ES e You can change and delete properties of the entries you yourself have created These entries have the owner User Updating the entries in the component list 270 AS OS engineering after editing the component list guarantees the update of entries The existing entries are deleted and newly created ones are assigned the System ES as the owner If the entry point picture resulted from calculation of the group display hierarchy the entry point picture is determined once again If another owner deletes a measurement point in the component list or renames the entry point picture the name of the previous measurement point or the original entry point picture remains in the component list following the AS OS engineering If you change the entry point picture to a module you must also change the object name accordingly You must save the group display hierarchy again in the Picture Tree Manager editor or load the project WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Component List Editor 8 2 Functionality of the Component List During delta compilation the Type and Area properties of deleted or renamed measurement points are individually deleted The entry point picture created from the group display the measurement point name and the object name of the previous mea
201. ess Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager 6 2 General information about the Picture Tree Manager See also Page Page Page Page Page Page 234 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 209 Picture Tree Manager 6 3 Picture Tree Manager Structure 6 3 Picture Tree Manager Structure 6 3 1 Menu bar 6 3 1 1 Menu bar Introduction In the menu bar all the commands of the Picture Tree Manager are divided into groups and assigned to menus To execute a menu command select the relevant menu and click the corresponding command If necessary assign parameters to the dialog box that opens Project menu The following commands are available in the Project menu e Save e Print Project Documentation Hierarchy and View Project Documentation Hierarchy e Set up Project Documentation Hierarchy e Print Project Documentation Group Display and View Project Documentation Group Display e Set up Project Documentation Group Display e Exit Edit menu The following commands are available in the Edit menu e Edit Picture e Edit Container Name e Cut Picture e Cut Container e Copy e Insert e Insert Picture Into Container e Insert After e Insert Before e Insert Into Node e New Container e Delete Picture 210 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 ASJE32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager View menu 6 3 P
202. essages 3 s a another time master detected b because lt device name gt switched If two devices have been configured as master and one device switches to standby mode the other will be forced into standby mode as well c lost WinCC mastership If the WinCC server is a redundant server it has permission to operate as time master on the bus It then switches its devices to standby mode 1012012 Operator Input Time synchronization Time synchronization Message deactivated 1012013 Operator Input Time synchronization activated Time synchronization Message WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 ASJE32315704 AA 97 OS Project Editor 2 12 Overview of the Process Control Messages Message Message Class Message text Created for Meaning No 1012014 OS process DCF77 client service has failed Time synchronization control system messages 1012015 OS process DCF 77 client service is Time synchronization control system working properly messages 1012016 OS process 2 s switched to Master Time synchronization 2 s Device name e g control system mode 3 s CP1613 messages 3 s a no time master on bus b worse time master on bus 1012017 OS process 2 s switched to Slave Time synchronization 2 s Device name e g control system mode 3 s CP1613 messages 3 s a another time master detected b because lt device name gt switched If tw
203. essful smart card reader defect exchange device Related information about the smart card reader B1 CardMan 9010 9011 is available at www omnikey com Table top unit ifc B1 by Siemens Nixdorf The ifc B1 smart card reader is a discontinued device that can be used Table top unit CT B1 Snuggle by Smart Solutions The smart card reader CT B1 Snuggle is a discontinued device that can be used The CT B1 Snuggle has an LED which is lit alternately green or orange If the LED is green no smart card is inserted or the reader does not recognize the card Smart card and software Warning 364 The software of the card reader types is compatible Each smart card reader can read smart cards that were written on a different type The smart card readers read and write to smart cards with the operating systems TCOS 3 0 TCOS 2 0 and TCOS 1 2 With WinCC 7 2 and later the user information on the smart card is saved in Unicode format An improved hash function for passwords is also used Smart cards written with WinCC 7 2 can no longer be read with versions older than WinCC 7 2 WinCC projects which you have migrated using the migration tool on WinCC 7 2 can continue using the previous smart card However you may not change the password in the WinCC User Administrator You insert the smart cards into the card reader in such a way that the memory chip is on the same side as the respective company logo The smart card readers have diff
204. estartHorn The binary tag defines whether the Alarm sets signal tag and Signal tag sets signaling device components are reactivated If you set the value of the tag 1 both components reload the configuration data The signal tags and signal generators are reset The binary tag is set to 0 at the start of runtime HornReset The binary tag determines the acknowledgment behavior of the signal generators The tag is set to 1 ifthe signal generators are active The tag is reset to 0 after the signal generator was acknowledged This behavior applies accordingly to the additional reset tags 132 Note The project engineer my not create any tags with prefix Such actions are reserved for handling in the WinCC PCS7 software You are not allowed to manipulate these system tags The system tags are necessary for proper functioning of the product WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 8 Minimum Horn Configuration 3 8 Minimum Horn Configuration Introduction The following minimum horn configuration is recommended for the PCS7 Assignment of message classes to the signal tags Assign the following message classes to the corresponding signal tags Message Class Priority Source Area Event Authorization Tag Alarm lt default gt Alarm_Tag Warning lt default gt Warning_Tag PLC PCS lt default gt PLC_PCS_Tag message OS_PCS
205. etwork 4 6 Simultaneous use of Time Synchronization over System Bus and Local Area Network Introduction The time can be synchronized simultaneously over the system bus and the Local Area Network The local computer time in this case will always be synchronized with that of the Local Area Network The access points on the system bus can only be configured as masters to forward the time received from the Local Area Network to the system bus WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 177 Time Synchronization 4 6 Simultaneous use of Time Synchronization over System Bus and Local Area Network Configure time synchronization on one computer of a Windows domain The computer must be synchronized with the domain time to function normally in the domain Because the Windows synchronization only guarantees a time synchronization of 2 seconds you must configure the synchronization with permanently defined computers 1 Enter the primary domain controller as Computer 1 2 Optionally enter an additional Primary Domain Controller as Computer 2 if one is available 3 Configure the access points on the plant bus as masters by enabling the relevant check boxes Even if you are operating in standby mode never set the local time Time Synchronization WinCC_ 6_2 Oi mep a T r MOPS vorc o o y slave lt CP1613 2 gt Ej 2 el d Have lv WinCC Options for Process Control
206. etwork 164 Log file Logging Login 299 With chip card With password Long term archiving Loop display Modify 79 Loop in Alarm 112 267 Configuring Loop In Alarm 299 M Manage Picture memory Managing Hierarchy Mapper Master Slave Meaning Icons Measuring point Edit Find Selecting a picture Menu bar Menu commands Menu extensions Chip card Message Acknowledge Acknowledgment concept Message block WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Index Operating Operator prompt Process Process control Process value block Select Source States Structure System block User text block Message archive Message behavior 329 Message block Message blocks Editing the layout Message cause Message classes 57 Message configuration 57 Configuring in the PCS 7 environment Message filter Message filters 66 Message line 63 Adapting 67 Contents Message lists 324 326 Operating Message pages Sorting Message priority 57 Message selection Acknowledged alarm list Incoming alarm list Journal list Operation list Outgoing alarm list Process alarm list Message system Message window Message Window Migration Extended Analog Display Extended Status Display Modifications Modify Dynamic integration Entry point picture Hierarchy Loop display 79 Monitor configuration 56
207. ew The Preview button can only be used when the selected layout supports the generic creation of area buttons in the overview window WinCC Options for Process Control 72 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 7 The Areas Tab Access to areas missing authorization In the User Administrator you specify the area specific access rights for users in runtime However you can also allow users to select pictures and group displays of areas for which they have no authorization Users without access rights to areas have the following access options e Picture selection is not possible The user has no access to this area standard behavior e The picture can be selected using area button The user can select the pictures of these areas for monitoring purposes Access to the group displays in the overview and Picture Tree Navigator is not permitted Area specific messages are not visible Operator process controls with PCS 7 picture components are not possible operator inputs in process pictures depends on the configuration in the pictures Picture can be selected using both the area button and the group display The user can select the pictures of these areas for monitoring purposes Access to the group displays in the overview and Picture Tree Navigator is permitted Area specific messages are not visible Operator process controls with PCS 7 picture components are not possible operator inputs in process picture
208. f bmp git jpg pn gale ea a it e Prot_Alarm bmp C wmf emf Bi a Whe Prot_AlarmO bmp S Prot_r bmp a 0 Bit27 TH PStoreDelete bmp C gi 0 Bit27 TH PStoreDelete0 bmp C ipg 0 Bit 27 TH Q PStoreRestore bmp ce 0 Bit 26 TL PStoreRestorel bmp Png 0 Bit 26 TL PStoreStore bmp 0 Bit26 TL 0 PStoreStore0 bmp O Bit25 5 PtnDown_dsb bmp 0 Bit 25 5 PtnLeft_dsb bmp S le PtnRiight_dsb bmp N Bit 25 S PtnUp_dsb bmp i D BRE are if 0 Bit 24 F 0 QH bmp u 0 Bit 20 OR 1 4 Cancel Apply 8 In the index list click the status to which you want to assign pictures 9 The file selection list shows the graphics files of the selected file type from the GraCS directory of the project Double click the desired graphic file You assign the basic picture with the first double click and the flash picture with the second double click 10 If you want to delete a picture from a status select the status in the table and select the appropriate menu command from the shortcut menu 11 Click on the OK or Apply button The settings will be applied 12 Connect the utilized tags to the extended status display Open the object properties WinCC Options for Process Control 32 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Overview of process control system options 7 6 How to Configure the Extended Status Display 13 Select the property Status1 in the properties group Other Sel
209. feature in connection with the interplay between AS417 4H and CP443 1EX11 Industrial Ethernet the time synchronization on the redundant System Bus is only possible as from CP443 1EX11 Firmware Version 2 3 WinCC Options for Process Control 168 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Time Synchronization 4 3 How to contigure the synchronization through the system bus CP1613 and CP1623 Procedure 1 Activate option Synchronization via System Bus Master Slave Time Synchronization WinCC_ 6_2 Oi mcp ma 2 v 2 Select the desired device from the drop down list box of Access point 1 and Access point 2 The drop down list boxes show all devices installed on the computer which support time synchronization via system bus WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 169 Time Synchronization 4 3 How to configure the synchronization through the system bus CP1613 and CP1623 3 Activate the corresponding check box to define the device as master or slave 4 The installed access points are unknown if you configure station time synchronization on a different computer The symbolic name of access points may be displayed in brackets lt gt for this reason for example lt CP1613 1 gt or lt CP1623 1 gt If you want to use symbolic names for access points activate the Display symbolic name of the access point check box The symbolic names of the access points are assig
210. febeat monitoring a tag lt device name gt is created for each device name For the Picture Tree Manager for each picture that contains a group display a tag called lt picture name gt is stored This can cause conflicts with identical names To prevent such conflicts the picture name must not be the same as the device name or system tags with the name prefix A message is displayed when this type of conflict occurs The tag names that cause a name conflict are listed in log file LifebeatMonitoringCS log in the Diagnosis folder of the installation directory Change the device name to resolve the name conflict WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 201 Lifebeat Monitoring 5 8 Dialog box of the Lifebeat Monitoring Note Once you delete an S7 connection on the engineering station and perform an OS compilation the connection and the LBM tags are deleted in the WinCC Tag Management However the configured connection in the Lifebeat Monitoring editor is retained You yourself must delete the relevant connection in the editor and save the new plant picture via the Update function If the connection has not been deleted from Lifebeat Monitoring the runtime message 1009999 outputs the text LBMRT Tag does not exist Structure of the device list Field name Meaning Device name Enter a unique device name in this input box The device name may not exceed a length of 21
211. febeat monitoring e MaintenanceTypicals cfg for the Create update diagnostic pictures function e PCSTTypicals cfg for the Create update block icons function e ChangeOCXtoUdo cfg for migration of the PCS 7 library V5 to PCS 7 library V6 with the dynamic wizard e CSIG cfg for configuration of the group display object with the dynamic wizard e LBMObjects cfg for configuration of the plant configuration picture with the dynamic wizard e TemplateControl cfg for the standard behavior The first three configuration files are selected automatically by the system You can create a separate configuration file for the respective function Store these in the same directory under the name ConfigTypicals cfg MaintenanceTypicals cfg or PCS 7Typicals cfg If these user created configuration files are found they will be used Structure of the configuration file The configuration file is structured like an INI file and is divided into several sections Using the default settings in the TemplateControl CFG file as an example the layout of the configuration file appears as follows The editable object types are specified in the first section of the configuration file Disable any objects that are not required in order to increase performance AnalyzedObjects Customized Object 1 customized objects enabled by default 1 OCX Objects 0 OCX disabled by default 0 AdvancedStateDisplay_Objects 0 Advanc
212. for Trends Online on a client with its own project you may not use any local tags of the client if a default server has been configured for SSM under Server data New Trend Group Dialog Box Page onfiguring Online Trends Runtime Page 336 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 335 Process control runtime 9 10 Trend system 9 10 2 Configuring Online Trends Runtime Introduction See also 336 The Online Trends dialog box can be used to select tags from Tag Management in WinCC Runtime and to visualize these in a WinCC Online Trend Control A distinction is made between online tags and archive tags The functionality is only available at one PCS 7 OS The Trend online button can only be accessed if a picture is open and originates from an area for which the logged on user has been assigned authorization level 2 allowing selective access or a general authorization History values cannot be displayed because online tags are not saved to the database As long as it is open the trend control will buffer the values itself for the duration of the time configured in WinCC Online Trend Control Archive tags however are saved to the database so that you can also page to older values using the function buttons in the curve control 20 527 00 101753308 Note The Load Configure Trend Groups function is available in WinCC Runtime The trend traces are not display
213. for a voice output to be clearly audible it makes sense to play only one sound If several messages are queued and the output of sounds is limited the order of the entries in the Sound column determines which sound is played How to Configure the Acknowledgment Behavior of the Audio Alarm Page 129 Linking Signal Tags to Messages Page 119 Application Examples for Acknowledgement Behavior Page 137 General Information about the sound card Page 135 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 6 How to Configure the Acknowledgment Behavior of the Audio Alarm 3 6 How to Configure the Acknowledgment Behavior of the Audio Alarm Introduction In the Signal assignment tab you configure the acknowledgment behavior of the horn The horn can either be acknowledged separately for one computer or in a coordinated manner for multiple computers Local acknowledgment of the horn The horn is acknowledged using a HornReset tag on a separate independently acting OS This tag is acknowledged locally or directly When a user acknowledges the horn the acknowledgment tag and thus all signal tags are reset This deactivates the signaling devices Multiple acknowledgment of the horn by a group In a coordinated client server system you specify multiple acknowledgment by means of a group of computers If a user acknowledges the horn on one computer of the group a multicast communication causes th
214. for an unsigned 32 bit value In projects prior to WinCC V7 01 the events ToleranceLow ToleranceHigh Operator prompt and Measuring point disable are not acknowledgeable events in the PCS 7 environment By default the tag has the start value 0x00000C11 3089 These are precisely the acknowledgment bits for ToleranceLow ToleranceHigh Operator prompt and Measuring point disabled Page ow to display the alarm source via the group display Page WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 12 Process Controlling Graphic Pictures 9 12 Process Controlling Graphic Pictures 9 12 1 Process Controlling Graphic Pictures Introduction With the configured graphic system you can control and monitor process events during process control Process control takes place in the working area The graphics system has the following tasks e Displaying the plant in a plant overview e Displaying process pictures in the working area e Operating the process and system e Displaying the status of alarms WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 349 Process control runtime 9 12 Process Controlling Graphic Pictures Graphic Pictures Graphic pictures are freely configured pictures which in general display plant or plant components and enable process actions and events to be operated Graphic pictures are displayed in the working area
215. formation on the hierarchy When you save the picture hierarchy the names of the plants areas and units subareas will be entered into the Text Library in all available languages Note Modifications to the hierarchy made in the editor of the Picture Tree Manager are initially local All changes are lost if not saved before you close Picture Tree Manager The Save command saves all changes and also reports these to all runtime clients of Picture Tree Manager for example to the Group Display The clients then import the new hierarchy See also Page 234 Page 237 Page Page Page 6 5 2 2 How to Create the Hierarchy by Drag amp Drop Procedure 1 Click on the icon of the empty container in the selection window 2 Use a Drag amp Drop operation to drag the container into the hierarchy window 3 Select the container after which the new container should be inserted The target container is displayed with a colored background 4 Release the mouse button The new container is inserted at the same level after the selected container See also Page Page Page Page Page Page WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 237 Picture Tree Manager 6 5 General information on the hierarchy 6 5 2 3 How to create the hierarchy with the Pop Up Menu Procedure 1 Select a container in the hierarchy window 2 Open the corresponding shortcut menu Edit Rictare Edit C
216. g 2 s Group display 2 s is the tag name control system does not exist messages 1011018 Operator Input 3 s Block is locked to Group display 3 s User 6 s Computer name WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 ASJE32315704 AA 95 OS Project Editor 2 12 Overview of the Process Control Messages Message Message Class Message text Created for Meaning No 1011019 Operator Input 3 s Block is released Group display 3 s User Message from 6 s 6 s Computer name 1011020 Operator Input 2 s Acknowledge faults Group display 2 s User name Message in picture 3 s 3 s Name of process picture 1011022 Operator Input 3 s Acknowledgment Group display 3 s User Message 4 s 5 s on 4 s Message class 6 s 5 s Message type 6 s Computer name 1011101 OS process PTM Error during startup Picture Tree Manager Internal error please restart control system runtime Restart WinCC if the messages problem persists 1011201 OS process SSM Error during startup Split Screen Manager Internal error please restart control system runtime Restart WinCC if the messages problem persists 1011202 OS process The project drive is more than Split Screen Manager 2 d Fill level in control system 2 d full percentage messages 1011203 OS process The project was created with Split Screen Manager control system
217. g HornResetMC with project wide updating in the Tag Management of WinCC 2 Configure the message and signal assignment of the horn on both of the WinCC clients WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 139 Horn 3 11 Application Examples for Acknowledgement Behavior 3 In each Signal assignment tab select the Multiple acknowledgment by the following acknowledgment tags check box 4 Click Edit The Acknowledgment tags dialog box opens 5 Click the Insert tag button Select the acknowledgment tag S1 HornResetMC in the tag selection dialog box Click OK 6 The tag is displayed in the box next to Edit and is displayed as a tooltip 7 Click OK to save your settings Runtime behavior See also 140 The horn runs on the WinCC clients Each WinCC client sets its own signal tags When a WinCC client acknowledges the signaling device this automatically resets tag S1 HornResetMC The other WinCC client detects this and resets its local HornReset tag This causes it signal tags to be reset and the signals to be deactivated Note When configuring a shared acknowledgment you must be aware that users with different authorizations can be logged on to the WinCC clients When a message comes in it is possible for say WinCC client 1 to see this message and trigger the horn WinCC client 2 is not authorized to see this message and trigger a signal However WinCC client
218. g amp Drop The Picture Tree Manager supports Drag amp Drop with the left as well as the right mouse button Drag amp Drop with the pop up menu This can be done in both the hierarchy window and selection window WinCC Options for Process Control 230 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager Procedure See also 6 4 4 Introduction 6 4 Working with the Picture Tree Manager 1 Click the container icon in the selection window 2 Drag and drop the container icon to the hierarchy window located above Release the mouse button as soon as the mouse pointer has transformed into the icon The container is inserted after the selected container or Drag and drop the container icon to the hierarchy window located above Release the mouse button as soon as the pointer has transformed into the icon Select the insert position for the new container from the shortcut menu Insert After Insert Before Insert Into Node Cancel Note When you insert new containers into an existing node the nested hierarchy of that node is expanded by one level If you insert a container before or after a container the affected hierarchy level is expanded by one container You cannot insert a new container before or after the root container Page Page Page Page How to add pictures by Drag amp Drop You can insert pictures into the hierarchy window by drag and drop The Picture Tree Manager su
219. g of a process tag 4 Specify the priorities for the messaging characteristics in Runtime 5 Assign basic and flashing pictures to the utilized bits of the status value or the combination of utilized bits from the status value and group value WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 29 Overview of process control system options 1 6 How to Configure the Extended Status Display Procedure 1 Open the Graphics Designer go to the Object Palette Smart Objects and select the object Status Display extended 2 Move the object into the working area using a drag and drop operation This opens the configuration dialog box for the extended status display Extended status display properties pe 2 x General Assign pictures Bit selection for forming the status value CLLR from statusword1 7 Bit No 0 from statusword2 Bit No 3 from statusword3 x Bit No 2 from statusword4 Y Bit No 3 r Evaluation of the group value Used bits Bit 24 AS Process Control Error Unused bits ra Bit 23 Maintenance Requirement Elei 22 Process Message Bit 30 Alarm Low Pm Bit 21 Operating Message ee Bit 29 Warning High gt gt Edi 19 Operating Message ci 28 Warming Low a 18 Status AS H Bit 27 Tolerance High Bit 17 Status 0S Bit 26 Tolerance Low L Bit 16 Measuring point Disabled EB Bit 25 45 Control System Fault
220. ge WinCC Options for Process Control 254 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Graphic Object Update Wizard 7 4 Dynamic Wizard of the Graphics Designer 7 4 Dynamic Wizard of the Graphics Designer 7 4 1 Dynamic Wizard of the Graphics Designer Functionality The Graphic Object Update Wizard provides the following Dynamic Wizards for the exchangeability of process symbols Dynamic Wizard Exporting Picture Objects This Wizard exports all user objects with type identification contained in the current WinCC picture or project into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet in CSV format The object type and connection information are exported among other things The Wizard can recognize the object type from the entry in the object property that you have configured as the identifier of the user object For the supplied TemplateControl the object property is type Dynamic Wizard Importing Picture Objects The Wizard imports user objects into WinCC pictures that you have previously exported with the Export Picture Objects Dynamic Wizard When importing the customized objects specified in the file Microsoft Excel spreadsheet will be recreated Here template objects that must be stored in the template picture are accessed Dynamic Wizard Updating Picture Objects The Wizard updates all of the user objects with type identifier in the current WinCC picture or in the project The Wizard can recognize the object type from the entry in the
221. ge After adding the language you need to save the picture tree or use the Compile OS function to have the texts of the picture tree entered for this language Note A number of WinCC applications store their texts in the text library Identical texts are only stored once When a text is changed such as by changing the name of the container the text also changes at the positions of the WinCC applications that use an identical text ffects on other applications Page WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager 6 6 Effects on other applications 6 6 5 Effects on the Alarm Logging Introduction In Alarm Logging individual messages are assigned to an area in the created hierarchy You assign them manually in Alarm Logging The prerequisite for the message assignment is the picture hierarchy placed in the Picture Tree Manager or created by the data transfer to the OS If an area name such as Container1 is assigned for a message the message is only displayed if you have an authorization for this area If no area name is specified for a message the message will always appear Assignment of the message to the area 1 In Alarm Logging select a message that you want to assign to a specific area 2 Open the Properties shortcut menu 3 In the Individual Message dialog box select the Texts tab Enter the area name manually in the Area input box See also ffects
222. ge Operator prompt Access to Current messages Acknowledged alarm list Acknowledged messages that have not yet exited Alarm Warning Tolerance AS process control message OS process control message Preventive maintenance Process message Current messages Outgoing alarm list Unacknowledged messages that have exited Alarm Warning Tolerance PLC process control message Preventive maintenance Process message Current messages Process alarm list Process control messages AS process control message OS process control message Preventive maintenance System message no acknowledgment required Process control message Message Archive Operation list Operator input messages Operator input message System message no acknowledgment required Operator input message Message Archive Journal list Messages besides operator input messages Alarm Warning Tolerance AS process control message OS process control message Preventive maintenance Process message Operating message Status message Message Archive WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 327 Process control runtime 9 9 Message system Message List List of hidden messages Contents Hidden messages that have not exited Message classes Alarm Warning Tolerance PLC process control Access to Current messages me
223. ge display tab of the Extended message line group select the User defined check box The Detail button is now enabled 2 Click Detail The Alarm window dialog box opens Alarm window WinCC Options for Process Control 68 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 6 Message Display Tab 3 Set up the values in the following input boxes either by entering the values straight into the input box or else by using the slider or the spin box Window height Position top Define a window position which is relative to the coordinate origin of the working area The window always has the same width as the working area The Horizontally displaced and Vertically displaced fields are disabled since there is only one window 4 The Graphic positioning field allows you to position the window with ease To do so click Detail Note The default setting for the extended message line is available in the configuration file the first time your open the OS Project Editor If this entry is missing the default setting is Half of the working area However this only applies if the layout supports an extended message line See also raphic positioning of a runtime window Page Message Display Tab Page 63 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 69 OS Project Editor 2 7 The Areas Tab 2 7 The Areas Tab 2 7 1 Areas Tab Overview
224. ggers e The content of the object property tagname of the faceplates Prerequisite Observe the following restrictions In the case of scripts the tag is defined in the declaration e g WINCC TAGNAME SECTION START define TagNameInAction Tagl ui WINCC TAGNAME SECTION END Tags which are stored directly in the code are ignored WinCC Options for Process Control 262 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Graphic Object Update Wizard 7 5 Structure of the configuration file The tag of the object in the template picture has a structure instance name that is specified for each object property for a tag interconnection of the object e g Correct define TagName Tagl ui The structure instance is Tag1 Incorrect define TagName ui The structure instance is missing The structure instance is not entered in the template picture of the picture object Procedure The structure instance with picture object in the template picture is determined on the basis of a user specific object property of a tag interconnection The tag information can not be replace if neither an object property of this kind nor a structure instance for this object property are available The structure instance must be the same for all object properties of the tag interconnection for otherwise it is selected at random Replacement of the structure instance works according to the following principle e A structur
225. ginalGroupDisplay for example 4 Change the name of the new object to GroupDisplay The PCS 7 factory setting of 3089 for the acknowledgment masks may not be suitable for individually configured group displays in your project and may need to be changed To learn more read the documentation section for group displays WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 65 OS Project Editor 2 6 Message Display Tab ontrolling acknowledgment response by means of a tag Page Since the group display objects can be interconnected independent from the picture hierarchy a warning appears when you select the Create update group displays check box The Create update group display function deletes all group displays from process pictures which are interconnected with a picture of another system area and whose Group Relevant property is set to Yes The group display object is not deleted if the Group Relevant property is set to No Group displays that are connected to a measurement point from another plant section are not deleted regardless of the Group Relevant property Note The Create update group display function cannot be reversed Group displays automatically inserted into process pictures must be corrected manually if they do not fit Before using the function you should check the property settings for the GroupDisplay object in the template picture CSIG_Template PDL Addi
226. gnal is deactivated See also Application Examples for Acknowledgement Behavior Page 137 3 11 3 Example 2 WinCC Clients with Multiple Acknowledgment in a Group Introduction The following example shows you the configuration of two WinCC clients in a group whose signaling devices are deactivated in a coordinated manner Starting in WinCC V6 2 this is the preferred configuration for multiple acknowledgment Requirement e The WinCC clients have one signaling device each the servers have none Requirement Because the WinCC clients are in a group one WinCC client acknowledges all signaling devices of the WinCC clients Procedure 1 Configure the message and signal assignment of the horn on both of the WinCC clients 2 Select the Multiple acknowledgment in the following group check box each time in the Signal assignment tab 3 Enter the same group name each time in the edit box e g Horn_Group1 This entry is case sensitive 4 Click OK to save your settings WinCC Options for Process Control 138 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 11 Application Examples for Acknowledgement Behavior Runtime behavior See also The horn runs on the WinCC clients When one WinCC client acknowledges the horn the local HornReset tag is reset and the signaling devices are deactivated Because the other WinCC client is in the same group Horn_Group1 this WinCC client recognizes the acknowledgment and
227. gs are isolated and implemented as relay contacts or optical couplers The 24 V DC supply voltage which is provided externally by the relay contacts or optical couplers of the signal module must be 1 A protected by the customer Page 141 Page 156 Page 154 Page 148 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 12 Signal module 3 12 3 ISA Bus Signal Module The signal module is an ISA bus card for PCs It is used for controlling up to three external signaling devices and possesses three binary inputs TTT ithe TTT Insert the signal module into the motherboard of the operator station PC Check whether an ISA slot is available Note the addressing of the module to avoid address conflicts with other PC expansion cards By default the I O address 180H is occupied by the signal module You will find related topics in the Addressing the ISA bus signal module section of this documentation WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 143 Horn 3 12 Signal module Example 8 Bit ISA Bus Interface Circuit Steckverbindung Sammelsignal akustischer optischer Signalgeber Sammelsignal Weitere Signal Baugruppen oder Quittierungstaster 3 Meldesystem Be Zz ZB AS Watchdog 1 a1 2 4 En pm Signalt inarausgang K3k3 akustischer Signal1 g _Y S gt optischer l 18 Signalgeber Alarm 20 ER Signal2 Bin
228. has authorization If no entry point picture is configured the picture component for which the measurement point was configured is displayed The default setting of the display mode is then Loop display in working area In this case the last two display mode options cannot be selected 9 12 3 How to Select a Picture via the Name Introduction 354 From a list of all graphic pictures that belong to the current project and are stored in the project folder pictures can be selected and displayed in the working area or in a process window During the selection a check will determine whether the area authorizations assigned in the User Administrator are present WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 12 Process Controlling Graphic Pictures Procedure Click Picture via name in runtime in button set 1 The Picture Selection by Name dialog box opens If you created a plant hierarchy in Picture Tree Manager and assigned pictures to the containers the table displays the the picture names and the associated picture hierarchy xl i Picture Selection by Name Fil Computer lt LOCAL gt LTO_2V70_LTOPTOS ler a fr 3Dbalken 1_10 ext e 3Dbalken 1_10 ext excluding jr 3Dbalken 1_10 int fr 3Dbalken 11_30 ext jr 3Dbalken 11_30 int fr 3Dbalken 31_100 ext fr 3Dbalken 31_100 int jr 3Dbalken ext fr 3Dbalken int jr Bausteinsymbole 1_5 ext ir
229. haves If the Group Relevant attribute is set to Yes in the object properties the status tag interconnected under Group value enters into the ORing UP of the group display hierarchy If the Group Value attribute is not interconnected then you must set Group Relevant to No The process alarm Group display tag EventState not found would otherwise not be triggered in Runtime Property Other Acknowledgment mask To ensure consistent runtime response we recommend that you configure the acknowledgment mask for the group display and the extended status display in exactly the same way For the extended status display the supplied PCS7 settings for acknowledgment sample of 17 or 3089 prior to WinCC V7 01 is possibly not suitable for your project and must be adjusted Property Other Outgoing state visible WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 33 34 Overview of process control system options 1 6 How to Configure the Extended Status Display See also You use the Outgoing state visible property to specify whether an outgoing state is visible or not Note If you change the status value formation or add or remove the group value for the display this changes the possible statuses available on the Assign pictures configuration page A notice warns you that all picture assignments configured so far will be lost If you wish to retain the picture assignments you must expor
230. he Picture Functions tab and import the objects 3 When doing so make the following settings Specify the name of the import file Specify the name of the import file here Export csv in the folder of the current project is suggested as the default name Specify the name of the template picture Here specify the name of the template picture containing the template objects TEMPLATE pdl in the directory GraCS of the current project is proposed If the import file contains objects that are not found in the template picture a warning message is displayed These unknown objects will not be imported If objects have been added to the import file by copying existing lines they will be regenerated The WinCC tag names of the import file will not be checked for their validity or presence in WinCC Tag Management Note The descriptions of the object property type only match if the supplied TemplateControl is used If you have named the description of the object property in the configuration file yourself this object property is used See also Structure of the configuration file Page Dynamic Wizard of the Graphics Designer Page 7 4 4 How to update WinCC pictures Requirements If you do not have to post process the export file use the Updating Picture Objects Wizard instead of exporting and then importing the picture objects Open the relevant picture in the Graphics Designer Create a back up copy of
231. he PCS 7 standard initially serves as template for the message system The template is available as MessageTemplate cfg configuration file in Installation directory Options SSM WinCC Options for Process Control 58 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 5 Message Configuration Tab If you do not want to use the PCS 7 standard you can use this configuration file as an example for creating customized configuration file Save the MessageTemplate cfg file under a different name to a folder other than the installation directory before you start the adaptation Activate the Update check box in the Message classes types group if using the PCS 7 standard or if you prefer to use a customized industry specific standard The Update option overwrites the a message class and message type configuration in Alarm Logging with the default PCS 7 settings or with the settings from your custom configuration file if their current configuration does not match The message classes 11 to 15 you configured them in Alarm Logging remain unchanged in the PCS 7 standard as these are not used in the PCS 7 standard If you only want to use the PCS 7 standard or your custom industry specific standard for the purpose of setting up a basic configuration for the message system in the first session of Project Editor the Update check box must be deactivated in all subsequent sessions of Project Editor You can use the Alarm Logging Editor
232. he computer Install the graphics card and start the computer Install the graphics card driver a BF OO N gt After installation of the driver set the required parameters for the screen settings in the Windows dialog e g 4 monitors in horizontal arrangement with 1920x1200 pixels at 60 Hz 6 Use display 1 as the primary monitor and use a numerical ascending order when arranging the monitors Note Your required pixel setting can usually be found in the Windows dialog for screen settings Then you will not have to make additional settings for multi VGA In this case do not start the Matrox Tool Matrox PowerDesk SE that was automatically installed during the driver installation Do not change any of the settings in the following dialogs e Multi Display Setup e Desktop Management e Desktop Divider e Hotkeys 2 13 6 How to set the parameters for the M9120 9140 under Windows 7 and Server 2008 Introduction To use the multi VGA option configure the graphics card Matrox M9120 M9140 for Windows 7 and Server 2008 using the Control Panel The two modules Dual and Quad were tested e n the 32 bit version with the driver 3 02 00 092 WDDM M WHQL e n the 64 bit version with the driver 4 00 04 088 WDDM M WHQL WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 111 OS Project Editor 2 13 Split Screen Manager The driver is available on the Web site of the manufactur
233. he dialog box Cancel Use this button to close the dialog box Your entries are not saved WinCC Options for Process Control 272 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Component List Editor 8 3 How to create a new measurement point Note If using the Component List Editor or AS OS engineering to create measurement points the consistency is not checked against the Tag Management of the data manager The project engineer is responsible for consistent configuration If a measuring point exists the calculation of the group display hierarchy updates the missing attributes for example area entry point picture and name of the block icon only if these have not been created or changed by the user WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 273 Component List Editor 8 4 How to find a measuring point 8 4 How to find a measuring point Procedure 1 Select the Edit gt Find measuring point command or click the toolbar button jag The following dialog box opens 7 Match whole word only Cancel Match case 2 Configure the search criteria Field Definition Action Find what Enter the search criterion in this input box Match whole word only If the Match whole word only check box is activated only whole words are included in the search for measuring points Match case If you enable the Match case check box the search only covers measuring points whose lower and
234. he log is created in the language used for the OS Project Editor Some of the log entries come from the operating system and are displayed in language selected for the system Project Documentation for the Current Configuration When you click Print Project Documentation you print the configuration data on the assigned printer Printing begins immediately after you click the button When you click Project Documentation View you open a preview of the pages to be printed Here you check the page view It displays the pages as they will look when printed When you click Printer Setup you configure the print job In the dialog box tab you select the printer and the layout specify the start parameters and determine the print scope Current configuration See also To use the same project editor configuration for several OS projects you can export and import the data of the project editor If you wish to export the configuration of the project editor the project editor must have run through the project beforehand Click Export The file selection dialog box opens Enter the path and file name in the dialog box The default path is that of the current WinCC project and the default file extension is exp Click Import if you want to import configuration file from the Project Editor Select this configuration file from the file selection dialog box The information contained in the imported file is displayed in the project
235. he value 1 you replace the tag interconnections according to the structure instance names The replacement also takes place for tags in the scripts however not for tags in Trigger The structure instance name must always appear at the tags This results in the following replacement options WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 263 Graphic Object Update Wizard 7 5 Structure of the configuration file ChangeTag ChangeLink Replacement Only the structure instance information in the tag interconnections is replaced The structure instance name does not have to appear at the tag All tags of dynamic object properties are interconnected with the new structure instance independent of which structure instance in the object in the template picture is entered at the tag interconnection The Wizard works as in the previous version The structure instance information in the tag interconnections and in the scripts is replaced however not in for Trigger The structure instance name must be defined at the tags and have the same structure instance The structure instance is replaced at all tag files The structure instance name must be defined at the tags and have the same structure instance The structure instance only has to appear once at the tag interconnections If the structure instance appears several times the structure instance must always be the same The configuration in the Wizard is not favor
236. hese tags to all configured Lifebeat objects according to the set cycle time e g every 10 seconds In error free operation the activated Lifebeat objects reply to Lifebeat Monitor Server2 every time From the tag status the Lifebeat Monitor detects error free operation of all the configured Lifebeat objects belonging to Lifebeat Monitoring Failure of Server1 An error occurs in Server1 for example due to a power failure After the Lifebeat Monitor Server2 has sent the status of the tags to Server1 a return message is missing due to the error in Server1 The Lifebeat Monitor Server2 detects this The appropriate message is sent to Client3 which is configured to Server2 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 197 Lifebeat Monitoring 5 7 Practical Example of Lifebeat Monitoring See also ow to configuring lifebeat monitoring with an OPC connection Page 191 Device List of Lifebeat Monitoring Page WinCC Options for Process Control 198 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Lifebeat Monitoring 5 8 Dialog box of the Lifebeat Monitoring 5 8 Dialog box of the Lifebeat Monitoring 5 8 1 Dialog box of the Lifebeat Monitoring Dialog box The picture below shows you the structure of the Lifebeat Monitoring dialog box A Lifebeat Monitoring aaa MCP 21x Er Liste des p riph riques e Nom d unit 0 Pe d unit liaison DD 3 y Femer As liaison DDD D
237. hierarchy completely when saving has been selected the group display hierarchy of all WinCC pictures will be recalculated completely every time the Picture Tree Manager is saved If no group displays are used you can disable this function to allow faster saving If WinCC detects that the group display hierarchy is no longer up to date while starting up the process control message The group display hierarchy is not updated is displayed You can update the data by saving the picture hierarchy with the check box Recalculate group display hierarchy completely when saving selected 6 3 1 29 Delta Save Functionality When the Delta Save check box is selected only the project changes are taken into account every time a save is conducted in the Picture Tree Manager This makes creation of Picture Tree Navigator pictures faster in that pictures are no longer newly created This affects pictures that have not changed because the associated part of the hierarchy has not changed With Delta Save you enhance the performance considerably 6 3 1 30 How to call Contents and Index Introduction The Contents and Index menu command is used to open the online help of Picture Tree Manager WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 225 Picture Tree Manager 6 3 Picture Tree Manager Structure How to access the online help e Select the Help gt Contents and Index menu command For further informa
238. hod The NTP method is not used You configure time synchronization with the Time Synchronization editor The time can be synchronized as follows e Via the local area network terminal bus for the operator station e Via the system bus Industrial Ethernet Bus for WinCC servers with a link to the automation systems If an AS is used as the time master the synchronization interval there should be set to one second We do not recommend this operating mode because the time will be lost with a memory reset on the AS User Rights in Windows The user logged on under Windows must have the user right Change the system time If the Time synchronization via terminal bus Slave function should be used the user accounts of the respective partner stations must be set up on all the computers on which the users log on to the partner stations The Master Slave Principle A computer or a specialized device such as Siclock acts as a master clock The master sends the time to all other devices the slaves Only a master can be active in the network and it generally has an external time signal receiver The slaves can use two different techniques to synchronize the time with the master e A master is active and sends the time message frames to the bus The slaves receive the time message frames and synchronize their time based on them Multiple devices can be configured as masters if they support the standby mode The masters in standby mode are s
239. horization required none Message system Incoming alarm list m iia Displays the message system with the associated button set The incoming alarm list is displayed immediately authorization required none Incoming alarm list quitable Displays the acknowledgeable incoming alarm list provided that separate acknowledgeable alarm lists are to be displayed authorization required none Acknowledged alarm list Displays the acknowledged alarms list authorization required none Acknowledged alarm list quitable Outgoing alarm list Displays the acknowledged alarm list provided that separate acknowledgeable message lists are to be displayed authorization required none Displays the outgoing alarm list authorization required none Outgoing alarm list quitable Displays the acknowledgeable outgoing alarm list provided that separate acknowledgeable message lists are to be displayed authorization required none 296 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 6 Overview of the button functions in runtime Functionality Meaning Process alarms Displays the process alarm list authorization required none Operation list Displays the operation list authorization required none Journal list Displays the journal list authorization required none Hidden list Displays the hidden list of al
240. ic logout after fo Minutes f absolute time C idle time Buena sn Sr Monitoring Process controling Higher process controlling Report system 5 Archive controling 100 Activateremote 1001 Configure remote 1004Web Access monitoring only Administrator Area2 Area3 d Ady vit See also eneral Information About the Chip Card Reader Page 362 Chip Card menu extension Page 369 WinCC Options for Process Control 368 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Chip card Reader 10 4 Chip Card in User Administrator 10 4 2 Chip Card menu extension 10 4 2 1 Chip Card menu extension Introduction The User Administrator provides functions for controlling a chip card read write device In the configuration system you use these functions to write to chip cards and to check them See also Page Page 370 Page 366 10 4 2 2 How to write to a chip card Introduction When you write to a chipcard all data on the card are deleted The user name and the password are stored on the card Write to Chip Card Ea Write to card for user Seas Write to Chip Card F Additional manual password entry required Procedure 1 Select the menu command Chipcard gt Write to chipcard 2 From the list select the user for whom the chipcard was created 3 If an additional password has to be entere
241. icture Tree Manager Structure Delete Container Properties The following commands are available in the View menu Standard Toolbar Options menu Status Bar Preview Arrange Picture Icons Alphabetically Arrange Picture Icons Automatically Large Symbols Small Symbols List Update The following commands are available in the Options menu Help menu Confirm for Replace Picture Confirm for Delete Hierarchy Recalculate the group display hierarchy completely while saving Delta Save The following commands are available in the Help menu Contents and Index Direct Help Using Help About Picture Tree Manager 6 3 1 2 How to save the hierarchy Introduction With the menu command Save you save the current hierarchy of the containers and pictures Changes to the hierarchy affect all applications that are in runtime as Picture Tree Manager clients Changes only affect the Group Display if the Completely Recalculate Group Display on Save option is activated WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 211 Picture Tree Manager 6 3 Picture Tree Manager Structure Procedure 1 Select the Project gt Save menu command or click the Save icon on the toolbar or press the lt Ctrl S gt keystroke 2 The data will be stored in the database of the project Note All changes made while editing the Picture Tree Manager will only be accepted after saving the Pictur
242. ide to operating and monitoring a process The operating manual provides information about the system structure and describes possible operations In addition to these functions WinCC allows the user to configure new user specific operations These operations are not described in this manual Due to the large number of options available during picture configuration the pictures or picture components used for your installation may be completely different The operations described here are examples using the existing base data Due to differences in screen resolution and or product developments or runtime changes any of the pictures of user interface elements shown in the manual menus windows dialog boxes may differ in content or scale etc from the pictures actually displayed on the screen These pictures are intended as examples only and claim neither to represent the original nor to be complete In its delivered state the Libraries product includes certain complex operating elements of conventional technology such as controllers motors valves or operating and display elements This package has been designed for use with SIMATIC S7 components The functions described in this user manual assume that you have used the optional Basic Process Control package to configure your plant The runtime system is used to monitor and guide automatic processes The well arranged graphical user interface with windows technology gives the user
243. ides Tolerance Low however not acknowledged always overrides acknowledged 3b For interconnection with nested pictures Tolerance High overrides Tolerance Low regardless of the acknowledgment state For more information refer to the section Influencing acknowledging response via EventQuit tag Caution In PCS7 Context Tolerance can require acknowledgement as an option in new projects as of PCS 7 1 AS Control System Fault AS process control error Maintenance request AS Control System Fault overrides AS process control error which in turn overrides Maintenance request however not acknowledged overrides acknowledged Operator prompt No multiple function assignment Measuring point locked No multiple function assignment Response similar to V6 0 if the Display disabled state property is activated 344 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 11 Group display Notes on the group display Note the following when using a group display e The group displays in the area overview are derived by means of a logical OR from the sum of all group displays that belong to the pictures associated with the area e Inthe PCS 7 Context the assignment of the module related error messages to the corresponding message types of the group display are stipulated and cannot be amended e Alarm Warning a
244. iemens WinCC Wi gt Note The picture information displayed always refers to the picture in the working area not to a picture displayed in the process window WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 309 Process control runtime 9 8 System operator input 9 8 4 How to exit runtime You exit runtime using the Exit runtime icon in button set 2 Overview Procedure 1 Switch to button set 2 if this button set has not yet been set re me 2 Click this button A message dialog box opens 3 Click Deactivate Runtime will be deactivated 9 8 5 Acknowledging Signaling Devices and Alarms With this button you acknowledge the signaling device e g a horn but not the triggering alarm WinCC Options for Process Control 310 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 8 System operator input With this button you acknowledge the alarms or messages displayed on the screen The signaling devices are automatically acknowledged If the message system is open all messages visible in the message window will be acknowledged If the message system is not open all alarms pending in the working area will be acknowledged e g in group displays and faceplates Messages associated with lower level pictures are not acknowledged 9 8 6 How to switch languages Overview In runtime you can change the language currently set up
245. ime 9 8 System operator input 9 8 15 How to delete a Screen Composition Procedure 1 Click this button a The Delete Screen Composition dialog box will open De ocn f If the user who is logged on has already saved screen compositions these screen compositions are displayed in the list Screen compositions of other users are not displayed 2 From the list select one of the displayed picture compositions 3 Click Delete All the pictures selected on all screens are deleted 9 8 16 How to display reporting jobs oi Overview An overview of all reporting jobs belonging to the project currently started is displayed Procedure 1 Click this button This displays the Reports window Aeeperts xj 2 Select a report job to print it or display a print preview 3 Exit the window with the standard acknowledgment procedure WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 319 Process control runtime 9 8 System operator input 9 8 17 How to call the User Administrator You manage and supervise user access rights in the User Administrator The main task ofthe User Administrator in runtime is to monitor system login and access rights Overview If you have not set up any user authorizations in your project because no users have yet been configured all operating options are available to all users at all times On the other hand if you have set up users for the proj
246. ime synchronization via the Industrial Ethernet bus and the terminal bus Depending on the configuration an OS acting as the active time master for example can ensure that the OS and AS on the system bus are synchronized to the current time WinCC clients are synchronized via the terminal bus The time master sets the current time with the aid of an optional time signal receiver If a time master fails a standby time master takes over the time synchronization function Time slaves receive the current time in order to set their internal clock Time Synchronization provides the following results WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 27 Overview of process control system options 7 5 Overview of the Editors of the Process Control System Options e Synchronization of all operator stations and automation systems on the system bus with the current time e Synchronization of the WinCC clients via the terminal bus e Simultaneous synchronization via the system bus and over the terminal bus by taking the Windows domain concept into account See also Overview of the Editors of the Process Control System Options Page 23 WinCC Options for Process Control 28 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Overview of process control system options 1 6 How to Configure the Extended Status Display 1 6 How to Configure the Extended Status Display Introduction Extended status display is available only
247. ing area No area Smart alarm hiding Sorting of the message pages T Button for hiding showing manually C Latest message at the top Time for hiding manually Latest message at the bottom jo Days jo Hours 30 Minutes Group display hierarchy Operator messages Create update group displays Add block comment for operator messages OK Cancel Apply WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 63 OS Project Editor 2 6 Message Display Tab Message filter You can specify how the messages are displayed in runtime in the Message filter group The filters refer only to the display for the user who is logged in Hidden messages are still processed by the message server You can display all messages unfiltered filter the messages according to area or display messages in separate lists Displaying an extended message line You can display an extended message line via the working area if the layout supports this setting You can change the size by selecting the Half of the working area and One quarter of the working area radio buttons The extended message line extends across the entire width of the screen If you wish to set the display format yourself activate the User defined check box and click Detail A dialog box will open You specify the desired settings here Authorization check of messages without a specifie
248. ing customized object The optional trend object property is available This object property is intended for trend group call ups or other texts specific to user objects The existing text is exported or imported into from the Trend column of the export file Template pictures Create update block symbols Create update block symbols function The Create update block symbols function uses the following template pictures e Template pictures from PCS 7Typicals e The ten template pictures maximum created by the project engineer These template pictures begin with PCS7Typicals The function opens all pictures and determines the priority ofthe pictures alphabetically based on their names Priority 1 PCS7Typicals of which the last picture in alphabetical order Priority 2 PCS7Typicals Priority 3 PCS 7Typicals The pictures of the highest priority are inserted WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 253 Graphic Object Update Wizard 7 3 Example Creation of Object Templates The Create update diagnostic pictures function uses the template pictures from MaintenanceTypicals correspondingly Note The descriptions of the object properties only match if the supplied Template Control is used If you have named the descriptions of the object properties in the configuration file yourself these object properties are used See also Page Page 265 Page Pa
249. ion can acknowledge messages in the areas In the other message list the user is able only to view messages in areas with the Authorization for area authorization The message line in the Overview window shows only the messages which can be acknowledged The option Acknowledgeable messages on separate page switch selectable enables a user to switch between the double window display and the message window which allows acknowledgment How to Display Message Lists Click this button in button set 1 io The entered state list and a new button set will be displayed If you want separate lists of messages that can be acknowledged to be displayed the appropriate buttons are displayed in the button set The user displays the individual lists with the following buttons WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 329 Process control runtime 9 9 Message system Key 5 E Message list Incoming alarm list Incoming alarm list acknowledgeable im Bi Acknowledged alarm list Acknowledged alarm list acknowledgeable ur 1 Outgoing alarm list amp Outgoing alarm list acknowledgeable ii f Process alarm list M Operation list bai AA Journal list 5i List of hidden messages List of messages to be hidden Previous graphics picture Exits the message system opens the last displayed process picture and shows b
250. ion of the lifebeat WinCC Options for Process Control 200 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Lifebeat Monitoring See also 5 8 2 Introduction 5 8 Dialog box of the Lifebeat Monitoring After the configuration the corresponding tag is entered for each device at the corresponding connection Note Completely fill in the device list consisting of device name device type and connection A notice will appear if the list is not complete If you create or change a connection in the tag management you must reassign the connection in the Lifebeat Monitoring editor No configuration in the Lifebeat Monitoring editor is possible on the WinCC client Instead an overview of all Lifebeat objects of the installed server project packages is displayed on the WinCC client If you can no longer open the lifebeat monitor check whether the temporary file Lbmcs tmp is available in the WinCC project folder If yes delete this file Start the lifebeat monitor Page Page Page Page Device List of Lifebeat Monitoring Lifebeat monitoring is configured by means of the device list Each device name is stored as a tag within the Tag Management of WinCC The tag name has the structure lt device name gt For the device name Server12 for example the tag Server12 is created The data type of the tags is of no significance to the lifebeat monitoring as only the status of the tags is queried Note For li
251. ion on X115 1 2 Event triggered activation of the signal generator relay 2 3 Event triggered release of the signal generator relay X116 2 3 Watchdog function normal WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 147 Horn 3 12 Signal module Slot Jumper Meaning 1 2 Watchdog function inverted X10 Inserted Addressing in IO area X10 Not inserted Addressing in the memory area x1 25 pin watchdog and signal generator interface X2 9 pin hardcopy interface S1 DIL switch for addressing the signal module in the I O or memory area of the PC The default jumper settings are marked with The connectors X117 1 2 3 are not used in WinCC See also ISA Bus Signal Module Page 143 3 12 5 Addressing the ISA Bus Signal Module Overview You can address the signal module in either the I O area or the memory area of the PC You set the base address for both addressing types using DIP switch S1 It occupies 16 Bytes in the 0000H 03FFH I O area and 1 KB in the COOOOH FFFFFH area From the kernel driver you use only the I O addressing Slot Jumper Description X10 Closed Not inserted Addressing in the memory area Addressing in the I O area Signal Module Address Lines 148 The signal module manages 12 address lines in the I O addressing mode the lowest four of which AO A3 are used for switching the 16 required individual addresses Therefore you
252. ions in runtime Possible values are Slave Standby master Active master and Deactivated Note The project engineer my not create any tags with prefix Such actions are reserved for handling in the WinCC PCS 7 software You are not allowed to manipulate these system tags The system tags are necessary for proper functioning of the product Settings for process control system messages The system outputs PCS messages in Runtime if problems occur during synchronization You can define how often to display the cyclic process control system messages 1012002 1012005 1012018 1012021 and 1012028 in runtime by corresponding settings in the Process control system messages field Activate the Send once check box to display a process control system message only once Deactivate the Send once check box to output the process control system message several times during runtime Enter the required value directly in the Send every minutes input box or use the rotary controller Creating project documentation 166 Click Print Project Documentation to immediately print the configuration data on the assigned printer Click Preview to open a preview of the pages to be printed You can view the pages as they will be printed and check them Click Setup you configure the print job The dialog box tabs provide the following options e Selecting the printer e Selecting the layout e Defining start parameters e Selecting
253. is 1 Value Axis Value axis 1 Name mo New Remove Up Down Data Connection Data Source Tag Name 2 Online tags x Yalue_1 al al Effects Trend Type Trend Color f Connect dots linearly Ka FA I Filled Line Style Line Weight fo Solid x 1 Dot Type Dot Width 2 Squares 3 Dot Color Fill Color am Al a Al V Expanded Limit Values Cancel Apply Click in the title bar to view additional information on configuration options in WinCC OnlineTrendControl WinCC Options for Process Control 340 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 10 Trend system See also Page Page Page WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 341 Process control runtime 9 11 Group display 9 11 9 11 1 Introduction Group display Group display Group displays are used to visualize process states message states in compressed graphical format There are 16 different message types The group display object is triggered by a tag which represents the message status You can use this tag to display the group display states in the other WinCC components Other types of dynamizing are not possible The response of the group display can be freely configured using the object properties This allows you to assign individual buttons to message types and configure texts colors flashing and acknowledgment display
254. is procedure on each server and client as the template pictures are always saved locally You can insert any of the objects provided in Graphics Designer into user defined template pictures and interconnect these Create Closes the New Trend Group dialog box and opens the Properties of WinCC Online dialog box Cancel Closes this dialog box without saving the changes WinCC Options for Process Control 338 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 10 Trend system See also onfiguring Online Trends Runtime Page 336 onfiguring Saving and Loading Trend Groups Page 335 9 10 5 Properties of WinCC Online Trend Control dialog box Introduction The Properties of WinCC OnlineTrendControl dialog box is used to assign either an archive tag or an online tag to each trend The system saves all settings made in the configuration dialog box persistently WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 339 Process control runtime 9 10 Trend system Procedure 1 Use the New button to define the desired number of trends 2 Define the data source for the selected trend under Data connection WinCC OnlineTrendControl Properties Bixi Toolbar Status Bar Online configuration Export Trends General Font Trend window Time axes Value axes Trends Object Name M Trend 1 Trend 2 Trend Window Trend window 1 Time Axis Time ax
255. ist of all activated messages including the activated and acknowledged messages of priority 16 e An additional message which is not assigned to a specific area is generated if diagnostics functions are used in the PCS 7 project and a priority 16 message is assigned to the Diagnostics area The message which is not assigned to an area is generated as soon as at least a highest priority message was activated This message is deactivated after the highest priority messages were cleared from the Diagnostics area The highest priority message is therefore visible to users who are not granted access to the Diagnostics area e Message classes with the configuration without status went out will be handled separately The messages disappear from the Highest priority messages list after acknowledgement e The settings for the message filter also apply to the Highest priority messages list Make sure that you apply message classes requiring acknowledgement to an acknowledgable message list e Hidden messages with priority 16 do not cause the button to flash and are not shown in the list Message acknowledgment button Acknowledges the currently displayed message E kK Visualization of redundancy monitoring in the area overview This function is only available in a PCS 7 OS The right section of the area overview on the clients displays the status of all redundant and non redundant servers which were loaded by means of packag
256. ith the mouse 2 Click OK This closes the window and enters the size and position Window Width Window Height Top and Left fields You cannot position the window outside the working area of the runtime user interface See also Runtime window tab Page WinCC Options for Process Control 84 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 9 Basic data tab 2 9 Basic data tab Introduction Basic data includes picture files actions and standard functions for the purpose of providing a suitable user interface in runtime The Basic Data tab shows which elements of the initialized basic data differ from the basic data that are local to the project The picture settings are dependent on the layout concerned The entries in the lists change in step with changes in the picture and script configurations In this tab you can specify which modified files of the project are to be overwritten by files in the delivered state However consistent runtime operation must be ensured You must overwrite the list entries highlighted in red You cannot deactivate the check boxes OS Project Editor 21x Be Layout amp Message configuration E Message display fan Area E Runtime window Basic data E General Base pictures in project deviate from delivered state Computer local actions in project deviate from delivered state accept delivery state accept delivery state Picture Name Pr
257. ization Time synchronization is deactivated by activating the Deactivate time synchronization check box The time message frames are no longer transferred and or the local time is not going to be set Time synchronization is only deactivated after you activated the check box and confirmed this setting by clicking OK A corresponding operating message is output in Runtime each time you activate deactivate time synchronization Synchronization settings Synchronization can be configured via the system bus Industrial Ethernet bus or LAN Activate the corresponding check boxes You can also use both options in parallel Synchronization via terminal bus Time synchronization via terminal bus LAN is available in WinCC Server projects and on WinCC Clients You have three optional configurations e The station time is received automatically from an interconnected WinCC Server This corresponding service packages must be loaded e The time is received from one of the network stations you entered in the Computer 1 and Computer 2 input boxes e The time is set by means of an external third party component Synchronization via system bus Time synchronization via system bus Industrial Ethernet is only available in WinCC Server projects The selection boxes are disabled if the station to be configured is a client You can use a BCE network card or up to two CP1613 or CP1623 for the time synchronization The Access point 1 and or
258. ject In addition you must have downloaded the package from the selected server to the WinCC client including In the filter function you can enter a filter criterion Only the pictures satisfying the filter criterion will then be displayed excluding You can use the negative filter to exclude pictures from the display The list displays only pictures that comply with the filter criterion and that do NOT comply with the negative filter criterion If you enter e g in the including field and b in the excluding field all pictures that do not begin with a b are displayed Load Loads the current filter Save Saves the current filter Representation The Display mode group provides two display modes for the picture to be displayed Display in the working area Display in the process window Preview If the Display check box is activated the picture to be displayed is shown in the preview window 9 12 4 Navigation through the picture hierarchy et van Selecting a Subsection Ifa selected section has further subsections you can select them via the buttons shown above Highlighted arrows indicate that additional subsections can be accessed Navigating through the Picture Hierarchy A section and its subsections exhibit the structure that you have selected You can navigate through this plant hierarchy The following picture uses the plant hierarchy shown to show how the user moves around in the plant hierarchy in runtime
259. ject is suggested as the default name Specify the name of the configuration file here TemplateControl cfg in the folder Wscripts of the current project is suggested as the default name Split the tag name into two parts This option makes sense particularly for PCS 7 users who work with the plant hierarchy PH of SIMATIC Manager In this case the tag name is separated by the separator into up to six individual names which provides more options to edit the export file See also Dynamic Wizard of the Graphics Designer Page Structure of the configuration file Page 7 4 3 How to import WinCC pictures Requirement To import a WinCC picture open the WinCC picture in the Graphics Designer into which the picture stored in the Microsoft Excel file is to be imported Create a back up copy of the pictures to be imported because you cannot undo this procedure WinCC Options for Process Control 256 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Graphic Object Update Wizard 7 4 Dynamic Wizard of the Graphics Designer Procedure 1 Before the import all objects that have an entry in the object property type and also are present in the template picture are deleted in the pictures to be imported column 1 of the Mircosoft Excel spreadsheet Therefore export the current version before you import a picture The name of your template picture has to start with the symbol 2 Open the Import Picture Objects Dynamic Wizard in t
260. ject window to be opened always appears on Monitor 1 the priority monitor e An object window to be opened is displayed over several monitors e An object window to be opened appears on the monitor on which the operation was performed using the mouse e An object window to be opened always appears in its most recent position The Runtime user interface is affected by these peculiarities as well Depending on the operating system and driver driver parameter assignment a given module can react differently You can download the latest driver version from the manufacturer from the Internet Note Online help for multi VGA The WinCC online help does not support multi VGA operation Optimizing performance To optimize the image painting time with several monitors set the WinCC Classic design in the WinCC project properties 2 13 4 How to set the parameters for the G450 under Windows XP and Server 2003 Introduction To use the multi VGA option configure the Matrox G450 MMS graphics card for Windows XP and Server 2003 using the Control Panel The two modules Dual and Quad were tested with the driver 5 96 005 The driver is available in Tools Drivers DISPLAY Matrox_G450_MMS on the WinCC DVD or in Additional_Products Drivers DISPLAY Matrox_G450_ MMS on the PCS 7 DVD WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 107 OS Project Editor 2 13 Split Screen Manager Procedure In the Window
261. larm High Came In Font color ON Alarm Bit 30 Alarm Low Came In Font color OFF Came In Acknowledged Font color ON Came In Acknowledged Font color OFF Went Out Unacknowledged Font color ON Went Out Unacknowledged Font color OFF Came In Font color ON Came In Font color OFF Came In Acknowledged Font color ON Came In Acknowledged Font color OFF Went Out Unacknowledged Font color ON Went Out Unacknowledged Font color OFF Background color Error Bit 24 AS process control error Came In Background color ON Came In Background Color Off Came In Acknowledged Background color ON Came In Acknowledged Background color OFF Went Out Unacknowledged Background color ON Went Out Unacknowledged Background color OFF Font color Bit 24 AS process control error Came In Font color ON Error Came In Font color OFF Came In Acknowledged Font color ON Came In Acknowledged Font color OFF Went Out Unacknowledged Font color ON Went Out Unacknowledged Font color OFF Background Color Fault Bit 25 AS Control System Fault Came In Background color ON Came In Background Color Off Came In Acknowledged Background color ON Came In Acknowledged Background color OFF Went Out Unacknowledged Background color ON Went Out Unacknowledged Background color OFF Font Color Fault Bit 25 AS Control System Fault Came In Font color ON Came In Font color OFF Came In Acknowledged
262. laves as long as the active master continues to send time message frames If a standby master does not detect any time message frames it assumes the function of the active master and starts to broadcast time message frames The devices that communicate over the system bus use the master broadcast technique e The slaves are active and periodically query the master for the time for synchronization Every slave must indicate what device is the master If a master fails the slaves cannot take over the functions of the master The slaves therefore require a list of masters that take over if the original master fails Computers on the local area network use this polling technique WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 161 Time Synchronization 4 1 General Information on Time Synchronization Time Synchronization in Runtime Time synchronization is entered in the computer startup list in the case of the following events and is activated when runtime starts e when running the OS Project Editor e after configuration in the Time Synchronization editor After running the OS Project Editor you must still configure the time synchronization Once runtime starts the time synchronization is activated after three minutes maximum Preventing jumps in the time of day Time jumps on the master are not sent to the system WinCC does the following to prevent this e If the synchronization is performed via th
263. lay Renaming Replace Picture information 263 Replace pictures Confirm Reporting job Display Reports Restrictions when using a Web client Rights Root container Root node 236 Route Control Center Runtime Button functions Exiting Operate chipcard 371 Runtime response of the horn 116 Runtime Window S Save Hierarchy Recalculating the group display Trend groups Screen composition Call Delete Memorize Screen Dump Select Message Picture select Picture by name Picture via measurement point 277 Plant area Select picture via measurement point Selection button Selection window Server Configuration Server assignment Modify 73 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Server buttons 54 70 Server Server Communication 20 Setting Interface Setting up the hierarchy Project documentation Settings Time reception service Setup Output of the hierarchy to a printer Print Group Display Setup Group Display Project documentation SFC Visualization Shared OS data 20 Show Status bar Toolbar Signal Simultaneous use System bus and Local Area Network Smart Alarm Hiding 63 Smart card Hardware Softnet Sorting Message pages 63 Split message pages Standby master 161 Start Picture Tree Manager Start screen State Of a Static picture elements Status bar Hide Show Status display Extended Status text Sublevel
264. lays lifebeat monitoring authorization required none WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 ASE32315704 AA 293 Process control runtime 9 6 Overview of the button functions in runtime Functionality Recall Screen Composition Meaning Displays the saved screen composition again authorization required authorization for area Delete the screen composition Deletes the saved screen composition authorization required authorization for area Reports Picture information Displays an overview of all report jobs authorization required authorization for area Displays information on the currently displayed picture authorization required none Activate BATCH Starts BATCH authorization required none User authorization Select User Administrator authorization required User Administration SFC Visualization Visualization and setup change of SFC charts authorization required none Route Control Center Starts Route Control Center authorization required none Acknowledge Signal Generators Acknowledges signaling devices authorization required none Lock messages The lock applies to all blocks of the picture in the working area and to all child pictures of a parent picture authorization required process control elements Free alarms Group acknowledgement The release applies to all blocks of the
265. lect the area picture e Black lettering on cyan colored background The picture displayed in the working area is located in the plant area of the hierarchy tree within the area picture that is represented by the button WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 315 Process control runtime 9 8 System operator input Procedure 1 Click the relevant button to display the plant area Example When you click Container4 the process picture associated with the process picture is displayed Ea Container Container j Container3 Container a ee D a Containerd D Container moer 1 moo OPH ta e e ie Ie Mir WinCC Options for Process Control 316 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 8 13 Overview Procedure 9 8 System operator input How to save a screen composition x The runtime of the Split Screen Manager manages the user defined screen composition In the button bar the buttons for saving recalling and deleting ascreen composition are provided e The buttons are only activated if a user is logged on e Nhen saving the screen compositions are assigned to the currently logged on user e Each user can save any number of screen compositions The user defined plant view can be recalled while in runtime or after a restart of runtime Note Every logged on user can save a screen composition under the name Default This screen composition is op
266. ledgment Process control operator messages No acknowledgment no flashing without cleared state Configured by default for new projects as of WinCC V7 01 The option for acknowledgment response for the Tolerance message class is enabled in the OS project editor Messages are displayed in message windows in runtime You can restrict the content of the message window with freely definable filters You can move around inside the table in the message window using preconfigured icons With a PCS7 OS you can call an entry point picture that shows the message cause for each message Loop in Alarm You can configure the entry point picture in the component list editor The message archive enables you to archive messages on a suitable mass storage device 9 9 3 Message Window F Overview such as a hard disk 326 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime Select messages 9 9 Message system You can display and edit lists with messages in runtime The messages displayed in the lists refer exclusively to the current project Message selection The following message lists are offered for a better overview Message List Incoming alarm list Contents Messages that have not yet been acknowledged Message classes Alarm Warning Tolerance PLC process control messages OS process control system messages Preventive maintenance Process messa
267. llows 1 Connect the smart card reader to a free USB port ofthe computer Depending on the operating system a universal driver for smart card readers is automatically installed by Microsoft Ignore this installation Save the necessary files on your PC by downloading them from http omnikey aaitg com index php id 69 amp L 1 CardMan3x21_V1_1_2 4 exe CardMan 3x21 PC SC CT API_V4_0_2_2 exe CT API for Windows Double click on the saved CardMan3x21_V1_1_2_4 exe Follow the setup and extract the driver software to the C Omnikey directory Double click on the saved CT API_V4_0_2_2 exe Follow the setup and extract the CT API to the C Omnikey directory If a Microsoft driver is already installed you have to update this driver with the Omnikey driver Open the device manager Update the corresponding driver by right clicking on the CardMan 3x21 or USB Smart Card reader icon Follow the on screen instructions Go to C Omnikey CardMan3x21 PCSC driver V1 1 2 4 for the source of the driver installation If no Microsoft driver is installed start the Windows Hardware Wizard Go to C Omnikey CardMan3x21 PCSC driver V1 1 2 4 for the source of the driver installation Open the C Omnikey CT API_V4_0_2 2 directory to install the API with Windows Explorer To begin double click on SETUP EXE Follow the setup and install the API to the suggested directory Restart the computer Open the WinC
268. llows it to set the local time If the active master e g as a result of failure becomes a passive master the time reception service deactivates itself internally The checkmark in the check box remains set so if the computer becomes an active master again the time reception service is automatically activated Effects on a computer in standby master mode If the computer is operating in standby master mode the time synchronization deactivates the time reception service It continues to check that the external synchronization functions correctly If the incoming time message frames are sent by a master without external synchronization the standby master takes on the role of the active master It then sends its own time message frames See also eneral Information on the Time Reception Service Page 184 WinCC Options for Process Control 186 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Lifebeat Monitoring 5 5 1 Lifebeat Monitoring Content The Lifebeat Monitoring editor serves to monitor all servers clients and automation devices that can be reached across PC and industrial networks Note The simultaneous utilization of Lifebeat Monitoring and Asset Management is not supported This documentation shows you the following e how Lifebeat Monitoring works e how to configure Lifebeat Monitoring e how to configure Lifebeat Monitoring with OPC connection WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E3231570
269. lt default gt OS_PCS_Tag message If the user is allowed to view messages the lt default gt setting checks whether a signal is triggered Assignment of signaling devices to the signal tags If a signal module is installed configure the following assignment between signal tags and the signal module Signal module Alarm_Tag Output 1 Warning_Tag Output 2 PLC PCs_Tag Output 3 OS_PCS_Tag Output 3 If the signals are to be output through a sound card configure the following assignment between signal tags and the audio file Tag Signal module Sound Alarm_Tag Horn_Danger wav Warning_Tag Horn_Attention wav PLC PCs_Tag Horn_Note wav OS_PCS_Tag Horn_Note wav Signal triggering behavior If a message comes in that already exists and has not yet been acknowledged with the status Came In or Went Out the signal is not triggered again WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 133 Horn 3 8 Minimum Horn Configuration Behavior of the signals on acknowledgment You only acknowledge the signals locally You do not configure any additional reset tags for synchronizing behavior with connected computers following acknowledgment See also Page Page Page WinCC Options for Process Control 134 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 9 General Information about the sound card 3 9 General Information about the sound card Fun
270. m the hierarchy Note All pictures are moved to the selection window All information of the deleted and underlying containers are lost in this process WinCC Options for Process Control 244 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager 6 5 General information on the hierarchy See also Page Page Page Page Page 232 Page 208 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 245 Picture Tree Manager 6 6 Effects on other applications 6 6 Effects on other applications 6 6 1 Effects on other applications Effects on other applications The hierarchy created in the Picture Tree Manager has an effect on the following applications See also User Administrator Group display Text Library Alarm Logging OS Project Editor Page 234 Page Page Page Page Page 6 6 2 Effects on the User Administrator Introduction If changes are made to the hierarchy in the Picture Tree Manager you must open the User Administrator after saving the changes Only then will the assignments of the authorizations for the hierarchy be updated New parts of the hierarchy The User Administrator does not have the required information on the user authorizations for newly created containers After you save the hierarchy these new system sections are available in the User Administrator WinCC Options for Process Control 246 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree
271. manually you have to use the OS Project Editor to do so When creating an OS via the PCS 7 Engineering Station the OS Project Editor is automatically started when the AS OS connection data is transferred If you want a configuration that deviates from the default setting you must manually assign the parameters in the OS Project Editor 1 2 6 Web Client General You can use the Web client for basic process control and PCS 7 via the WinCC WebNavigator like a WinCC client The following application possibilities are offered in the WebNavigator for process control options e Area specific access rights with authorization levels e User specific assignment of a starting picture and language e Look amp Feel of the WinCC user interface with group display and extended status display e All message views including loop in alarm e Supports operator input messages e Simultaneous access to several servers e Uses standard faceplates and custom faceplates created by the project engineer with the Faceplate Designer The WinCC WebNavigator must be installed in order to use the Web client and documentation for the WebNavigator Note The buttons for navigating the picture hierarchy are always active even if you cannot jump to the next picture in the hierarchy WinCC Options for Process Control 18 System Manual 02 2013 ASJE32315704 AA Overview of process control system options 1 2 Configuring in the PCS 7 environment Restrictions when usi
272. mbole ext d BSym d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym Controller Istwert Simulation d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym Controller Istwert Simulation d Bausteinsymbole ext d BSym Controller Istwert Simulation w 2 Make the required settings here Process picture in working area Process picture as window Cancel WinCC Options for Process Control 278 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Component List Editor 8 6 How to Select a Picture via the Measurement Point Field Definition Action Computer This drop down list box is only active if the dialog box is opened from within a WinCC client project In addition you must have downloaded the package from the selected server to the WinCC client Measuring point Select the measuring points to be displayed from this drop down list box lt All gt is displayed by default including In the filter function you can enter a filter criterion Then only the measurement points that comply with the filter criterion are displayed excluding You can use the negative filter to exclude measurement points from the display The list displays only measurement points that comply with the filter criterion and that do NOT comply with the negative filter criterion If you enter e g in the including field and b in the excluding field all measurement points that do not begin with a b are displayed Load Loads the current filter Save Sa
273. me Message cleaned up 1012292 Operator Input 2 s Single export Maintenance 2 s User name Message 3 s 4 s 1012293 Operator Input 2 s Complete export of Maintenance 2 s User name Message ident data 1012294 Operator Input 2 s Save filtered Maintenance 2 s User name Message complete export 3 s in 3 s 4 s 4 s 1012295 OS process Single export 3 s Maintenance 3 s control system 4 s Fault 5 s 4 s messages 5 s 1012296 OS process Complete export ident data Maintenance 5 s control system Fault 5 s messages 1012297 OS process Save filtered complete export Maintenance 3 s control system 3 s in 4 s Fault 4 s messages 5 s 5 s 1012298 PLC process OS 8 s is not activated Maintenance 8 s control system messages 1012299 PLC process Redundancy loss channel Maintenance 2 s Channel A or B control system 2 s messages 1012301 OS process No Access to the SQL Server Common archiving control system Data Loss Possible messages 1012349 PLC process RedundancyControl Redundancy 2 s MAC address control system Connection of network card messages with MAC address lost 2 s 1012351 OS process RedundancyControl System Redundancy control system blockade determined Switch messages to status fault WinCC Options for Process Control 100 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 12 Overview of the Process Control
274. n of the sensor via the break contact Acknowledgment of the Sensor Watchdog Binary Inputs See also 146 The following acknowledgments are possible e You acknowledge by clicking when the sensor is controlled only from an operator terminal Bridge X114 1 3 and 2 4 closed delivery condition e You acknowledge by clicking or externally with the confirmation button when several operator terminals are connected as shown in the figure above Bridge X114 1 2 and 3 4 closed The acknowledgment signal is in this case looped through several signal modules If you remove the jumper X114 5 6 the sensor function can be disabled see the previous figure With the watchdog function you monitor the correct operating state of the OS After switching on the OS power supply a monoflop is set cyclically on the signal module This monoflop is retriggered just in time so as not to drop out If the process control of the operator terminal malfunctions the monoflop on the signal module ceases 3 5 seconds after the last trigger impulse Depending on how jumper X116 is set you can invert the watchdog function Jumper X116 2 3 is inserted in delivery state standard watchdog function When you connect an external sensor e g a horn you can switch a miniature relay with the contact This miniature relay switches the sensor With inductive loads you must provide an arc suppression diode The signal module has three binary inputs fo
275. n the PCS 7 manual SFC Visualization Route Control Center selection m You can use this dialog box to start Route Control Center The buttons of the respective components are activated only if they were installed correctly You can find related information in the PCS 7 manual Route Control Center WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 8 System operator input 9 8 11 Displaying the System Configuration Picture Lifebeat Monitoring Overview Lifebeat monitoring is responsible for continuously monitoring the individual systems OS and AS and generating the process control message The horn is triggered if you have configured the horn in the process control message and installed a signal module or sound card The monitoring of the configured components is automatically initiated following a restart and is repeated cyclically If a component fails to answer after repeated attempts a message is generated Structure of a system picture In runtime all monitored components are displayed graphically Components that are currently not functional for instance due to a fault are shown struck through in the graphic The following figure shows an example of a process representation LBM_Verb lt Device name OSs1 OS2 Connected lt Status Connected Disrupted Device type 4 Je WinCC f n OS Plant bus
276. n the exported Microsoft Excel spreadsheet e g for another unit 3 You re import the dynamic WinCC pictures Alongside the interconnection information of the process pictures you can also update the instances of scripts and triggers when importing and updating the objects The expanded functionality can be executed by means of a configuration file Note When the import export wizard is used its is assumed that the process pictures for valves motors controls etc are available in WinCC in the form of user objects The selection of faceplates for process control remains user specific You use either standard OCX e g from the technological library of PCS 7 or specific user objects WinCC operating pictures In order to be able to use the functionality of the wizard the OS Project Editor must run first This enables you to copy the dynamic wizard scripts and the configuration files into the project Dynamic Wizard of the Graphics Designer Page 255 Structure of the configuration file Page 259 ile Format of the Export Import File Page 265 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Graphic Object Update Wizard 7 3 Example Creation of Object Templates 7 3 Example Creation of Object Templates Introduction You need object templates for central storage of user objects in which you save the user objects created Example There is a common template for all valves in the mimi
277. n the overview window When PCS 7 is used the OS Project Editor is run automatically when the PCS 7 OS is created The OS Project Editor therefore only has to called from the user interface if you want a configuration that deviates from the default setting How to open the OS Project Editor Structure See also 26 Double click the OS Project Editor in WinCC Explorer This starts the editor The default settings are shown the first time the OS Project Editor is started the most recent settings are shown the next time it is started A suitable layout for the runtime user interface is selected on the basis of the screen resolution and project type e Inthe Layout tab you configure the appearance of the runtime user interface e Inthe Message Configuration tab you configure settings for the alarm system The basic settings correspond to the PCS 7 specifications for message configuration e Inthe Message Display tab you can configure the runtime response of the message system and the display format of the messages in the message pages or group displays e Inthe Areas tab you configure the arrangement of the plant sections in the area overview e Inthe Runtime Window tab you configure the number and arrangement of the pre configured picture windows e The Basic Data tab contains settings for copying the basic data Here you specify which modified picture files and actions you want to overwrite e The General tab
278. n this tab you enter information about the page range and time range of the print data Printer Selection In this tab you specify the output device for the print job The print job can also be directed to a file The appropriate system layout from the Report Designer is used for the printout See also Menu bar Page 210 6 3 1 5 How to print the project documentation group display Introduction Select the Project gt Print Project Documentation Group Display menu command to print the group displays on the selected printer The printer settings you configured using the Project gt Set Up Project Documentation Hierarchy menu command are active Procedure 1 Select the Project gt Print Project Documentation Group Display menu command Note The command starts the printout immediately You can open a preview of the project documentation for the hierarchy by selecting the Project gt View Project Documentation Group Display command See also Page ow to set up the project documentation group display Page 214 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 213 Picture Tree Manager 6 3 Picture Tree Manager Structure 6 3 1 6 How to set up the project documentation group display Introduction Select the Project gt Set Up Project Documentation Group Display to define specific criteria for printing the group displays You specify these settings on thr
279. nal assignment 7 m Hom acknowledgment Only local Multiple acknowledgment by the following acknowledgment tags ee Limit number of simultaneously playing Edit 2 sounds Multiple acknowledgment in the following group 2 Sounds group Play sounds All sounds simultaneously Signal module Alarmar Horn_Danger waw Warnar Sys ar Insert new line Tolar Delete lines Play sound Absolute path Project documentation w Cancel Apply 2 You can transfer the tags that you created in the Message assignment tab In the context menu of the Tag column select the menu command Transfer tag from message assignment If you want to create a new tag double click a line in the Tag column Click the button and select the desired tag from the Tag Management 3 If you want to assign the output of a signal module to the tag double click the Signal Module column The signal devices Output 1 Output 2 and Output 3 of an installed signal module are available WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 127 Horn 3 5 How to assign a signal transducer to a signal tag Playing sounds See also 128 4 If you want to assign a sound file to the tag double click the Sound column Select the desired sound file in WAV format from the file selection If the files are located in the project directory lt Project directory gt H
280. nality of the Component List 8 2 Introduction Functionality of the Component List The component list offers a storage system for the following important runtime properties of the measurement point in the PCS 7 OS and allows them to be edited e Measurement point name e Measurement point type e Area location e Entry point picture e Name ofthe block icon in the entry point picture Generating the component list The component list derives the project specific data from the PCS 7 ES configuration in the course of the AS OS engineering Compile OS For measurement points entered by the user in the Component List Editor the entry point picture and the name of the block icon are generated if they do not already exist from the calculation of the group display hierarchy of the Picture Tree Manager for the area If the owner is neither the user nor AS OS engineering the project specific data is updated If a picture configuration exists already the entry point picture is determined for the LoopInAlarm function If a block instance is in several pictures the system selects one of the pictures as the entry point picture However if you wish to designate a specific picture as the entry point picture you must change the entry point picture for the measurement point in the Component List Editor The entries in the component list receive an owner which serves to establish the origin of the data The owners have the following properti
281. nd process control message require acknowledgment The messages based on these displays in the PCS 7 context also trigger a configured signal generator With new projects as of WinCC V7 01 you can configure messages of the Tolerance message Class to require acknowledgement by default The option is enabled in the OS project editor Note It takes around 50 seconds from the time Runtime is activated until the group display is updated in the area overview Note With WinCC V6 0 SP3 PCS7 V6 1 the S for OS Process Control Message is replaced by M or MR for Maintenance request For projects migrated to WinCC V6 0 SP3 PCS7 V6 1 group displays in process pictures continue to show S for OS process control message The new M for Maintenance request is displayed in the area overview and in the Picture Tree Navigator The new group displays inserted in process pictures based on WinCC V6 0 SP3 PCS7 V6 1 have the same default setting as before the migration See also ow to display the alarm source via the group display Page 345 Influencing the Acknowledgement Behavior via the EventQuit Tag Page 848 9 11 2 How to display the alarm source via the group display Alarm Source Alarm events are displayed in a field of the group display The operator can view the picture in which the alarm has occurred Procedure How to call the picture with the alarm source WinCC Options for Process Control System
282. ned to the physical names of the access points during startup in Runtime If two access points such as two CP1613 boards are configured on the same computer the combination of functionality returns the following behavior Access point 1 Slave Access point 2 Slave Behavior The computer always operates in slave mode This combination is used if a redundant bus is available The system bus whose master receives the time from an external time signal receiver is used to synchronize the local time of the station Master Master The station operates as cooperative master at both access points and bus systems Either the masters transfer the time message frames to both bus systems or operate in standby mode as slave on both bus systems Note that after changing the active master to standby mode on one device the partner device automatically changes to standby mode The transmitted time message frames contain information from the master pertaining to the quality of external synchronization If an access point changes to a different state the functionality of the active master is forced at the standby master if its external synchronization is operating properly This ensures that the master with the best external synchronization transmits the time message frames on the bus Master Slave This setup results in a bridge function The station synchronizes itself with the time message frames received on bus 2 access point 2
283. ng Lifebeat Monitoring See also ow to Design the System Configuration Picture Page 194 WinCC Options for Process Control 196 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Lifebeat Monitoring 5 7 Practical Example of Lifebeat Monitoring 5 7 Practical Example of Lifebeat Monitoring Introduction In the figure below you can see a WinCC operator control and monitoring system in which Lifebeat Monitoring is performed Client 1 Project A Client 2 Project A Client 3 Project B Client 4 Project C Server 3 Project C Lifebeat object Lifebeat object Server 2 Project B Lifebeat monitor LAN Server 1 Project A Lifebeat object Ethernet AG 1 AG 2 AG 3 AG 4 AG 5 Project A Project A Project B Project C Project C Lifebeat Lifebeat Lifebeat Lifebeat object object object object Monitoring of Several Projects The Lifebeat Monitor is Server2 configured for project B The monitor monitors Client3 and AS3 which belong to the same project B as well as Server1 Client2 and AS2 which belong to project A The monitor also monitors AG4 and AG5 by means of the existing PROFIBUS connection Server3 and Client4 cannot be monitored as there is no PC network connection to them Error Free Monitoring Operation The Lifebeat objects are monitored via the internal tags created by the Lifebeat Monitoring Editor The Lifebeat Monitor Server2 sends the status of the t
284. ng a Web client When using a web client in connection with Basic Process Control pay attention to the following restrictions Configuring the OS Project You may only use SIMATIC Standard Layouts and SIMATIC Server Views on the WebNavigator Server OS project editor No Multi VGA Web Client No Picture selection by name No Save Load Delete screen composition No Audio Alarm No clock synchronization No lifebeat monitoring No Multi VGA The module symbol is not highlighted in Loop in Alarm from the message window Summary area not grayed out during connection problems Navigation keys are not grayed out if operation is rendered impossible Graphic pictures not directly selectable No report view or printout No picture information No group acknowledgment of picture in work area No language switch in Runtime No login input using the password key User authorization cannot be selected Not all ODK functions are supported The Process Screens function in DataMonitor is not supported Additional information may be found in the documentation and Release Notes for WinCC WebNavigator WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 19 Overview of process control system options 7 3 Server Server Communication 1 3 Server Server Communication Introduction Server server communication offers the option in WinCC multi user projects to access the data and functions of oth
285. ng a block comment for operating messages See also If you check this box the relevant block comment will be added to the operator message during operator process control by means of a block from the PCS 7 library The block comment will not be added if e Operator messages that are generated as a result of messages being disabled enabled This applies to all blocks associated with the picture in the working area and its lower level pictures e Operator messages that are generated as a result of acknowledgment in process pictures or message lists Page xtended message line Page 67 2 6 2 Message filters Introduction 66 In the Message filter group of the Message Display tab you can specify which messages should be displayed in runtime You have the following setup options WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 6 Message Display Tab e No filter Disables area specific filtering of messages All messages are displayed and can be acknowledged regardless of the area to which they are assigned e Messages with area enable All messages from an area for which a user is granted the Authorization for area access right are displayed and can be acknowledged e Acknowledgeable messages in separate list The message windows output two message lists One list shows all messages from the area for which the user has the access right for Process controlling Th
286. ng in the Areas tab of OS Project Editor pertaining to the picture selection in areas with missing authorization Acknowledge message Acknowledges the message displayed in the message line authorization required none Layout of the plant overview Displays the Picture Tree Navigator authorization required none Extended Message Line Displays the list of entered messages required authorization none Loop in Alarm Selects the picture showing the alarm source authorization required none Highest priority messages Display of the list of highest priority messages This button flashes if a priority 16 message was activated authorization required none The function is only available at one PCS 7 OS Login user01 Selects the logon dialog box authorization required none Redundancy monitoring If packages are loaded on the client a green or red button representing the status of the connected servers will appear in the area overview If you click this button then a window will open listing all connected servers in the working area The function is only available at one PCS 7 client Screen Dump Prints the screen content to the default printer authorization required none For screen formats 16 9 and 16 10 use printers with adjustable margin shift or print position Pictures Picture by name Selects a picture by means of the picture name authorization r
287. nge the user object interconnection With this Wizard you change the dynamic connection on a user object In doing so you replace the instance name in the tag in front of the period Dynamics with internal tags are not affected by this 1 Open the picture in the Graphics Designer and select the user object 2 Open the Dynamic Wizard Replace User Object Connection in the Picture Functions tab to edit the object 3 Specify the new instance name or select one If you do not specify a name here the instance name is deleted from the tag connections Dynamic Wizard of the Graphics Designer Page 255 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Graphic Object Update Wizard 7 5 7 5 1 Introduction 7 5 Structure of the configuration file Structure of the configuration file Structure of the configuration file Under normal circumstances there will be no need for the user to modify the configuration files supplied with the system With a configuration file you can replace all instance specific picture and script information centrally In this file you configure up to 100 properties for the objects that are newly copied to the template picture You specify the entries locally for each project When the OS Project Editor runs the following configuration files are copied to the lt Project Directory gt WScripts directory of the open project e ConfigTypicals cfg for updating the li
288. node contents of the clipboard is inserted in a new hierarchy level below the selected container WinCC Options for Process Control 220 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager 6 3 Picture Tree Manager Structure See also Menu bar Page 210 6 3 1 19 How to insert a new container Introduction Select the Edit gt New Container menu command to insert a new container before after or into the selected node After inserting the new container the Picture Tree Manager will assign the name Container with a consecutive number e g Container23 Procedure 1 Select the container which is to be the reference for the insertion 2 Select the Edit gt New Container menu command and click the position before after or in the node at which the new container is to be inserted or select the New Container command from the shortcut menu and select the position before after or in the node at which the new container is to be inserted 3 The container will be inserted and the editing mode is started See also Page 6 3 1 20 How to delete a picture Introduction Select the Edit gt Delete Picture menu command to remove the selected picture from the hierarchy The picture will automatically be moved into the selection window This command is only enabled if a picture has been selected in the hierarchy window Procedure 1 Mark the picture in the hierarchy which you would like to delete 2
289. ntered with the editor You cannot change data derived from the PCS 7 ES recognized by the label System ES in the Owner column in the Component List Editor Open the Component List Editor by double clicking it in the WinCC Explorer WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 267 Component List Editor 8 1 General Information About the Component List Editor Component List Editor 0S mcp oj x File Edit View Extras Help Bees r Measuringpoint Type area Entry point picture Object name Owner CFC_Funktion_1 PID_13 CTRL_PID Anlage_1 Bild_Funktion_1 pdl CFC_Funktion_1 PID_13 System ES CFC_Funktion_1 PID_14 CTRL_PID Anlage_1 Bild_Funktion_1 pdl CFC_Funktion_1 PID_14 System ES CFC_Funktion_1 PID_15 CTRL_PID Anlage_1 Bild_Funktion_1 pdl CFC_Funktion_1 PID_15 System ES CFC_Funktion_2 PID_22 CTRL_PID Anlage_2 Bild_Funktion_2 pdl CFC_Funktion_2 PID_22 System ES CFC_Funktion_2 PID_23 CTRL_PID Anlage_2 Bild_Funktion_2 pdl CFC_Funktion_2 PID_23 System ES CFC_Funktion_2 PID_24 CTRL_PID Anlage_2 Bild_Funktion_2 pdl CFC_Funktion_2 PID_24 System ES CFC_Funktion_2 PID_25 CTRL_PID Anlage_2 Bild_Funktion_2 pdl CFC_Funktion_2 PID_25 System ES CFC_Teilanlage_1 MEASMON_12 MEAS_MON Anlage_1 Bild_Teilanlage_1 pdl CFC_Teilanlage_1 MEASMON_12 System ES CFC_Teilanlage_1 MEASMON_13 MEAS_MON Anlage_1 Bild_Teilanlage_1 pdl CFC_Teilanlage_1 MEASMON_13 System ES CFC_Teilanlage_1 MEASMON_14 MEAS_MON Anlage_1 Bild_Teilanl
290. ntime Window tab In runtime these picture windows contain pictures and faceplates that overlay the working area OS Project Editor WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 77 OS Project Editor 2 8 The Runtime window tab Picture window display modes e Loop Display Process Window The picture window in the loop display and in the process window is not zoomed in or out to fit the size of the open picture The window has scroll bars and the size of the window can be changed You can choose whether you want to position the picture window in a grid or according to the group display For grid mode specify the Number of windows horizontally and the Number of windows vertically If you wish to set the display format yourself activate the User defined check box and click Detail A dialog opens allowing you to make the desired settings Group display Process window The picture window in the group display and in the process window is zoomed in or out to fit the size of the open picture The picture window has no scroll bars and the size of the window cannot be changed When you click Detail the Group Display dialog box for positioning the windows will open Trend groups Trend groups you configured using the Trend online function are displayed in a picture window which is adapted to fit the size of the open picture The picture window has no scroll bars and the size of the window can
291. number of a message priority You can use the following entries WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 121 Horn 3 4 Linking Signal Tags to Messages Entry in Priority Example Description No entry Irrespective of its priorities messages set the signal tags Number 5 Exactly one priority Number Number Number 5 7 9 Defined priorities Number1 Number2 5 9 Priorities between Number1 and Number inclusive lt number or gt number lt 5or gt 5 Priorities less than or greater than the number lt number or gt number lt 5or Priorities less than or equal to or greater than or equal to the gt 5 number Zero 0 the signal tag is set at Priority 0 A combination of entries e g 1 5 10 lt 50 is not possible Do not assign to a signal tag a combination of message priority and message class that is already being used in another signal tag In this case an incoming message could not set this signal tag as the first assignment already fulfills the conditions for the triggering of the signal The following example shows how the system behaves Example 1 Message class Priority Source Authorization lt default gt AlarmTag Alarm 10 lt default gt AlarmHighTag Example 2 Message class Priority Source Area Event Authorization Tag gt 5 lt default gt AlarmTag Alarm 10 lt default gt AlarmHighTag
292. o devices have been configured as master and one device switches to standby mode the other will be forced into standby mode as well c lost WinCC mastership If the WinCC server is a redundant server it has permission to operate as time master on the bus It then switches its devices to standby mode 1012018 OS process 2 s cannot send time Time synchronization 2 s Device name e g control system signal CP1613 messages 1012019 OS process 2 s can send time signal Time synchronization 2 s Device name e g control system properly CP1613 messages 1012020 OS process 2 s presents the local Time synchronization 2 s Device name e g control system time CP1613 messages 1012021 OS process LAN Sync time not Time synchronization 2 s Computer name control system synchronized with PC messages 2 s 1012022 OS process LAN Sync time Time synchronization 2 s Computer name control system synchronization set to PC messages 2 s 1012023 OS process LAN Sync time synchronized Time synchronization 2 s Computer name control system with PC 2 s messages 1012024 OS process Configured device name for Time synchronization control system the time synchronization does messages not agree with PC installation WinCC Options for Process Control 98 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 12 Overview of the Process Control Messages
293. object property that was configured as the identifier of the user object Here template objects that must be stored in the template picture are accessed Dynamic Wizard Changing the Connection of the Customized Object This Wizard is used for the later change of individual connections of customized objects in WinCC pictures e g connection to another AS block instance See also Page 256 Page 256 Page 257 Page 258 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 255 Graphic Object Update Wizard 7 4 Dynamic Wizard of the Graphics Designer 7 4 2 How to export user object templates Requirement To export user object templates from a WinCC picture into a CSV file ASCII file open the corresponding WinCC picture with the Graphics Designer Procedure 1 In the Graphics Designer select the Dynamic Wizard Exporting Picture Objects from the Picture Functions group The Dynamic Wizard leads you through a series of dialog boxes to create the export file 2 You can make the following settings Select whether the export file is to be generated only from the picture currently opened in the Graphics Designer or from all WinCC pictures of the project In general do not export any template pictures with user object templates and PCS 7 system pictures You can identify files of this type by the prefix Specify the name of the export file Export csv in the folder of the current pro
294. ocess events include for example limit violations of measured values or status information e Process control messages are error messages caused or detected by SIMATIC PCS 7 components With process control messages events ranging from a component failure to a wire break message from a connected I O are reported e Operator input messages are generated during operation of process variables such as a controller mode change e System messages are generated by WinCC Line based message sequence report on page oriented printer The message list button set features a button for printing a message sequence report which can be used to print a line based message sequence report You can find additional information under How to Output Online Data with the Message Sequence Report in Printing the Message Sequence Report in Page Layout Printing the message sequence log with a client without its own project See also 324 The message sequence report can be configured in WinCC either only on the server or only on one client To use a message sequence log on one of the clients you need to enter the parameter CLIENT in the upper case in the Report Runtime startup list ow to Display Message Lists Page WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 9 Message system 9 9 2 Alarms Structure of a message A message consists of system information and various parameters th
295. ocess picture amp Note The authorizations for the pictures in the picture memory and picture stack are user specific Consequently the picture memory and picture stack of all displays are deleted in their entirety every time the WinCC user changes Selecting graphic pictures from the picture memory The picture memory is used as a simple way to store a picture from the working area The picture in the picture memory can be called at any time also multiple times When you save a new picture the original picture in the picture memory is overwritten A separate picture memory is kept for each working area of the basic picture e Click the adjacent button to save the picture in the picture memory e Click the adjacent button to display the picture in the picture memory You can be in any plant view WinCC Options for Process Control 358 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 12 Process Controlling Graphic Pictures Note The authorizations for the pictures in the picture memory are user specific The complete picture memory of all screens is deleted each time there is a user change in WinCC 9 12 6 Operator Activity in Graphic Pictures Overview 4 When the cursor takes on the form shown here you can operate an object for example you can enter values The following types of operations exist e System operator input which change the display in the graphic window They hav
296. oduct Project Action Product Project Ur AlarmOneLine PDL 11 10 2004 81172004 O assetFaceplate RPL 10 18 2004 32972004 Or Buttons11 PDL 9 28 2004 8 19 2004 Or Buttons12 PDL 9 28 2004 9 20 2004 Ofr Language PDL 9 28 2004 8 30 2004 Or Overview1 PDL 10 27 2004 8 30 2004 X autoload pas 25 11 2002 03 08 2001 X checkifopen pas 25 11 2002 03 08 2001 X CheckLevel pas 25 11 2002 03 08 2001 X DoJob sync pas 25 11 2002 03 08 2001 X LangChg pas 25 11 2002 03 08 2001 M1 H i telenme PMI 10227204 9A1N2NNA Picture modules in project deviate from the product library or user Duplicate picture modules were found in product library and user library library accept picture modules from the libraries accept picture modules from the user library T Update Dynamic Wizard Scripts Update Graphics Object Update Wizard configuration T Update screen for start up T Update sound files for the horn OK Cancel Apply Overwriting modified basic pictures in the project The picture files list upper left shows all the basic pictures in the project which have time stamps that do not match those of the pictures in the delivered state This may have arisen due to a newer version of the basic data or the pictures concerned may have been configured by the user Entries in the Project column show the dates of the files in the project path Entries in the Product column show the dates of the files in the installation folder WinCC
297. ol also define the appearance You do not have to assign any fields for example in the overview or button bar The areas in the picture hierarchy are displayed automatically for you in runtime The sequence of the areas on the WinCC client takes into account the sequence of the areas within the server projects The sequence of the servers is defined on the WinCC client by the sequence of the package import The system ensures that the hierarchy is displayed the same on all WinCC clients Note You cannot include pictures from WinCC clients in the overview pictures as they are not contained in any picture hierarchy They can still be opened in the working area or process window using the function Picture via name In order to take fullest advantage of the Basic Process Control functionality you should only configure picture changes using the standard functions of Split Screen Manager Message Configuration 16 All necessary data is created by the OS Project Editor There is no need to configure alarm controls To configure Loop In Alarm you must use the Loop In Alarm function of the Split Screen Manager instead of the OpenPicture function You can find further information on this subject in the section called Loop In Alarm Function WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Overview of process control system options 1 2 Configuring in the PCS 7 environment User Authorizations
298. om the device list It is not deleted from the tag list of the corresponding connection in WinCC Explorer Reason Other modules of the WinCC system can access this tag e Select a line and then click Delete to delete the entire line Click the button with the device number to select a line e When you click Delete you will not be asked whether you really want to delete the selected line e You can only delete single lines You can not select a group of lines in order to delete this group This function is not available in WinCC client projects Update Use this button to create update the system configuration The system configuration is created by default with the name CONFIG PDL and saved to the project specific picture folder The geometry of the picture is based on the settings that were made in OS Project Editor The Graphics Designer editor cannot be opened during the update Edit Picture Open Graphics Designer directly with this button in order to edit the plant configuration picture Config PDL You can only operate this button if the plant configuration picture exists See also Device List of Lifebeat Monitoring Page Buttons of Lifebeat Monitoring Page eneral Information About Lifebeat Monitoring Page How to configure the object selection 5 8 4 System Configuration of Lifebeat Monitoring Introduction Within the system configuration all of the components to be monitored are shown as graphics Components that are currentl
299. ome future extension Examples e Reserve Picture_Reserve1 e Reserve2 Picture_Reserve2 e Reserve3 Picture_Reserve3 In this case users would not receive access rights to these reserve areas in the User Administrator You are not allowed to create areas in the Picture Tree Manager without assigning pictures to them To configure reserve areas always use the OS Project Editor option Areas not needed Server assignment If the chosen layout allows the server to be displayed on the WinCC client you can arrange the areas for the server selected in the Server assignment in the area overview list If you select another server the Visible areas and Areas not needed lists are refilled You can arrange the selected servers by clicking Up and Down In the case of a layout without View on a server the Server assignment in the area overview list cannot be edited The list shows only the server and the local computer The lists Visible areas and Areas not needed then contain all the areas available for display in the overview window Preview Click Preview A preview window showing the arrangement of the areas will open This display shows the generated overview schematically Area preview mest EP PO ee 000 ra ae III IC es O sre C xa TTTT IIL ee O0 re While the preview window is open you can further configure the sequence of the area and server buttons Each change is immediately updated in the previ
300. ons for combining statuses for assignment of pictures The index list of the extended status display has been enlarged The index of certain states has changed for example the operator message in the Went Out OR status previously had the index 25 and now has the index 34 Flashing of the background and the text can be configured for the bits of the group value In the extended analog display you can set flashing behavior for the background and the text for all bits of the group value with regard to the Came In Came In Acknowledged and Went Out Unacknowledged statuses WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 41 Overview of process control system options 1 9 Migration of Extended Status and Analog Displays Prior to WinCC V6 2 Transfer of the background colors and text colors of the extended analog display The transfer of the former object properties for background color and font color of the message classes in the Colors properties group to the new object properties in the Message types properties group Object Property Background color Tolerance Message Type Bit 27 Tolerance High Bit 26 Tolerance Low New Object Properties Came In Background color ON Came In Background Color Off Came In Acknowledged Background color ON Came In Acknowledged Background color OFF Went Out Unacknowledged Background color ON Went Out Unacknowledged
301. ontainer Name Ctrl E fob Rictore Cut Container Ctr Lopy Biken Iserchieture into B ntamner tly Insert After Ctrley Insert Before Insert Into Node New Container Insert After Delete Picture Insert Before 4 Delete Container Etrl L el ee Properties 3 Select one of the three insertion options You can insert the new container after before or in the selected node See also Page Page Page 240 Page 242 Page Page 6 5 2 4 How to create the hierarchy with the Menu bar Procedure 1 Select a container in the hierarchy window 2 Select the Edit gt New Container menu command to insert a new container 3 Select one of the three insertion options You can insert the new container after before or beneath the selected node WinCC Options for Process Control 238 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager 6 5 General information on the hierarchy Note Inserting a new container into an existing node expands the hierarchy by one level If you insert a container before or after a container the affected hierarchy level is expanded by one container See also Page Page Page Page Page Page 6 5 2 5 How to create the hierarchy changing the container name Procedure 1 Select the container which you would like to rename in the hierarchy window 2 Click the selected container or select the Edit Container Name command from the shortcut menu or press the lt Ctrl E gt keystrok
302. ontains a picture it will be replaced by the new picture With the Confirm for replace picture check box you change the behavior of the Picture Tree Manager with or without confirmation Procedure 1 Select the container into which you would like to insert the picture contained in the clipboard 2 Select the Edit gt Insert Picture menu command or Select the Insert Picture Into Container command from the shortcut menu 3 The picture is pasted from the clipboard into the selected container If the container already contains a picture it will be replaced See also Menu bar Page 210 6 3 1 16 How to insert a container after another container Introduction Select the Insert After menu command to paste the clipboard contents to a position after the selected container The command is only enabled if a container not the root node has been selected and one or more containers have been copied into the clipboard Procedure 1 Select the container after which you would like to insert the contents of the clipboard 2 Select the Edit gt Insert After menu command or select the Insert After command from the shortcut menu 3 The contents of the clipboard will be inserted after the selected container Note You cannot insert a container before or after the root node See also Menu bar Page 210 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 219 Picture Tree Manager 6 3
303. ontrol system options 1 9 Introduction 1 9 Migration of Extended Status and Analog Displays Prior to WinCC V6 2 Migration of Extended Status and Analog Displays Prior to WinCC V6 2 As of WinCC V6 2 you can now integrate all bits of the group value for the extended status and analog display This extends the message classes that have been used up to now Extension and transfer of configuration data If you open an extended status and analog display configured before WinCC 6 2 with a WinCC version V6 2 or higher the configuration data is extended or transferred as follows New in WinCC V6 2 New object property Acknowledgment mask in the Miscellaneous properties group Effect on Previous Configuration Data Transfer of the object property from the group display The acknowledgment mask of the EventQuit tag is set to 0 for projects prior to WinCC V6 2 New properties group Message types of the extended analog display Transfer of the property group from the group display The existing object properties for the configured colors of the message classes in the Colors properties group are omitted and are transferred to the new properties group New object properties for the priorities in the Status properties group The existing object properties for the priorities are transferred to the new object properties for the respective bits of the group value Additional priorities were added New opti
304. orn You use the HornSettingTagsActive and HornTriggeringSignalsActive tags to temporarily deactivate or activate the respective horn components The two tags are defined with the start value 1 After runtime of the horn is activated the components Alarm sets signal tag and Signal tag sets signaling device are activated by default The RestartHorn tag controls the restart of the horn components Following a configuration change you can restart the runtime of the horn Normally this is not necessary since each change of configuration is applied automatically The binary tag HornReset controls the way signaling devices and signal tags behave following an acknowledgment Separate OSs or WinCC clients use a local reset tag for this purpose WinCC clients and or servers acting in unison use one or more additional reset tags Tag HornSettingTagsActive Meaning The Alarm sets signal tag component is activated if the value 1 is set at the binary tag The component pauses and no alarms activate the assigned signal tag if the value 0 is set at the binary tag HornTriggeringSignalsActive The Signal tag sets signaling device component is activated if the value 1 is set at the binary tag The component pauses and no signal tags activate the assigned signal generator if the value 0 is set at the binary tag All signaling devices are shut down Only the synchronization of additional reset tags remains active R
305. orn the cell displays the relative path such as Horn_Danger wav after the selection If you want to display the absolute path in the cell select the menu command Absolute Path in the context menu of the cell Ifthe file you wish to select is located outside the project directory enter the absolute path of the file in the edit box If you want to display the relative path in the cell select the menu command Relative Path in the context menu of the cell You cannot use the relative path for a file on another drive Note that client computers have the same configuration as server computers Therefore the paths for the sound files must also be accessible from server computers as well as from client computers When you use the absolute path the sound files can be accessed from the server computer and the client computer 5 If you do not want to assign a signal module and a sound file to the tags you do not require any entries in the Signal module and Sound columns 6 Click Apply Your settings are saved Use the lt DEL gt key or the lt Backspace gt key to delete the contents of selected cells To insert new rows or delete rows select the corresponding menu commands in the context menu of the table If several messages are queued the sounds are not played for each individual signal tag they are played simultaneously for all set signal tags You can limit the number of sounds to be played at the same time For example in order
306. ose with higher priority until it is changed to the Went Out status or a new message is received Messages of message class Tolerance are shown in the single line message window if the option Message class Tolerance requires acknowledgement is activated See also ow to Display Message Lists Page WinCC Options for Process Control 328 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 9 4 Introduction 9 9 5 Procedure 9 9 Message system Message behavior You can configure a different message behavior in the message window in runtime Depending on the authorization held by a user the user can either be restricted to viewing messages only or may also be able to acknowledge messages e Message windows which allow acknowledgment display all messages which may be acknowledged by a currently logged in user who has the Process controlling authorization e Message windows which allow messages to be viewed display all messages which may be viewed but not acknowledged by a currently logged in user who has the Authorization for area authorization You can set the message behavior in the OS Project Editor The properties of the message window can be set in the Message filter group of the Message Display tab In runtime users who can view messages but not acknowledge them need message windows with two message lists In one of these message lists the user with the Process controlling authorizat
307. ou configure the extended status display in several steps 1 Specify the bits of the group value to be used 2 Specify the priorities for the messaging characteristics in Runtime 3 If you do not want to accept the default settings specify the display options of the message types for the utilized bits Independent of the bits of the group value you can configure the colors for the OK and Simulation statuses 4 Connect the Value and Group value properties to one tag each 5 If necessary configure a simulation tag and the display options for the value of the tags WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 35 Overview of process control system options 1 7 How to Configure the Extended Analog Display Procedure 1 Open the Graphics Designer go to the Object Palette Smart Objects and select the object Analog Display Extended 2 Move the object into the working area using a drag and drop operation This opens the configuration dialog box for the extended analog display Extended analog display properties i E 21x Format color I Display value as text State OLK O K Flashing Colors Simulation Came In Came In Flashing Color Came In Acknowledged Carn le Sle cee Claabinan anlara zi IV Font flashing I Background flashing r Evaluation of the group value Used bits gt gt Unused bits Basi 24 45 Process Control Error mr Bit
308. ow that are queued and acknowledgement sj require acknowledgment unless they require individual acknowledgment ma tS WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 333 Process control runtime 9 9 Message system Function Hit list Explanation Shows statistical information for the messages in additional columns in the journal list Set user filters A Opens a dialog box for selecting messages Set one or more filters with selection criteria in the dialog All messages that do not meet the criteria of the active filter are not displayed but are archived Disable all user filters Dee Deactivates all active user filters and resets the settings for each message list to the s PCS7 default Sort dialog sG Opens a dialog box for customizing the sorting of displayed messages for example based on priority Printing Creates a paper documentation First message Shows the start of the list The cursor moves to the first list element You must first switch off the autoscroll Previous message Cursor moves to the previous list element You must first switch off the autoscroll Next message Cursor moves to the next list element You must first switch off the autoscroll Last message Shows the end of the list The cursor moves to the last list element You must first switch off the autoscroll Info Text Opens a window for displaying pr
309. p down diagonal The mouse pointer moves to the next screen e You can use the mouse to activate all functions on the screen selected in this way just as you would on any of the other connected screens A single keyboard may be used for all entries on any of the screens WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 285 Process control runtime 9 3 System Structure Example This example shows four screens arranged in a row The user can move the cursor freely from left to right and vice versa WinCC Options for Process Control 286 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 4 How to set up and load the project 9 4 How to set up and load the project Introduction This chapter describes how to select and set up a new project and then activate it for runtime Overview When you have created a project you may wish to load it into the runtime system To do this perform the following steps e Select the project e Assign a computer to the project e Configure and initialize the runtime interface with the aid of the OS Project Editor e Set up the message system with the standard default values via the OS Project Editor Procedure When you have started WinCC for the first time the following dialog box is displayed Cina Nm Pract DL segete Pret BE ana BET Chere Pree P mature CE ow 1 Select the Open an existing project check box and
310. perator Input 7 s 6 s new Libraries 7 s Operator Message 3 g 8 s old 6 s Operating text 2 g 8 s 3 g New value 8 s Unit 2 g Old value 1013002 Operator Input 2 s 3 s 4 s SFC Message 1013003 Operator Input 7 s 6 s new PCS 7 7 s Operator Message 5 g 8 s old 6 s Operating text 4 g 8 s 5 g New value 8 s Unit 4 g Old value WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 ASJE32315704 AA 101 OS Project Editor 2 12 Overview of the Process Control Messages Message Message Class Message text Created for Meaning No 1013004 Operator Input 7 s 6 s new PCS 7 SIMATIC 7 s Operator Message 5 g 8 s old BATCH libraries 6 s Operating text 4 g 8 s 5 g New value 8 s Unit 4 g Old value 1013005 Operator Input 7 s 6 s SIMATIC BATCH 7 s Operator Message new 5 s old 4 s 6 s Operating text 5 s New value 4 s Old value 1013007 Operator Input 7 s SFC Message 2 s 3 s 4 s 1013008 Operator Input 7 s SFC SIMATIC BATCH 7 s Operator Message 4 s 5 s 6 s 4 s Free operating text 5 s Continuation of free operating text 6 s Continuation of free operating text 1013009 Operator Input 7 s 6 s new SIMATIC BATCH 7 s Operator Message 5 s 8 s old 6 s Parameter name 4 s 8 s 5 s New value
311. permission the signal tag WarnVar is set and the corresponding signal is triggered WinCC Options for Process Control 124 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 4 Linking Signal Tags to Messages Procedure 1 Select the Message Assignment tab 4 Horn configuration rtt MCP ia ES Message assignment Signal assignment Set tag Authorization check for every incoming message m Deactivate default authorization check Not for arrival of an unacknowledged message Authorization for area Message class Priority Source Authorization lt default gt Alarm ar Monitoring Warn ar Lpecessovssvscrereveuseuscevasessvssuserseerverseressusrsevser Project documentation w Cancel Apply 2 Double click on the cell in the column to open a selection dialog from which you can select the authorization You can use any of the authorizations defined in the User Administrator 3 Confirm your selection with the lt Return gt key or the lt Tab gt key 4 Click Apply Your settings are saved Select the lt default gt entry if no authorization is specified This entry corresponds to the authorization called Authorization for Area which you need in order to view messages Deactivating the default authorization test Release for area Deactivate the authorization check for Release for area if you do not want to filter the messages in runtime based on the area in the project For this you can u
312. play in Runtime these events are automatically indicated as acknowledged to prevent flashing during the calculation of the group displays and the display of the area overview The start value of the attribute is 0x00000011 17 by default The value of the Acknowledgment mask attribute should be identical for all group display objects extended analog display and extended status display and for the EventQuit tag The EventQuit tag is created directly by Basic Process Control as a signed 32 bit value under Internal tags You can set the acknowledgment response for Tolerance in the OS Project Editor You can set further acknowledge tags to ensure that other events are also automatically identified as acknowledged when group displays are being calculated When group acknowledgment is carried out via the Group Acknowledgment button all acknowledgement bits for the measurement points in the picture concerned that require acknowledgment are set to 65535 For technical reasons it is necessary to delete all the status bits of the measurement points requiring acknowledgment for the group acknowledgment If you do not want the status bits to be deleted following acknowledgment the bits in the status word most significant word of the EventQuit tag must be set OxFFFF When combined with the acknowledgement bits least significant word this gives the start value OxFFFF0C11 which means 62447 for a signed 32 bit value or 4294904849
313. pports drag and drop with the left as well as the right mouse button drag and drop with the short cut menu You can work with the Picture Tree Manager using drag and drop in the hierarchy window as well as in the selection window WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 231 Picture Tree Manager 6 4 Working with the Picture Tree Manager Procedure See also 6 4 5 Introduction 1 Click on the icon of the desired picture in the selection window 2 Use a drag amp drop operation to drag the picture icon to the hierarchy window located above Release the mouse button as soon as the pointer has transformed into the icon The picture is inserted if the selected container is empty If the selected container is not empty you must confirm replacement of the existing picture or Use a drag amp drop operation to drag the picture icon to the hierarchy window located above Release the mouse button as soon as the pointer has transformed into the icon Page 229 Page 232 Page Page Handling Tags with the Picture Tree Manager The Picture Tree Manager places a tag named lt picture name gt in the Group Signals tag group for every picture that contains a group display Therefore the same limitations apply for the use of special characters in picture names as for tag names Example The PTM tag is created for the picture PTM pdl Tag group Group Signals If the Recalculate
314. printers with adjustable margin shift or print position Emr If a server partner is off or faulty and the second server partner also develops a fault the second server partner will initially remain available to the connected clients The second server partner will not disconnect the clients until the first server partner can run again and has been compared with the second server partner This ensures that the clients at least have a connection to this server pair even if there is a fault on each of the server partners Redundancy monitoring in the area overview The functionality is only available at one PCS 7 client If packages are loaded on the client a green or red button representing the status of the connected servers will appear in the area overview If you click this button then a window will open listing all connected servers in the working area The table shows the server pairs and non redundant servers with their symbolic computer names and the corresponding computer names for master and standby The servers with problems are displayed at the top in red and italics The servers without problems will be displayed in green State of connected servers wy OS_SERVER152 SERVER152 SERVER153 OS 1 _SERVER136 SERVER136 SERVER137 081_SERVER150 SERVER150 SERVER151 Q1_Technikum_SERVER138 SERVER138 Server144_SERVER144 SERVER144 SERVER145 When a user is logged in he can confirm the current status of the servers using
315. r Insert Before or Insert Into Node Note Inserting a new container into an existing node expands the hierarchy by one level If you insert a container before or after a container the affected hierarchy level is expanded by one container See also Page 6 3 1 14 How to insert a picture or container Introduction This command is only available if a picture or a container was copied to the clipboard for pasting it to the selection window The Edit gt Paste menu command pastes any picture saved to the clipboard into the selection window This is done likewise if the clipboard contains a container including any subcontainers and pictures However the container name and the structure of the sublevel hierarchy will be lost A notice will inform you of any possible loss of hierarchy information resulting from this action Procedure 1 Click in the empty area of the selection window 2 Select the Edit gt Paste menu command or select the Paste command from the shortcut menu See also Menu bar Page 210 6 3 1 15 How to insert a picture into a container Introduction Select the Insert Picture Into Container menu command to paste the clipboard contents into a selected container The command is only enabled if the clipboard contains a picture WinCC Options for Process Control 218 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager 6 3 Picture Tree Manager Structure If the container already c
316. r is output if the format expression contains the appropriate placeholder and this placeholder is itself surrounded by placeholders for digits 0 or Two thousands separators in succession or a thousands separator immediately left of the decimal separator even if no decimal places are specified will cause the number to be divided by 1000 and rounded off Example You can use the format string 0 in order to output 100 million as 100 Numbers smaller than 1 million are then shown as 0 Two consecutive placeholders for the thousands separator that are not placed immediately to the left of the decimal separator are interpreted as a normal thousands separator and output as such The character that is actually output as the thousands separator depends on the system settings for the number format WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 39 Overview of process control system options 7 8 Format Function of the Analog Display Formatting characters E E e e Display Scientific format If the format expression contains at least one digit placeholder 0 or to the right of the symbol E E e or e then the number is displayed in scientific notation or exponential notation The letter E or e is inserted between the number and the exponent The number of digit placeholders to the right of the symbol determines the number of places in the exponent When the symbol is E or e a min
317. r the purpose of querying external binary signals These inputs are isolated by optical couplers These are used for user specific expansions and can be configured by means of signal tags The internal tags Signallnput Signallnput3 are used in the same way as in Version 5 Structure of the Switches and Plug In Jumpers with the ISA Bus Page 147 Addressing the ISA Bus Signal Module Page 1148 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 12 Signal module 3 12 4 Structure of the Switches and Plug In Jumpers with the ISA Bus Overview The following simplified representation of the signal module with 8 Bit ISA bus interface shows the physical arrangement and the pin numbering of the switches and jumpers seen from the component side Their use is explained below N 1 2 3 X10 X116 ajajaj jajaja ile 876543241 1 ISA Bus The image shows the factory settings of the jumpers and the default switch positions These default settings are marked with in the following table Configuration meaning of the jumpers switches interfaces The functions of signal generators watchdogs plug control and addressing are set using plug in jumpers Slot Jumper Meaning x114 1 3 2 4 Acknowledgment of signal generator via bus interface 1 2 3 4 Acknowledgment of a signal generator by means of external signal 5 6 Signal generator function on 7 8 Watchdog funct
318. re being displayed The windows have no scroll bars and the size of the windows cannot be changed WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 81 OS Project Editor 2 8 The Runtime window tab Window settings Use the Group Display dialog box to position windows Since the size of the windows cannot be changed you cannot set their width and height However you can specify the window position Group Display Set up the values in the following input boxes either by entering the values straight into the input box or else by using the slider or the spin box e Top and Left Define the position of the first window at these parameters relative to the coordinate origin of the working area e Horizontally displaced and Vertically displaced Define the position of the window relative to the previous window at these parameters WinCC Options for Process Control 82 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 8 The Runtime window tab The Graphic positioning allows you to position the windows with ease To do so click Detail Note The settings are limited due to layout specific aspects If an entry in the configuration file is missing the following settings apply The maximum number of picture windows is limited from 1 to 16 The window s size is adapted to fit the picture size The positions of the windows are limited to a value between 0 pixels and th
319. res Enter the maximum time limit for message hiding in the edit box 30 minutes are preset You can enter a maximum of 9 days 23 hours and 59 minutes WinCC Options for Process Control 64 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 6 Message Display Tab Sorting Message Pages You set the chronological order of the message window in the message pages By selecting the Latest message at top radio button the most recent message to arrive is displayed as the first message in the message window By selecting the Latest message at bottom radio button the most recent message to arrive is displayed as the last message in the message window In the extended message line the messages are sorted first by priority then data and finally by time Group display hierarchy This setting for the group display hierarchy supports you in configuring the group display if you wish to build a group display hierarchy based on the picture hierarchy When the Create update group display check box is selected the additional group displays are created as follows in the process pictures for forming the group display hierarchy e When saving the hierarchy in the Picture Tree Manager when creating or migrating a project e When running the OS Project Editor for an existing project The Project Editor calls the corresponding component of Picture Tree Manager The next time it starts the group displays are no longer automatically generated
320. resets its local HornReset tag This causes its signaling devices to be deactivated Note When configuring a shared acknowledgment you must be aware that users with different authorizations can be logged on to the WinCC clients When a message comes in it is possible for say WinCC client 1 to see this message and trigger the horn WinCC client 2 is not authorized to see this message and trigger a signal However WinCC client 2 can acknowledge the signaling device on WinCC client 1 at any time even though it does not see any messages and its signaling device is deactivated Application Examples for Acknowledgement Behavior Page 137 3 11 4 Example 3 WinCC Clients with Multiple Acknowledgment by Tags Introduction Requirement Requirement Procedure The following example shows you the configuration of two WinCC clients acting in unison whose signaling devices are deactivated using acknowledgment tags Starting in WinCC V6 2 multiple acknowledgment by a group is the preferred configuration The configuration of the multiple acknowledgment using acknowledgment tags is retained for compatibility reasons e The WinCC clients have one signaling device each the servers have none e A server has a common acknowledgment tag for both WinCC clients Since the WinCC clients act in unison the acknowledgment tag acknowledges all the signaling devices on the WinCC clients 1 Onthe S1 server create the binary acknowledgment ta
321. risk on the tab disappears once the changes are applied to the project Click OK This closes the editor When you click Cancel the editor is closed without accepting the changes It takes some time to configure the project Page 51 Message Configuration Tab Page 57 Page 70 Page Basic data tab Page 85 General tab Page 89 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 4 The Layout Tab 2 4 The Layout Tab 2 4 1 Layout tab Introduction The Layout tab contains settings for the layout of the runtime user interface The basic data is organized in the layouts A layout is defined by a configuration file TT sx E Layout x Message configuration E Message display Ep Area Runtime window DB Basic data Ef General Current layout Available layouts Layout Description SIMATIC Standard Layout for screen resolution of 1024 768 Picture Name SIMATIC Server 1024 768 F SIMATIC Server 1152 864 F SIMATIC Server 12801024 Ei SIMATIC Server 16001200 E SIMATIC Server 1680 1050 Ge SIMATIC Server 19201080 Ge SIMATIC Server 1920 1200 Ge SIMATIC Server 2560 1600 E SIMATIC Serverview 1024 768 Runtime Help available ma SIMATIC Serverview 1152864 ma SIMATIC Serverview 1280 1024 Display F SIMATIC Serverview 1600 1200 Eere C UserID E SIMATIC Serverview 1680 1050 gt Number of area keys Number of
322. rity Bit 20 Fault priority Priority Bit 25 Tolerance priority Priority Bit 27 Priority Bit 26 Warning priority Priority Bit 29 Priority Bit 28 Alarm priority Priority Bit 31 Priority Bit 30 Error priority Priority Bit 24 Note Process pictures in which you have inserted extended analog displays and extended status displays as of WinCC V6 2 cannot be opened with a version before WinCC V6 2 See also ow to Configure the Extended Status Display Page ow to Configure the Extended Analog Display Page 35 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 45 OS Project Editor 2 2 1 OS Project Editor Content The OS Project Editor is used for initializing and configuring the runtime user interface and the alarm system in PCS7 This documentation shows you the following e how to change the layout e how to configure the behavior of the alarm system in runtime e how to arrange areas e how to arrange runtime windows e how to configure initialized basic data e how to log the activities of the Project Editor WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 47 OS Project Editor 2 2 General information about the OS Project Editor 2 2 General information about the OS Project Editor Introduction The OS Project Editor is used to configure the currently open WinCC project for use with Basic Process Control and PCS7 Tasks of the OS Project Editor The OS Projec
323. roject Editor WinCC Options for Process Control 306 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 8 System operator input 9 8 System operator input 9 8 1 System operator input Overview The following functions are described in this section Logon in Runtime Logon to the system with smart card or password Cursor keys picture information General explanations Exiting runtime Acknowledging signaling devices alarms Switch language Displaying the Content of the Picture Stack BATCH selection SFC Visualization selection Route Control Center selection Displaying the system configuration picture lifebeat monitoring Selecting the plant area Navigation through the picture hierarchy Screen composition Displaying reporting jobs Selecting the User Administrator Locking and releasing messages WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 307 Process control runtime 9 8 System operator input See also Page Page Page Page Page 311 Page Page 812 Page 312 313 Page 314 Page Page Page Page ow to call the User Administrator Page Disabling and enabling messages Page 322 9 8 2 How to log on in runtime vr Overview You have two options for logging on in runtime e fa chip card reader is connected you can use a chip card e You enter a logon name and password in the logon dialog box If a user has not been creat
324. rol System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 115 Horn 3 2 General Information About the Audio Alarm 3 2 General Information About the Audio Alarm Functionality With the horn you control optical or acoustic sensors Sound files are output when messages arrive With the Horn editor you can configure the signal that is to be triggered upon receipt of certain messages An incoming message activates a signal tag which then triggers an acoustic or optical signal in the assigned signaling device If you confirm the message the signal tag is reset and the signal is terminated You open the horn editor by double clicking the horn entry or using the Open command from the shortcut menu in WinCC Explorer You configure activation of the signal outputs by signal tags and the acknowledgement response in a client server architecture in two tabs In the Message Assignment tab you connect certain message properties to signal tags The following message properties act as filters to trigger a signal e Message Class e Message priority e Source e Area e Event In the Authorization column you stipulate additionally whether the horn is to be triggered on a user specific basis by messages from certain areas if the specified filter criteria are fulfilled Every line forms a logical AND with six inputs The signal tag is only set to 1 if all six conditions have been fulfilled In the Signal Assignment tab you configure the sign
325. rrespond with the delivery state Note If several modules are interconnected by way of external wiring it is mandatory that jumper 3 4 at slot X6 is in the same position at all modules The jumper is usually inserted on all modules See also PCI Bus Signal Module Page 150 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 153 Horn 3 12 Signal module 3 12 8 Installing the Signal Module The installation is broken down into multiple steps Follow these steps Procedure 1 2 3 4 154 Hardware Installation Insert the signal module card into the OS motherboard The card requires a free ISA slot or PCI slot in the OS If the OS is a server OS with several client OS s each client can contain an additional signal module Before installing the ISA card check whether the addresses used by the card default settings are still available on your PC If the default settings are in use the card must be reset via the DIP switches The preset address assignment of the signal module is 180H to 18FH in the I O area You will find information about how to set another address area in the Addressing the ISA bus signal module of this documentation This can be necessary to prevent address conflicts with other PC expansion cards You do not have to set the address for the PCI card SS JE Signal Unit Konfiguration Hardware Setup Once you have installed the signal module card you can te
326. rview If the layout supports the generic creation of the area buttons in the overview area the Detail is enabled for Overview extended configuration WinCC Options for Process Control 52 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 4 The Layout Tab The Number of area keys and Number of server keys output boxes show the number of keys currently configured If the layout does not support these functions the field are empty and the Detail button is disabled The Detail button opens a dialog box for configuring the overview area You set the number of keys in this dialog box Runtime help When you select the Runtime help available check box you specify that the Help button is operator controllable in the second button set of runtime Display If you have installed SIMATIC Logon Service you can choose here to have the full user name or only the user ID of the user logged displayed in the overview area under Login Note The layout selection must match the monitor setting of the computer Depending on the graphic card used problems may occur when runtime is started if the coordinates deviate WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 53 OS Project Editor 2 4 The Layout Tab 2 4 2 Layout configuration for the overview area Introduction The Detail button in the Layout tab opens the following dialog box for configuring the overview area
327. s Archive name control system applied messages 1010119 OS process CAS Start archive processing Central Archive Server 2 s Archive name control system 2 s messages 1010120 OS process CAS Data backup of Central Archive Server 2 s Database segment control system 2 s started messages 1010121 OS process CAS Data backup of Central Archive Server 2 s Database segment control system 2 s successfully messages completed 1010122 OS process No symbolic name could be Central Archive Server control system assigned to the physical messages server 1010123 OS process Caution No license found Central Archive Server control system Long term archiving of the messages SIMATIC PCS 7 StoragePlus Servers is therefore disabled 1010130 OS process StoragePlus Cannot create StoragePlus 2 s Directory name control system directory 2 s Error 3 s Error text messages 3 s 1010131 OS process StoragePlus Cannot move file StoragePlus 2 s File name control system 2 s to 3 s Error 3 s Directory name messages 4 s 4 s Error text 1011000 OS process Group display error at start up Group display control system messages 1011001 OS process The group display hierarchy is Group display control system not up to date messages 1011002 OS process Group display Connection Group display 2 s is the tag name control system fault in 2 s messages 1011003 OS process Group display Ta
328. s Start menu select Settings gt Control Panel gt Display Adapter Expand the Windows Desktop to all monitors Select the required color and resolution settings Click Advanced The Matrox dialog box opens for detailed settings Set the desired frequency for each monitor in the Monitor tab oa F Wr gt Clear all unnecessary settings in the Options tab Apply the settings of the screen shot Plug and Play Monitor and Matrox G450 Multi Monitor Deutsch 261 6 3 Winsen Wine Mutiny Soup General Adapter Monitor Troubleshooting olor Management infomation 8 Options FowerDesk features IV Prompt before applying desktop scheme 7 Show menus in visible display IT Automatically save restore desktop icon positions T Automatically save restore window positions T Roll windows up down Shift Minimize IT Fade in PowerDesk dialog boxes I Fade out PowerDesk dialog boxes T Start Matrox QuickDesk when Windows restarts I Show Matrox QuickDesk icon on taskbar I Show widescreen resolutions l Performance IT Use bus mastering T Enlarge mouse pointer T Use hardware to draw color mouse pointer 7 Do no make any settings in the Multi Display Setup tab Do not start Matrox Hybrid Display under any circumstance WinCC Options for Process Control 108 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 13 Split Screen Manager 8 Close the dialog boxes
329. s control system options 1 2 Configuring in the PCS 7 environment 1 2 2 Server configuration Overview See also Distribution takes place in the PCS 7 environment according to the Plant Hierarchy In each server project you configure one or more areas of the hierarchy The basic data are created the first time you run through the OS Project Editor The information in the Picture configuration section applies for the configuration of tags inCC Client Configuration Page onfiguring in the PCS 7 environment Page otes on configuring in the PCS 7 environment Page 1 2 3 WinCC Client Configuration Introduction You can create a complete PCS 7 project on the Engineering Station You download a WinCC project to the OS using the menu command PLC gt Download in SIMATIC Manager To obtain identical WinCC client projects you can create a WinCC client project on the Engineering Station and download it onto the various operator stations by changing the destination path in SIMATIC Manager It is not possible to configure the picture hierarchy on the WinCC client Instead the WinCC client shows in runtime an overall view of all the hierarchies in all the server projects loaded by means of packages Change Package Name Procedure Packages loaded on a WinCC client are displayed in the WinCC Explorer data window under Server data The package name is a symbolic computer name consisting of the project name and the computer name
330. s depends on the configuration in the pictures Note The first time you call the OS Project Editor the Visible areas list shows all areas that were configured in the Picture Tree Manager of the OS The servers are listed in package import sequence If the sequence has already been configured and further areas or servers are added these appear at the end of the list If areas or servers are omitted they are deleted from the configuration See also Page Page Page 75 How to arrange Empty buttons Page 75 2 7 2 How to change the sequence of the servers on the WinCC client Introduction You can change the sequence and arrangement of the server keys in the overview area of the WinCC client The servers are ordered from left to right and then from top to bottom WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 ASE32315704 AA 73 OS Project Editor 2 7 The Areas Tab Procedure 1 Open the OS Project Editor Select the server from the Server arrangement in the area overview list in In the Areas tab 2 Move the server to the desired position by clicking Up and Down 3 Ifthe layout does not support Server View this list is not activated You should then select all areas of the server in the Visible areas list and move these to the required position by clicking Up and Down 4 Click Preview The Area preview window opens and you can follow the configuration 5 Check the
331. s enables the output of specific process control and operator input messages Click the check box again in order to deactivate and suppress the messages All activated messages are created If you activate the Activate check box in the System messages group all messages listed without a check mark are used as WinCC system messages with lower priority If you deactivate the Activate check box in the System messages group all messages listed without a check mark are deleted from the message system of the project You can change the message priority of the process control and operator input messages Click in the cell of the Prio column in the line of the corresponding message number and enter the priority class Reserve message priority 16 for vital messages of your plant particularly for Fatal event messages OS process control messages are computer specific instance message concept Note If the OS Project Editor is started on a WinCC client project or the option Configurations that support online delta loading only was selected in the General tab the Column width of message window and Process control and operator control messages lists and the Activate check box of the system messages cannot be edited All objects with Operator message property generate an internal operator message in the system after the operator makes an input in runtime This message is not visible in the Alarm Logging editor The user tex
332. s for process control support the downloading of changes to the configuration data in runtime Download Changes synonymous with Download OS Online Delta You can make changes online in a central engineering station without affecting the operation of the PLC The user specifies the point in time for downloading the changed configuration data You do not have to deactivate activate or terminate restart the project Changes to the configuration are not immediately adopted into the control and monitoring system For reasons of stability and consistency configuration changes only take effect after a short waiting time The modifications to the configuration data are automatically applied on the redundant servers once the partner server has been successfully loaded The capability for downloading changes is lost if the configuration is changed on the engineering station and changes are also made on the PCS 7 OS If a configuration change is not capable of downloading changes a notice is displayed at an appropriate time You are informed that the capability to download changes will be lost if this configuration change proceeds In the General tab of the OS Project Editor you can decide if all settings should be transferred for a complete configuration in the OS Project Editor or if only the settings for which the changes can be downloaded should be transferred When configuration is complete the full runtime system and alarm system are transf
333. s hidden when you restart the User Administrator You do not need administrator rights to operate WinCC write to chip cards or use the chip cards in runtime If the COM interface does not work check its settings against the following settings WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Chip card Reader 10 3 How to set the interface Advanced Settings for COM1 M Note The Chipcard menu is disabled in runtime mode because the functions can only be used in the configuration system See also General Information About the Chip Card Reader Page 362 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 367 Chip card Reader 10 4 Chip Card in User Administrator 10 4 Chip Card in User Administrator 10 4 1 Chip Card Option in User Administrator Introduction If you install WinCC with the options the User Administrator functionality is extended For example the Basic Process Control option changes the number of displayed authorizations in the table window The Chip card option inserts the Chip card menu with the associated menu commands The Login only with chip card check box can be selected This setting is user specific Ei User Administrator newi mcp lolx File User Table View Chipcard AddOns Help alain xl wel Login Administrator FF SIMATIE Logon IV Login only via chip card J WebNavigator r Automat
334. s the dialog box without saving the changes WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 337 Process control runtime 9 10 Trend system See also Page Page 336 Page 9 10 4 New Trend Group Dialog Box Introduction You open the New Trend Group dialog box by clicking New in the Online Trends dialog box x Contents i Template Pictures Eli Archive eS aa Onin fr TRG_Standard Pdl Dialog Description Functionality Meaning Name Name of new trend group Special characters and spaces are not allowed The default setting of the input box is Unnamed Content Specifies whether archive tags or online tags are visualized as trends in WinCC Online Trend Control Activate the required check box Template pictures Displays the available template pictures The system will deliver the following template pictures e TRG_Default Pdl for WinCC Online Trend Control in WinCC V7 0 or earlier e TRG_Standard Pdl for the new WinCC OnlineTrendControl in WinCC V7 0 or higher Use one of these template pictures to visualize trends in runtime In WinCC V7 0 and higher we recommend the new standard template picture TRG_Standard Pdl To create a customized template picture generate a copy of the product template pictures and then rename it In order for this template picture to be identified as such its name must start with the TRG_ prefix Perform th
335. se the message filter setting No filter in the OS Project Editor WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 125 Horn 3 4 Linking Signal Tags to Messages When the default authorization check is deactivated only the configured trigger authorization in addition to the filter criteria are assessed before allowing signals to be triggered in runtime Note Once the horn configuration has been carried out if you subsequently alter any authorizations in the User Administrator e g by renaming them you must follow up the affected horn assignments manually The same applies if you alter any of the message classes Note The signal transducer is also triggered in runtime when the user is logged off See also inking Signal Tags to Messages Page 119 WinCC Options for Process Control 126 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 5 How to assign a signal transducer to a signal tag 3 5 How to assign a signal transducer to a signal tag Introduction In the Signal Assignment tab you assign signal outputs to the signal tags This can be outputs of a signal module or sound files Several signal tags can be assigned to the same outputs of a signal module or the same sound files You can combine an output of the signal module with a sound file Procedure 1 Select the Signal Assignment tab Horn configuration Test_WinCC_6_2 0 a mcp Message assignment Sig
336. sed for the configuration of entry point pictures and the areas of measurement points See also Page 26 Page Page Page 25 Page 25 Page 27 1 5 2 Optional Editor Picture Tree Manager Introduction The Picture Tree Manager editor is used to manage a hierarchy of systems subsystems and Graphics Designer pictures Your settings in the Picture Tree Manager relate to the current WinCC project How to open the Picture Tree Manager 24 1 Double click the Picture Tree Manager editor in WinCC Explorer This starts the editor 2 Edit the hierarchy WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Overview of process control system options 7 5 Overview of the Editors of the Process Control System Options See also Overview of the Editors of the Process Control System Options Page 23 1 5 3 Optional Editor Lifebeat Monitoring Introduction Lifebeat Monitoring is used for monitoring the automation and operator systems e The Lifebeat Monitoring function monitors the individual systems on the basis of tag connections from the WinCC data manager You can use the Lifebeat Monitoring editor to define which connections are going to be monitored by Lifebeat Monitoring e From this the Lifebeat Monitoring function generates the following e a system configuration across all monitored connections e the necessary process control messages for established and relinquished
337. server keys ae Overview extended configuration Detail Monitor configuration fl aa H a a u Baar a E B OK Cancel Apply The first time the OS Project Editor is run the following settings are specified for the layout WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 51 OS Project Editor 2 4 The Layout Tab e A suitable layout is determined from the resolution of the monitor e If the settings for the area and server keys are missing from the configuration file and the display of areas on the WinCC client is not supported for a server the four horizontal and vertical keys are created for each area e lf the settings for the area and server keys are missing from the configuration file and the display of areas on the WinCC client is supported for a server the three horizontal keys and four vertical keys are created for the area and two horizontal keys and three vertical keys are created for the server Available Layouts The following layouts with different screen resolutions are available for the Runtime interface e SIMATIC Server Only for server You cannot use SIMATIC Server for the WebNavigator The interface is completely unusable with the following five exceptions LOGIN input dialog field Select User Administrator Displaying the system picture lifebeat monitoring Exit Runtime e SIMATIC Standard SIMATIC Stan
338. ssage Preventive maintenance Process message Operator prompt List of messages to be hidden Hidden messages that have exited Alarm Warning Tolerance PLC process control message Preventive maintenance Process message Operator prompt Current messages Configured by default for new projects as of WinCC V7 01 The option for acknowledgment response for the Tolerance message class is enabled in the OS project editor You can display the journal list process alarms and operation list again with the Update button and the F5 key Determine the selection of messages with user filters Using the Set user filters button you can restrict the selection of messages in the message lists with one or more filters by selecting or clearing the filters Use the Disable all user filters button to deactivate all active user filters with one click The settings for each message list are reset to the PCS7 default Note If messages come in and go out several times without having been acknowledged the older messages are removed from the incoming alarm list The journal list archive contains all messages The single line message window in the overview window does not display messages of the classes Operator prompt Tolerance and Operation message as messages in these classes cannot be acknowledged Otherwise a message that cannot be acknowledged would eclipse all other messages including th
339. st its functionality using the operating system s Control Panel To do so double click Signal Unit Configuration within the Control Panel The Signal Unit Hardware Setup dialog box will open Perform the hardware setup for the signal module plug in card via this dialog box Note When you close the dialog box you must wait approx 4 seconds before opening it again once the icon comes into focus again Before activating Runtime you have to close the Signal Unit Hardware Setup The horn is not triggered by message events otherwise Configuring signal tags Assign the messages to signal tags in the Message Assignment tab of the horn The access rights are taken into account here Assign available physical signals to the signal tags in the Signal Assignment tab for the horn In the Sensor column you assign outputs from an installed signal module to the tags by double clicking in the subsequent dialog box The available signal outputs are Output 1 Output 2 and Output 3 Testing the signal module The updated driver with version 1 1 0 is used in all operating systems for the 6DS1916 8RR signal module as of WinCC V7 0 SP1 PCS7 V7 1 You can find the driver on your computer in the installation directory lt WinCC gt Options Drivers WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 12 Signal module PCI Signal module under Windows XP Windows Server 2003
340. st set the option Limit number of simultaneously playing sounds to 1 in the Signal Assignment tab of the horn The more complex the spoken text is the worse the simultaneously occurring outputs sound The limitation to one simultaneously playing sound means that if several messages are active only the WAV file of the highest priority is output until the horn is acknowledged The priority is obtained from the position in the table in the Signal Assignment tab Once the highest priority WAV file is acknowledged the WAV file with the second highest priority is output and so on This can significantly delay the voice output Due to human nature narrow limits are placed on voice output in a message system WinCC Options for Process Control 118 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 4 Linking Signal Tags to Messages 3 4 Linking Signal Tags to Messages 3 4 1 Linking Signal Tags to Messages Introduction In the Message Assignment tab you create signal tags that you link with properties of messages Also define for individual signal tags the access rights for triggering signals When a message comes in the signal tag of the assigned message class is set to 1 Overview of procedure 1 Select the Message Assignment tab 4 Horn configuration rtt MCP REI Message assignment Signal assignment Authorization check a Deactivate default authorization check Not for arrival of an unacknowledge
341. surement point remain in the component list The measurement point name continues to be shown in the Picture via measurement point dialog box although the old measurement point no longer has properties You clean up the component list using the Options gt Garbage Collection menu command The deleted or old measurement points are then removed from the Picture via measurement point dialog box Meaning of the Owner column The entries in the component list are generated by several methods and internally identified by different Creator IDs The Component List Editor only contains one entry in the Owner column This entry comes form the owner who created the measuring point and can read as follows e no entry when a measurement point has yet to be created e System ES when at least one property has been entered by the Compile OS function e user when a property has been manually edited or entered by the calculation of the group display complete or delta The project documentation distinguishes the component list based on the creator of the properties System ES User or Group display can be entered as the creator of a property See also eneral Information About the Component List Editor Page 267 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 271 Component List Editor 8 3 How to create a new measurement point 8 3 How to create a new measurement point Prerequisite Procedure
342. t group and displayed as tooltip WinCC Options for Process Control 130 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Horn 3 6 How to Configure the Acknowledgment Behavior of the Audio Alarm To delete acknowledgment tags click Edit which opens the Acknowledgment tags dialog box Select the tag and then click Delete tag Note In WinCC Version 6 you do not always have to stop the sensors separately by means of a button e When all the messages that trigger a signal have been acknowledged the signal is automatically deactivated e Ifthe sensors are configured so as not to require acknowledgment these sensors are not deactivated automatically when the message is suppressed You must acknowledge the sensors manually Note If a preferred server is entered on a client with a view to a redundant server pair you cannot configure the central acknowledgment tag on this server pair as the internal tag for the horn Help e Use an external tag e Do not configure a preferred server for this server pair e Configure the acknowledgment tag on a non redundant server e When using a signal module link it externally See also ow to assign a signal transducer to a signal tag Page 127 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 131 Horn 3 7 Tags for controlling runtime 3 7 Tags for controlling runtime Tag definitions Additional tags are defined to control the runtime of the h
343. t etc the devices in the device list You launch the Graphics Designer editor by clicking Edit picture Inthe Graphics Designer you edit the system configuration picture The Add and Delete buttons can not be enabled for the WinCC client e System configuration All configured connections are displayed within this area as a schematic system configuration This system configuration is created automatically when you click Update e Monitoring cycle You use these radio buttons to set the monitoring cycle of the connection The default setting is 10 seconds e Position devices in the system configuration You use these radio buttons to define whether Lifebeat Monitoring should specify fixed positions and display forms for the lifebeat objects or whether user defined positions and display forms should be retained during updates e Priority This input box allows you to specify a message priority for the process control messages of the lifebeat monitoring You can enter a number from 0 to 16 Entering a lifebeat object only for single user and multi user projects 1 Open the Lifebeat Monitoring editor and make the following entries 2 Enter the name of the lifebeat object at Device name 3 Select an entry from the list at Device type 4 Select the previously created connection under Connection 5 Click Update to generate the system configuration The information from the loaded packages is not available for configurat
344. t Editor inserts pre configured pictures script actions and tags in the PCS 7 project This editor also specifies the typical settings for a PCS 7 project When the OS Project Editor is run the following tasks are completed e Creation of the PCS 7 message classes and message types e Creation of the message blocks e Creation of the PCS 7 messages e Configuration of the startup list and the start screen e Copying of the Dynamic Wizard and the actions e Creation of tags for controlling the runtime behavior e Copying of the screen layout e Creation of the runtime configuration file Behavior of the project editor When an OS project is created in the PCS 7 ES the OS Project Editor is called in the background and initialized with default settings If you want a configuration other than the default configuration start the OS Project Editor via WinCC Explorer and configure your desired project settings When you create a project in WinCC you must start the OS Project Editor in WinCC Explorer The OS Project Editor must run before the User Administrator is opened otherwise the User Administrator will be initialized with the authorization levels of WinCC The first time the OS Project Editor is called the default settings are displayed A suitable layout for the runtime user interface is selected on the basis of the screen resolution and project type If a suitable layout is not found the OS Project Editor selects the first layout from th
345. t and save the existing configuration igration of Extended Status and Analog Displays Prior to WinCC V6 2 Page 41 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Overview of process control system options 1 7 How to Configure the Extended Analog Display 1 7 How to Configure the Extended Analog Display Introduction Extended analog display is available only when a PCS 7 OS is installed The extended analog display enables you to display the value of a tag in runtime in various colors according to the alarm statuses of a block The alarm status results from the evaluation of the bits of the group value The group value is controlled by a tag Other types of dynamizing are not possible If the group value contains multiple bits the priority determines which status is displayed Display options The following display options are available for the bits of the group value with regard to the Came In Came In Acknowledged and Went Out Unacknowledged statuses e Background color e Font color e Flashing and color flashing of the background and the text For the OK and Simulation statuses you can configure both a background color and a text color in the properties dialog or the configuration dialog The flashing color is the same for both statuses You specify whether or not both statuses are to exhibit flashing response in the Flashing property in the properties dialog box Configuration steps Y
346. t blocks of this message are set according to PCS 7 defaults when you run the OS Project Editor You may not change these user text blocks as the message is triggered by the system In order to customize the allocation of user text blocks you must generate a message individually by means of ODK However this message is not going to be triggered by events which are monitored by the system All process control messages should be activated so that maintenance personnel is informed of any control system faults WinCC Options for Process Control 60 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 5 Message Configuration Tab See also diting message blocks Page Overview of the Process Control Messages Page 2 5 2 Editing message blocks Introduction For each message block created by the OS Project Editor you can define the column widths entered in the Message Window Column Width list on the Message Configuration tab Editing Right click the entry in the Column width column This is how you edit the column width In the message blocks Date and Time a dialog box opens in which you can set up the desired output format The column width is then automatically adapted to the output format Date Format Ea Order Year entered as Year Month Day 2 digit Month Day Year C 4 dicit Day Month Year Preview 08 10 02 Cancel Time Format x Elements p Pre
347. t editions Siemens AG A5E32315704 AA Copyright Siemens AG 2013 Industry Sector 02 2013 Technical data subject to change All rights reserved Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY Table of contents O N N gt 1 8 N O 2 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Table of contents TAA S EI RERRER NNNNA SE N Eh NO oo NO ON wid NO ow gt DIN Sad b o gt NO a joo N PERF HERE WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Table of contents OO OO GW OG OO GO GO GO OG OO _ _ NOON Di N N OO O SBSS SA S al R B N E5 D N D oo 0 ho O1 EEE SZENAREAE O gt WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 5 Table of contents e gt OD Gd O G Od Od O Od O E P e I d N ic Ls L 0 00 Nillop lon IN eo b o O 4 O oO BEN N er er er er e gt er er G1 S Gd rer er irer NININININININININ gt gt 2 CO NIO BW NM gt CO 10 CO No AIW O 0O O lt wlw No 5 O oO oO N El RER BEE BO dh S AWI N O o N WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA
348. t in this case The station would receive two different times from the two bus systems Access point 1 assumes the active master function if another master is activated on bus 1 during startup of the station Slave Master Acts as the master slave combination in reverse Note The selection boxes are disabled if the station to be configured is WinCC Client WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 ASJE32315704 AA 173 Time Synchronization 4 5 How to configure the synchronization over the Local Area Network 4 5 How to configure the synchronization over the Local Area Network Introduction There are three types of time synchronization over the Local Area Network terminal bus 1 The computer is synchronized automatically via a connected WinCC server 2 The time is imported from one of the permanently defined computers in the network 3 The time is set via a third party component Time Synchronization WinCC_ 6_2 O1 mep ml m opcaogg LU The WinCC client queries the computer for its time and synchronizes its time with this time The following options for setting are available WinCC Options for Process Control 174 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Time Synchronization 4 5 How to configure the synchronization over the Local Area Network e Import Time from a Connected WinCC Server e Import Time from Permanently Defined Computers e Setting time over
349. t or error identifier block number relative address Message duration State Length of time a message was queued Status of the acknowledgment C Message incoming G Message outgoing QS Message acknowledged by operator CG Message incoming outgoing QuitSystem Message acknowledged by the system In case of certain scenarios QS is displayed although no operator has acknowledged for example when AS or CPU has been stopped and started again or after a warm restart Info You can configure an information text for each message Comment The operator can subsequently add a comment to any message Batch name Contains the batch ID batch name and consecutive step number entered by means of associated values Area Area ID Loop in Alarm When this check box is selected Loop in Alarm is configured for this message Type Message types e g Alarm High or Tolerance High Operation Operator message with logged on user who performed the operation including the type of operation Operator input in the message lists The following table shows how you can navigate in the message lists and edit individual Long term archive list Shows the archived messages from the long term archive list in the journal list messages Function Icon Explanation Single Acknowledges an individual message acknowledgement A Group a Acknowledges all visible messages in the message wind
350. ta mode of Download changes in the General tab Note The project engineer my not create any tags with prefix Such actions are reserved for handling in the WinCC PCS7 software You are not allowed to manipulate these system tags The system tags are necessary for proper functioning of the product Note You must not remove applications placed in the startup list by the OS Project Editor even if they seem unnecessary If you do so subsequent configuration during runtime and an online download of changes will not be possible See also OS Project Editor Page 50 Page WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 49 OS Project Editor 2 3 OS Project Editor 2 3 OS Project Editor Introduction Overview See also 50 Use the OS Project Editor to configure the runtime and alarm systems for a PCS 7 project For instance you can change the number and arrangement of runtime windows or assign the authorization of alarms without a specified area to an area In WinCC Explorer double click the OS Project Editor icon This opens the editor The setting options are summarized in the six tabs of the OS Project Editor You can use them to enter the relevant settings If data have been changed an asterisk after the identifier in the corresponding tab indicates that this tab has changed When you click Apply the changes you have made are put into effect in the project The aste
351. tenance request yellow on black flashing activated Maintenance request quiet acknowledged Operator displays OR Operator prompt white on dark magenta quiet no acknowledgment required Disable displays X Measuring point locked white on gray quiet The disable display can also be seen if the loading of the AS is not yet complete during loading of the changes For example a newly added message point does not yet exist on the AS Priorities of message types Three of the five buttons of the group display object are assigned several functions The status with the highest priority is displayed if various states are active simultaneously at a button due to the value of its linked tags The table below defines the corresponding rules It contains all default message types and the priorities of multiple functions top to bottom in descending order WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 343 Process control runtime 9 11 Group display Message type View Priority Alarm High High overrides Low however not Alarm Low acknowledged always overrides acknowledged Warning High 1 Warning overrides Tolerance Warning Low regardless of the acknowledgment Tolerance High Tolerance Low status 2 Warning High overrides Warning Low however not acknowledged always overrides acknowledged 3a For interconnection with process values Tolerance High overr
352. tgoing state visible property to specify whether an outgoing state is visible or not Note The quality code can only be evaluated by the extended analog display if the object property Value is made dynamic directly with a tag ormat Function of the Analog Display Page 89 igration of Extended Status and Analog Displays Prior to WinCC V6 2 Page 41 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Overview of process control system options 7 8 Format Function of the Analog Display 1 8 Format Function of the Analog Display Formatting options You format the value of the tag that will be displayed in the extended analog display as follows Formatting characters Display No characters Displays the number without formatting 0 Displays a digit or zero If the expression contains a digit at a position that is occupied by a 0 in the format string the digit is displayed Otherwise a zero is output If the number has less digits than the zeros in the format expression on both sides of the decimal point the leading or trailing zeros are displayed If the number has more decimal places after the decimal point than the zeros in the format expression the decimal places are rounded to the number of zeros If the number has more places before the decimal point than zeros in the format expression the additional places are displayed just as they are Displays a digit or no output If th
353. the group display hierarchy completely when saving check box is selected all tags in this group are deleted and created again For this reason you are not permitted to create tags within the tag group Group Signals Possible name conflicts 232 The Picture Tree Manager creates tags with the name lt picture name gt During Lifebeat Monitoring a tag named lt devicename gt is created for every device name This can cause conflicts with identical names To prevent identical tag names the picture name must not be the same as the device name or system tags with the name prefix If this is the case a corresponding message is issued The tag names that cause a name conflict are listed in the log file PictureTreeManagerCS log By changing the picture name you can resolve name conflicts WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager 6 4 Working with the Picture Tree Manager You cannot change picture names in the Picture Tree Manager Rename the pictures in the WinCC Explorer Then insert the modified picture into the hierarchy Note The project engineer my not create any tags with prefix Such actions are reserved for handling in the WinCC PCS 7 software You are not allowed to manipulate these system tags The system tags are necessary for proper functioning of the product See also Recalculating the group display hierarchy completely when saving Page 225 Win
354. the hierarchy window Use a Drag amp Drop operation to drag the container and its underlying containers to the new position When you release the mouse button the container with its underlying containers is inserted in the same level after the selected container or Use a Drag amp Drop operation to drag the container and its underlying containers to the new position When you release the mouse button a pop up menu will appear With this pop up menu you specify where the container and its underlying containers are to be inserted Insert After Insert Before Insert Into Node Cancel From the three options provided select the position at which the container should be inserted Page 234 Page 236 Page 240 Page Page Page 6 5 3 3 How to change the hierarchy using the shortcut menu Procedure 1 2 3 Select a container in the hierarchy window Open the corresponding shortcut menu Select the Cut Container menu command to move the container and all of its sublevel containers to the clipboard The affected containers are displayed in gray Select the target container Open the corresponding shortcut menu Paste the clipboard contents to the new position using the Insert After Insert Before or Insert into Node menu command WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 241 Picture Tree Manager 6 5 General information on the hierarchy Se
355. the picture because you cannot undo this procedure WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 257 Graphic Object Update Wizard 7 4 Dynamic Wizard of the Graphics Designer Procedure See also 7 4 5 Introduction Procedure See also 258 1 Update the objects with the Update Picture Objects Dynamic Wizard Open the Wizard in the Picture Functions tab 2 Make the following settings Select whether to only update the active picture that is open in the Graphics Designer or all of the pictures in the project In general do not update any template pictures with user object templates and no PCS 7 system pictures Files of this type can be identified by the prefix Specify the name of the template picture containing the template objects TEMPLATE pdl in the directory GraCS of the current project is proposed Specify the name of the configuration file in which the information about the updated picture object is retained This Wizard replaces the following picture objects with those from the template picture e Picture objects that have an object property to identify the object e g type e Picture objects that are present in the template picture In the process no export file is created If the export file is not required for editing purposes this makes sense Structure of the configuration file Page Dynamic Wizard of the Graphics Designer Page How to cha
356. the project Since a complete configuration is associated with the loss of load online change capability the following notice appears if the project is still capable of performing Load Online Changes ProjectEditor AN When complete configuration is selected there is no support For online DeltaLoading 4re you sure that you want to do this When you click Yes the settings you have made are accepted into the project When you click No the operation is canceled If the OS Project Editor has executed a basic run once with the setting Project documentation for the current configuration it does not mean that this project has lost the capability for load online changes forever To restore the load online change capability you only have to transfer the complete OS from PCS 7 ES once The Message configuration only radio button is intended for users that want to create a project with STEP 7 and transfer the configured messages to WinCC without having to use the user interface of Basic Process Control or PCS 7 All OS Project Editor control fields whose settings are not sent to the project are disabled The basic data such as the graphics are not transferred into the project The startup list and starting picture are not set in the computer properties Note If you add a client computer to a server project you must afterward run the OS Project Editor with the setting Project documentation for the current configuration
357. the setting User defined in the Device positioning in the system configuration selection box You cannot manually insert objects from the typical ConfigTypicals PDL into the system configuration picture Specifying display sizes of the lifebeat objects in the system configuration picture Several display sizes for each lifebeat object are saved in the typicals picture ConfigTypicals PDL and ConfigTypicals PDL The Lifebeat Monitoring uses the lifebeat object with the object property type lt device type gt 1 as the default for updating the system configuration picture 1 Open the system configuration picture Config PDL in the Graphics Designer editor 2 Select the device type whose display size you wish to change e g OS Open the object properties in the shortcut menu of the device type 3 Change the entry for the type object property from OS 1 to OS 2 The name of device type including the backslash may not be changed Close Graphics Designer 4 If you want to receive the lifebeat object changes update Lifebeat Monitoring To do so select the setting User defined in the Device positioning in the system configuration selection box Note On a PCS 7 OS you can also make the display changes using the Graphic Object Update Wizard Update the picture objects Select the desired typical picture and the configuration file LBMObjects cfg Specifying display form of the lifebeat objects in
358. the system configuration picture If the supplied display forms for lifebeat objects available in the typical picture ConfigTypicals PDL are insufficient you will need to create your own typical picture 1 Save the typical picture ConfigTypicals PDL as a copy under the name ConfigTypicals PDL You must not change the ConfigTypicals PDL typical file 2 Create a copy of the existing display forms for the device type for which you wish to generate a new display form 3 Enter a new identifier after the backslash for the type object property of the new object The name of device type including the backslash may not be changed WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 195 Lifebeat Monitoring 5 6 How to Design the System Configuration Picture 4 Now you can change the display form in the new object Note that you may not delete any of the existing object properties Close Graphics Designer 5 If you want to receive the lifebeat object changes update Lifebeat Monitoring To do so select the setting User defined in the Device positioning in the system configuration selection box If the file ConfigTypicals PDL exists Lifebeat Monitoring uses this file as the typical picture Now the variants in the ConfigTypicals PDL typical file are available to you for designing the system configuration picture Note You must not open the Graphics Designer editor while you are updati
359. the wrong WinCC version messages 1011500 Operator Input 2 s 3 s 4 s PCS 7 Not used Message 1011501 Operator Input Server 2 s started PCS 7 2 s Name of the PCS 7 Message computer 1011502 Operator Input Server 2 s stopped PCS 7 2 s Name of the PCS 7 Message computer 1011503 Operator Input S2S Server Server link started PCS 7 Message 1011504 Operator Input S2S Server Server link PCS 7 Message stopped 1011505 Operator Input S2S Server disturbed PCS 7 Placeholder is not used Message 2 s 3 s 4 s 1011506 Operator Input S2S Server active PCS 7 Placeholder is not used Message 2 s 3 s 4 s 1011507 Operator Input S2S Job disturbed PCS 7 2 s Order reference Message 2 s 3 s 4 s 3 s Connection status 1011508 Operator Input S2S Job active PCS 7 2 s Order reference Message 2 s 3 s 4 s 3 s Connection status 1011509 Operator Input No license found PCS 7 Message 1011510 Operator Input Login Unknown user PCS 7 2 s User name Message 2 s 1011511 Operator Input Login incorrect password for PCS 7 2 s User name Message 2 s 1012001 OS process 2 s switched to Master Time synchronization 2 s Device name e g control system mode 3 s CP1613 messages 3 s a no time master on bus b worse time master on bus WinCC Options for Process Control 96 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 12 Overview of the Pro
360. then click OK The file selection dialog box opens 2 Double click the lt Name gt mcp file In the file selection dialog box to display the selected project in WinCC Explorer 3 If you already started WinCC and want to download a project select the File gt Open menu command WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 287 Process control runtime 9 4 How to set up and load the project Selecting a computer If the computer is not entered in the computer list for the opened project use the following procedure to add the computer to the project e Single user project Right click Computer in WinCC Explorer to open the shortcut menu Select the Properties menu command The Properties dialog box opens Enter your computer name e Multi user project Modify a configured computer or add your own computer as an additional operator station You set the properties of the computer on which the project is to run in the Computer Properties dialog box WinCC Options for Process Control 288 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 4 How to set up and load the project 1 Click on Computer in WinCC Explorer and double click on the appropriate computer name in the Name column The following dialog box opens Comput rr propectars Gere Stans Pemncte Gusts Pure Furie lt Compu Type Seve Ca Jar u Be
361. thin a WinCC client project In addition you must have downloaded the package from the selected server to the WinCC client Measuring point Select the measuring points to be displayed from this drop down list box lt All gt is displayed by default including In the filter function you can enter a filter criterion Then only the measurement points that comply with the filter criterion are displayed excluding You can use the negative filter to exclude measurement points from the display The list displays only measurement points that comply with the filter criterion and that do NOT comply with the negative filter criterion If you enter e g in the including field and b in the excluding field all measurement points that do not begin with a b are displayed Load Loads the current filter Save Saves the current filter Representation The Display mode group provides five display modes for the measurement points to be displayed The default setting is Process picture in working area e Loop display in working area e Loop display as window e Group display e Process picture in working area e Process picture as window Note Measurement points for which the area is unknown do not possess any operator authorization If the measurement point selection fails check in the Component List Editor to determine whether the measuring point has been assigned an area If necessary specify the area for which the user
362. tion about the process see Windows Help 6 3 1 31 How to use the online help Introduction The Help gt Using Help menu command is used to obtain information on using the online help How to work with online help e Select the Help gt Using Help menu command 6 3 1 32 About Picture Tree Manager Introduction Select the Help gt About Picture Tree Manager menu command to obtain additional information about the Picture Tree Manager program and platform How to obtain additional information about the Picture Tree Manager program e Select the Help gt About Picture Tree Manager menu command 6 3 2 Standard toolbar Icons Er A a gt F 4 das The standard toolbar contains icons are used to execute frequently required commands Select the View gt Standard Toolbar menu command to show or hide the toolbar Icon Menu Command a Project gt Save Project gt Print Project Documentation Hierarchy s Edit gt Properties WinCC Options for Process Control 226 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Picture Tree Manager 6 3 Picture Tree Manager Structure Icon Menu Command k Help gt What s This 4 A View gt Large Icons we z View gt Small Icons 2 2 View gt List 2 View gt Refresh How to display hide the toolbar 1 Select the View gt Standard Toolbar menu command This changes the current selection 2 Activate the check box
363. tions for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA
364. to adapt the configuration without it being overwritten by the Project Editor Activate the Derive from check box if deriving the message class and message type configuration from a custom configuration file Use the button to select the corresponding configuration file This configuration file is copied to the project directory once and used as a template file the next time the Project Editor is opened The Message class Tolerance has to be acknowledge option is enabled by default in new projects as of WinCC V7 01 The messages of this message class therefore require acknowledgement The messages that have come in flash and are also shown in the following message lists e Incoming alarm list e Acknowledged alarm list e Outgoing alarm list e List of hidden messages and messages to be hidden e Single line message window in overview area Note In WinCC versions prior to V6 2 the OS Project Editor generates the message classes AS process control message and OS process control message with the message types System and Error in Alarm Logging Starting in V6 2 however these message classes are created with Failure and Error message types In order to activate the name change from System to Failure in projects prior to WinCC V6 2 you must activate the Update check box in the Message classes types group Activating system messages If you activate the Activate check box the messages from the LTMd
365. ton Area See also Page Page Page 303 9 7 2 Overview Area Introduction The overview window is a continuous display that provides an overview of the entire plant Each plant area is represented by an area selection button in the overview window With an area selection list the user can select the top process picture in the picture hierarchy The Picture Tree Navigator and certain key combinations support the user during navigation in the picture tree SC ene EN Container T Container Container Containers MoeT Container5 D Container TOTT a Description of elements This example overview window includes the following elements Functionality View Message line Displays the most recent incoming message of the highest priority Extended message line Opens a list displaying all incoming messages Loop in alarm alarm source picture selection amp Selects the picture with the alarm source WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 299 Process control runtime 9 7 User Interface Button for the Highest priority messages list HH e The button is only available during the installation of a PCS 7 OS This button flashes if a priority 16 message was activated The button also flashes after the message was acknowledged The button disappears when the message is gone e The Highest priority messages list appears when the button is clicked Displays the l
366. tore The functions of the Split Screen Manager are only available in an activated WinCC project The basic picture of the activated project is displayed in runtime The upper part of the basic picture contains the overview window with the configured buttons You call the WinCC pictures of the current project using the buttons The Split Screen Manager manages the display areas of all connected monitors using a basic picture You configure the structure of the basic picture with the aid of the OS Project Editor Note The Split Screen Manager is a WinCC option and is only available to you if you have installed the Basic Process Control option pack 2 13 2 Managing the Pictures Managing the picture memory In the Split Screen Manager each working area has a dedicated picture memory in the basic picture The picture memory is used as a simple way to store a picture in the working area Such a picture can then be retrieved at any time even more than once Storing a new picture will overwrite the previous picture in the picture storage WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 103 OS Project Editor 2 13 Split Screen Manager A separate picture memory is kept for each working area in the basic picture You use the following keys to save and call the picture in the picture memory The contents of the picture memory can be retrieved changed or deleted using the API functions of the Split Scre
367. trator manual WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 321 Process control runtime 9 8 System operator input 9 8 18 Disabling and enabling messages Disabling enabling messages from specific measuring points of an area Procedure 322 In certain process phases it may be useful to disable the messages from all measurement points of an area and re enable these at a later time The operator can disable and re enable all messages of group relevant measurement points with a single action The measurement points can be disabled and re enabled separately in any area BE Click this button in the second button set to disable the messages e of all measurement points of the work area e from the sublevel measurement points in the group display hierarchy of an area When messages are disabled e the measurement point stops reporting e a corresponding operator message is entered to indicate the disabled state of reporting at a measurement point e the disabled state is displayed at the measurement points e the disabled state is displayed in the group display of the higher level group display hierarchy and the area overview c Click this button of the second button to enable the messages for e all measurement points of the working area e the sublevel measurement points in the group display hierarchy of an area When messages are re enabled e the measurement point starts reporting again e a
368. ule You can connect the detail contacts to signal devices such as lamps or buzzers You can wire a device which is activated if the relevant signal module is no longer triggered to the watchdog alarm output This event is triggered by a failure of the corresponding OS You must choose whether to reset the signal module using the control software driver or an external acknowledgment button Take the following measures to use both variants in parallel e Interconnect pins 1 2 and 3 4 at jumper X114 of the ISA card in order to enable acknowledgment by means of external pushbutton You can find related topics in the section Configuration of switches and jumpers on ISA bus e You can interconnect pins 3 and 4 at jumper X6 of the PCI card to enable acknowledgment by means of external pushbutton You can find related topics in the section Configuration of switches and jumpers on the PCI bus Wire an external pushbutton to the reset input Wire the reset output accordingly in parallel to this button Horn interface X2 The module also features a 9 pin hardcopy interface X2 which is not used for WinCC PCS7 See also Page Page Page Page WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 159 Time Synchronization A 4 1 General Information on Time Synchronization Introduction Time synchronization is a WinCC application that controls the time synchronization throughout the system using the SIMATIC met
369. upper case lettering match the specification at Find what Find Next Click this button to start the search Cancel Click this button to exit the dialog box The search function is canceled WinCC Options for Process Control 274 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Component List Editor 8 5 How to edit a measuring point 8 5 How to edit a measuring point Prerequisite You can edit data in the Component List Editor under the following conditions e You can only change the entry point picture for measurement points created by the owner System ES using AS OS engineering e You can change the entry point picture the type and the area at measurement points created by the owner User Procedure 1 Select a measuring point 2 Select the Edit gt Edit measuring point command or double click in the line which contains the selected measuring point The following dialog box opens x Measuring point Temperature Type i Area Anlage_ v Entry point ia Bild_Teilanlage_1 pdl Object name Sammelanzeige Owner fu ser cne 3 Configure the edit settings You can select the text from the options provided or enter a text using the keyboard Field Definition Action Measuring point Displays the measuring point to be edited Type This is where you can edit the measuring point type Only the User owner can change the measuring point type Area Select the hierar
370. us sign is output immediately alongside a negative exponent When the symbol is E or e a minus sign is likewise output immediately alongside a negative exponent but a plus sign is output beside a positive exponent Displaying a literal character If you want to output characters other than those specified here you must enter a back slash before the character concerned or enter the character in quote marks Displaying the next character in the format string Many characters in the format expression have a special meaning and can only be displayed as literal characters if a back slash is entered in front of them The back slash is not displayed A back slash has the same effect as enclosing the following character in quote marks You indicate a back slash with two back slashes Examples of characters that cannot be displayed as literal characters are the letters for formatting the date and time a c d h m n p q s t w y and as well as the characters for formatting numbers 0 E e comma and dot and strings amp lt gt and ABC Displays a character string in quote marks Before you can enter text from the code in the Format format string you must enclose it in quotation marks with Chr 34 34 is the character code for quotation marks 40 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Overview of process c
371. utomatically integrated in the picture hierarchy You can also interconnect the group display objects independent of the picture tree The figure below shows a possible hierarchy of the group messages WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 11 Group display Explanation of the shown group display hierarchy The figure shows how the alarm source for a warning is displayed by clicking on the group display A warning is shown for Area 8 We examine the warning for Area 8 1 The warning originates in Areas 8 1 1 1 and 8 1 1 2 Select the warning by clicking in area 8 The alarm source in Area 8 1 1 is displayed Reason It is impossible in area 8 1 1 to determine to which of the sublevel areas the warning belongs If for instance there is no warning in Area 8 1 1 2 the picture for Area 8 1 1 1 will be displayed WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 347 Process control runtime 9 11 Group display See also 9 11 3 Overview See also 348 Page Influencing the Acknowledgement Behavior via the EventQuit Tag Page 848 Influencing the Acknowledgement Behavior via the EventQuit Tag The events ToleranceLow ToleranceHigh Operator prompt and Measuring point disable are not acknowledgeable events in the PCS 7 environment Using the EventQuit tag and the Acknowledgment mask attribute in the group dis
372. utput of trends allows users to monitor the runtime of current or archived processes Status display Status displays are small images icons which can be shown in the pictures The status displays allow the monitoring of process or plant states A status display may be a valve icon which changes its color and position depending on the valve status Status displays may consist of different symbols or of the same symbol with different colors patterns Extended Status Display The extended status display lets you display the status of a tag in runtime with the aid of configured pictures Tag status can also be displayed in connection with an alarm status The alarm status results from evaluating the group value All standard graphic file types are supported Extended Analog Display The extended analog display lets you display the contents of a tag in runtime in connection with an alarm status in different foreground and background colors The alarm status results from evaluating the group value 9 12 2 How to Select a Picture via a Measurement Point Introduction Ina PCS 7 OS you can also change a picture via the measurement point The tag selected in the measurement point list represents a measurement point that is displayed highlighted in the selected display format R 1_5 CONTR_001 WinCC Options for Process Control 352 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime Prerequisite
373. utton set 1 330 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 9 Message system Example In button set 1 the user clicks the Incoming alarm list button When the user has selected the Incoming alarm list function the following window for example is displayed WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 331 Process control runtime 9 9 Message system a Ser ee Date Time Priori Source 332 5 Incoming alarm list Event WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Process control runtime 9 9 Message system Content of the message line The following table shows the meaning of the individual columns message blocks in a message line Terminology Explanation Date Date for Incoming Outgoing and Acknowledged Time Every time the status of the message changes the associated time element time stamp of the status change is displayed Priority Displays the priority of the message Source Technological assignment of the message source Plant ID consisting of the hierarchy chart name and block name input as placeholder Location ID LID for driver components Event Contains a user definable message text for technological blocks In the case of driver blocks contains a message text with integrated associated values for line rack slo
374. ve exported prior to WinCC V6 2 Behavior of message priorities in Runtime When a queued event is acknowledged it goes to the background regardless of its priority Events with lower priority that have not yet been acknowledged are displayed prior to events of higher priority that have already been acknowledged Lower priority events are not displayed so long as a higher priority event is displayed as Unacknowledged Outgoing Special settings in the properties dialog box See also 38 The extended analog display has been modified for optimum compatibility with how the group display behaves If the Group Relevant attribute is set to Yes in the object properties the status tag interconnected under Group value enters into the ORing UP of the group display hierarchy If the Group Value attribute is not interconnected then you must set Group Relevant to No The process alarm Group display tag EventState not found would otherwise not be triggered in Runtime Property Other Acknowledgment mask To ensure consistent runtime response we recommend that you configure the acknowledgment mask for the group display and the extended analog display in exactly the same way For the extended analog status display the supplied PCS7 settings for acknowledgment sample of 17 or 3089 prior to WinCC V7 01 is possibly not suitable for your project and must be adjusted Property Other Outgoing state visible You use the Ou
375. ve master 161 Adapting Message line 67 Overview window 56 Alarm 57 825 Alarm logging Alarm Logging Defining the area name Alarm Source Display via Group Display Alarm window Alarms Disable Enable Selection criteria in RT Analog display Extended 85 Archive tag Area 70 75 Hide 75 Area buttons 54 70 Area preview 54 70 Areas tab 70 Area specific filtering 63 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Arrange Empty button 75 Picture Icons Alphabetically Picture Icons Automatically Audio alarm 25 Authentication 63 Authorization B Bar graph Basic data 85 Basic data tab 85 Basic picture 103 Batch flexible Batch Visualization BCE Blank pictures Button Area 303 Button functions In Runtime C Call Online Help Change Container name Hierarchy Name Change by means of drag and drop Hierarchy Change using the menu bar Hierarchy Change using the shortcut menu Hierarchy Changes Download Changes in Picture Tree Manager Check Authorization Chipcard Chip card Login in Runtime Menu extensions 369 Option Chipcard check 373 Index Operation in runtime write to 369 Client Color of the area buttons Colored display Component list Generating Component List Editor 27 Component List Editor documentation Content Computer Computer list Name Configuration in the PCS 7 environment
376. ver is an external receiver station for time signals used for synchronizing the computer clock The receiver is connected to the COM2 serial interface The signals are received from the long wave transmitter DCF77 which has been transmitting time signals in coded form on the 77 5 kHz frequency for over 20 years Because of its central location in Central Europe Mainflingen near Frankfurt and its extensive range up to 2000 km this transmitter is significant far beyond Germany DCFRS Driver A driver is supplied for the DCFRS receiver This must be loaded before the DCFRS receiver is put into operation The driver and the description are included in the scope of delivery for the DCFRS WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 181 Time Synchronization 4 7 Hardware Support of Time Synchronization WINGPS GPS receiver The GPS receiver is a receiving station for satellite signals for synchronizing the computer connected externally to the COM2 serial port WinCC Options for Process Control 182 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Time Synchronization 4 7 Hardware Support of Time Synchronization WINGPS Driver A driver is included with the WINGPS receiver This must be loaded before the WINGPS receiver is put into operation The driver and the description are included in the scope of delivery for the WINGPS Note During plant configuration make sure that several applications are
377. ves the current filter Representation You can select one of five display formats from the Show as area The default setting is Process picture in working area Process picture in the working area The measuring point is visualized as a process picture in the working area Process picture as window The measuring point is visualized as a window Loop display in working area The measuring point is visualized as loop display in the working area Loop display as window The measuring point is visualized as loop display window Group display The measuring point is visualized as group display Note Measurement points for which the area is unknown do not possess any operator authorization If the measuring point selection fails check in the Component List Editor to determine whether the measuring point has been assigned an area There specify the area for which the user has authorization If no entry point picture is configured the faceplate for which the measuring point was configured is displayed The default setting of the display mode is then Loop display in working area The first two radio buttons in the Show as area are then disabled WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 279 Component List Editor 8 7 How to configure the Loop in Alarm function 8 7 How to configure the Loop in Alarm function Introduction The Loop in Alarm function is only available at a
378. view Hours IV Hinutes doo 18 30 25 012 IV Milliseconds Cancel WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 61 OS Project Editor 2 5 Message Configuration Tab Note You cannot edit the column widths of the message window if you run OS Project Editor in a WinCC client project or if the Online Delta Loading Configuration Only option was selected on the General tab You cannot change the order of the columns See also Message Configuration Tab Page 57 WinCC Options for Process Control 62 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA OS Project Editor 2 6 Message Display Tab 2 6 Message Display Tab 2 6 1 Message Display Tab Introduction In the Message Display tab you can configure the runtime response of the message system and the display format of the messages in the message pages or group displays P o5 Project editor 2x T Layout x Message configuration E Message display fp Area Runtime window B Basic data Ef General r Message filter No filter Half of the working area Detail Messages with area enable Quarter of the working area Extended message line Acknowledgeable messages in separate list User defined Acknowledgeable messages on separate page switch selectable Authorization check of messages without a specified area The messages are assigned to the follow
379. ws all configured plant sections in the sequence in which they are displayed as area buttons in the overview window In the default layouts the sequence of the buttons is from left to right and from the top down So as to define area buttons for any future extension of the plant sections you can insert empty area buttons as placeholders even at the project creation stage Do this by using Empty Buttons which you include at the required position in the Visible areas list You can simultaneously select as many entries in the list as you wish and move them with the up and down buttons Click gt to remove the selected entries and click gt gt to remove all entries from the Visible areas list WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 71 OS Project Editor 2 7 The Areas Tab Areas not Needed The Areas not needed list is used when anticipatory planning of a reserve configuration and shows all the areas in the project that do not appear in the Visible areas list The Empty Button entry serves as a placeholder for an area button that you intend to assign to a plant section at some future point in time You can select multiple entries and click lt to insert them in the Visible areas list Click lt lt to insert all other entries except the lt Empty Button gt entry Alternatively you can configure reserve areas with empty pictures assigned in the Picture Tree Manager for s
380. x the following additional editors are provided for your use in the project navigation window Editor OS Project Editor Description The OS Project Editor is used for configuring the runtime user interface and the alarm system in accordance with PCS 7 requirements The Project Editor provides extended options for designing user specific basic data With the OS Project Editor you position the buttons in the overview area and configure the order of the areas Picture Tree Manager The Picture Tree Manager is used to manage a hierarchy of systems subsystems function names and Graphics Designer pictures Time Synchronization You can use this feature to configure the time synchronization for plant via the Industrial Ethernet bus or the Local Area Network The OS which is the active time master ensures that all the other OS and AS on the system bus keep in synchronization with the current time Slaves receive the current time via the system bus in order to synchronize their internal clock Horn Use the Horn option to configure the assignment of required message classes to the outputs from a signal module and or sound card It offers you the necessary runtime functionality for selecting and acknowledging the appropriate signaling devices when messages occur Lifebeat Monitoring Lifebeat monitoring ensures the continuous monitoring of individual OS and AS systems Component List Editor The Component List Editor is u
381. y not ready to function due to a fault for example are crossed out in the graphic with a red line WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 203 Lifebeat Monitoring 5 8 Dialog box of the Lifebeat Monitoring Graphical structure of a system configuration In this picture you see an example of a system configuration Config PDL LBM_Verb lt Device name OS1 OS2 Loaded lt Status Loaded Disrupted Device type ri va WinCC f OS Plant bus 4 Device type Device name AS3 Status Disrupte If a number of automation systems AS are connected to an OS they are shown is series The servers in the system configuration are represented as follows on a client e Disturbed A device monitored by the server has failed e Failed The server itself has failed e Established The connection to the server has been established yie Server 1 Server 2 Server 3 Disrupted Failure Loaded WinCC Options for Process Control 204 System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA Lifebeat Monitoring 5 8 Dialog box of the Lifebeat Monitoring See also Page Page Page Page WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 205 Picture Tree Manager 6 6 1 Picture Tree Manager Content The Picture Tree Manager is used to manage a hierarchy of systems subsystems and
382. zation See also ardware Support of Time Synchronization Page 1180 he Time Synchronization editor Page 1164 ow to configure the synchronization through the system bus CP1613 and CP1623 Page 168 ow to configure the synchronization over the Local Area Network Page 174 Simultaneous use of Time Synchronization over System Bus and Local Area Network Page 177 WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 163 Time Synchronization 4 2 The Time Synchronization editor 4 2 The Time Synchronization editor Introduction Open the Time Synchronization editor by double clicking on it in the WinCC Explorer You specify the required settings in the configuration dialog box 3 Time Synchronization WinCC_ 6_2 Oi mcp orcs ooo o porcos o ards SN ASTENN KEEP WinCC Options for Process Control System Manual 02 2013 A5E32315704 AA 164 Time Synchronization 4 2 The Time Synchronization editor Use time receive service The time reception service is activated by activating the Use time receive utility check box If used on the system bus the time synchronization checks now whether the time reception service is deactivated in slave mode and activated in master mode Disable time reception service in slave mode in order to prevent the station time from being set in parallel by the time synchronization and by the time reception service Disabling time synchron

WinCC/Options for Process Control - Service, Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents